o> - * V & ■*+. \T> ■ *< «+ * /> - - '/ ■ HBk. 4affl jVeii- Coll. £ C tft/^- / THE APOLOGY OF PLATO. Uontron MACMILLAN AND CO. PUBLISHERS TO THE UNIVERSITY OF THE APOLOGY OF PLATO, WITH A REVISED TEXT AND ENGLISH NOTES, AND A DIGEST OF PLATONIC IDIOMS, BY THE REV. JAMES RIDDELL, M.A. FELLOW AND TUTOR OF BALLIOL COLLEGE, OXFORD. OXFORD: AT THE CLARENDON PRESS. M.DCCC.LXVII. ,4 U *o2 l?^ ADVEETISEMENT. COMPLETE in itself, this volume is yet but a fragment of a larger undertaking. In the Oxford series of Plato's works, which commenced with Mr. Posters edition of the Philebus in 1860, the Apology, Crito, Phsedo, and Symposium were under- taken by Mr. Riddell. Had he lived, all four would probably have appeared together. The Digest of Idioms, founded on an examination of all the writings of Plato, which he had prepared to accom- pany his edition of these dialogues, would not have seemed out of proportion to the other contents of such a volume. His death on the 14th of Septem- ber, 1866, left the undertaking incomplete. The preparations which he had made for the Crito, Phsedo, and Symposium, though extensive and valuable, had not received their final shape. But the Apology seemed to be ready for the press. Its text was settled, a critical and exegetical com- mentary was written out fair, and a full introduc- tion had been provided, together with an appendix vi ADVERTISEMENT. on the Saiiuoviov of Socrates. The Digest of Idioms also, to which frequent reference was made in the commentary, appeared to have been transcribed for the printer, although a few pencil notes (which have been printed in this volume at the foot of the pages to which they belong) showed that addi- tions would have been made to it, if the writer had lived to publish it himself; and perhaps in some instances a different expression would have been given to the views which it contains. Under these circumstances it has been thought advisable to publish the Apology and the Digest of Idioms by themselves. My task has been only, in conducting them through the press, to remove clerical errors and to verify references. It may be convenient to state that Plato is cited in this volume according to the pages of Stephanus. In references to the Orators the sections of Baiter and Sauppe's Zurich edition have been given toge- ther with the pages of Stephanus in the minor Orators and Reiske in Demosthenes. In the Dra- matists Dindorf s numbers are followed as they stand in the edition of the Poetse Scenici published in 1830. With regard to quotations, the text of the Zurich editions has been used both for Plato and for the Orators, the text of Dindorf (from the edition of 1830) for the Dramatists. Wherever a reading is quoted which is not found in these editions, I have endeavoured to indicate the source from which it has been derived. ADVERTISEMENT. vii The text of the Apology itself is in the main that of C. F. Hermann. Even the punctuation is his. Some of the brackets found in his edition have been silently omitted ; but, with this excep- tion, every instance in which he has not been fol- lowed is mentioned in the commentary. EDWIN PALMEK. Balliol College, Oxford, June 8, 1867. INTRODUCTION. PAET I. THE TRIAL OF SOCRATES. i. Nature of the Proceeding. JlHE trial of Socrates took place before a Heliastic court, according to the forms of an ordinary ypa nal twc itoKltikwv, Avkwv fie virep as all actuated by class-feeling in their r&v pr)T6pcov. The contrast which is attack upon him. 'E/c roiirwu kcu Me- implied in this sentence between p?- Atjto's fxoi eireOero Kai" Avvros kcu Av- Topes and TroXniKoi shows that the ku>v, MeArjTos iaXv virep ra>v ttoitjtui/ words severally denote definite classes INTRODUCTION. iii of those who exercised professions of the principles of which they could give no intelligent account. Nowhere is this cause of offence traced more connectedly than in the Apology itself of Athenian citizens. There seems no ground for thinking with Wiggers (Sokrates p. 97) and others, who have followed in this view Petitus' Com- ment, in Legg. Attic. Lib. III. Tit. hi, that there was any order of p-fjTopes, ten in number, appointed yearly, and deriving their origin from Solon. Any such institution could not but have interfered with the la-qyopia which even to the time of Demosthenes was the cherished charter of Athenian democracy. On the contrary, even the precedence which was allowed by Solon in the assembly to speakers above the age of 50 seems to have fallen into abeyance. But we find that in the time of the Orators or earlier (see the latter part of Cleon's speech in Thucyd. III. 40) these p^- ropes had attained a mischievous im- portance. iEschines speaks of them (iii. 3. p. 54) as Svvaareias kavTols 7re- pirroiovvTes, and in Alcib. II. 145 A it is said that oaa S-q irore r\ ttoAis irpir- rei irpbs &K\r}U ttoXlv 7) avrr] naQ' aur'fju, airb ttjs rwv prjTopcov ^vjxfiovXrjs anavra yiyvercu. To be a p-qrup had become a regular profession. A new art had arisen, designated by the name p-q- TopiK-f], which is seen to have been itself a new word from the way in .which it is used in the Gorgias (448 D) — r)]v KaKov^ivqv p-qropiK-qv. In their capacity of awqyopoi the prjTopes were brought into prominence (Hee- ren, Polit. Hist, of Anc. Greece, c. 13. p. 232 of Eng. Transl.) by the fre- quency of state trials in the time suc- ceeding the Peloponnesian war. But it was no less as 0-vfj.fiovkot to the Assembly that the prjropes were in requisition. In all questions of legis- lation and of policy the debate was niainly in their hands. The epoch of this ascendancy is dated by Isocrates (viii. 121. p. 183, where he calls it tV iirl rod fi-ri/Aaros Svi/acrreiai') from the Decelean war. or subsequent to Pericles (ib. 126. p. 184). The two species, avfi- &ov\evTiK7i and SiKaviKrj, of Aristotle's triple division of p-qTopiKT} in his trea- tise correspond with this double scope of the p-qrwp's profession. The tto- AltikoI as a class must have emerged at the same time as the pr,Top€s. In itself 7ro\i,TiKbs means no more than ' Statesman' in the sense in which this term might have been applied to Pericles. But an Athenian of Plato's time, speaking with reference to Athens, would mean by ttoXitikoI that class of men who made public busi- ness their profession, — robs -noAiriKovs Xsyojxhovs, Plat. Politic. 303 C. Our conception of the ttoKitlkoX will be best completed by comparing them with the p-fjTopts. Down to Pericles' time there would be no distinction. He united both characters like the great men before him. But after- wards the debates came into separate hands, and the speakers in the As- sembly were for the most part no longer the great commanders in the field and the bearers of the highest offices. The fact and the reasons are stated by Aristotle (Pol. V. v. 7), vvv Se rrjs pr\i opiK.r\s 7)v£r) (j.evr,s 01 Swdfieuoi Xeyeiv Srj/uaycoyovai /uez/ Si airsipiav 5e twv TToX^fxiKav ovk iiriTiOevTcu. At the same time, inasmuch as counsel as well as action was needed for the conduct of the state, those who were engaged in the different branches of this common work were not abso- lutely contradistinguished : cf. Plato, Gorg. 520 A, Phdr. 258 B, and the general terms in which the p-qropes are described — e. g. by Lysias (xviii. 16. p. 150) as 01 rb. rrjs ir6\ews irpar- Torres. B % vi INTRODUCTION. as 501 (which is also Heffter's conclusion), and the number of those for condemnation as 28 1, we have 220 for his acquittal. Then 31 exactly, or 30 in round numbers, changing sides, would have effected his acquittal. Cron, not allowing for the odd 1, reckons 219 for acquittal. 4. Form of Indictment. Plat. Apol. 24 B. 2a)Kpari]s abtKel tovs re viovs biacfiOetpwv Kal Oeovs ovs rj irokts vojjll^l ov vojii&v erepa be baifxovta kclivcl. Diog. Laert. II. 40. fj avTodpLoaia ttjs btKrjs et)(e tovtov tov TpoiTov avaKtiTCLL yap ert Kal vvvj (p-qal Qafitoplvos 1 , ev rw Mrj- rpcoor Tabe iypdxf/aTo Kal avTOJfJLOcraTO Mikiros MeAtrou UtrO^vs 2&)K/oarei ^uxppoi'LaKov 'AAoo7reK^e^' 'ASiKet Sco/cpar^s ovs }x\v t) uokis vojjll&i Oeovs ov vopXfav, 'irepa be Kaiva batfiovia elarjyov- fjitvos' aSuet 8e Kal tovs viovs biacpOzipMV. ripi-q^a Oavaros. 5. Procedure at the Trial. Order oe the Pleadings. From iEschines (iii. 197. p. 82) we learn that in a ypa^r) irapavopuxiv the time assigned for the trial was divided into three equal lengths : eyxetrat to fxkv irpcarov vbcop rw KaTv,yop(^ to 8e bevrepov vboap rw ttjv ypacfrrjv (pevyovTt Kal rots ets amb to itpay\xa kiyovcn (i. e. rots o-vv7]y6poi.s, not the witnesses whose examination was extra to the time allowed for the pleadings: cf. Lys. xxiii. 4, 8. pp. 166, 167, Kal \xoi z-nikafie to vba)p) to Tpkov vbuop tyyjziTai t9\ TipLrjaeL Kal rw fieyidei ttjs opyrjs Trjs vixeTtpas (i. e. for the prosecutor to speak again on the amount of penalty, and the defendant to reply, and the judges to vote). The second of these lengths then would be occupied by the defence of the accused and his avviqyopoi, represented by the main part of the Apology, i. e. as far as 35 E. The Xeno- phontean Apology says (22) that speeches were made vtto re avTov Kal tu>v avvayopevovTcov (pikcov avT&, but the Platonic manifestly would have us think of Socrates defending himself alone. Then would follow the taking of the votes of the judges, and the announcement of the result, by which the charge is declared proven. The third length then begins with the second speech of the 7 [Favorinus wrote a work on Socrates in the time of the Emperor Hadrian.] INTRODUCTION. vii prosecutor in advocacy of the penalty he had named ; and the remainder of it would be occupied by Socrates' avTvri\M\v 01 vlds eTurriSeiWres a 2c*)/cpar?7S hibdarKet 7iai>res TravraTTaat btacpOaprjaovraL' rj ovv ttjv dpxrjv ovk x INTRODUCTION. TTpOfTeorTrjKOTOLS TTpOS 7(3 bLKCL(TTr}pt(£> TToWoVS b\ T&V TTpecrfivTepaV ovk SkCyovs be €K ttjs aWrjs 'EAAdSos avveikeyne'vovs els rr\v aKpoaaiv, ii. 5. p. 28, rj tG>v efadev nepiecTT^KOTOdv (aryebbv 5' ot 7rA.etoTot t&v ttoXitQv napeunv) rj t&v biKaar&v, hi. 56. p. 61, baovs ovbels iKairore fjLefJLvrjrai irpbs ayGtva brjfjLoatov irapayevo- [xevovs. Production of witnesses. It has been questioned by C. F. Hermann whether Plato intended the reader of the Apology to imagine any introduc- tion of witnesses to take place. It can hardly be doubted that he did : it is part of the verisimilitude which characterises the whole speech. At 19 D Socrates, wishing to appeal to the judges as witnesses, employs the common formula for doing so — fjL&prvpas 6' avTovs vja&v tovs ttoKKovs irape^ofxai. Of. iEsch. ii. 122. p. 44, kcu tovtcov vfAels ol T-qv yfrrj^ou fxeWovres fyepeiv ev vixiv ecrovrai ttoXXol p,apTvpe$ must mean that the pro- duction of the witnesses is to follow, coming so near as it does to the common formula tovtoiv 8' vpuv tov(ii.) *H avTLTifJLrjais. In the Xenophontean Apology (23) it is denied that Socrates made any dzmri/^crij — ovre avrbs vTreTLiirjcraTo ovre rovs 4>i\ovs etacrev a\Xa Kai eAeyeu on to vnoTiixao-Oai SfAokoyovvTos dr) abt- K€iv. The Platonic avTLTLixrjats, both of the cririqcris kv irpvra- vcdo and of the 30 minge, is (waiving the question of its being historical or not) wholly ironical : there could be no serious expectation that such an offer would be accepted. Diogenes Laertius says that this d^rtrtjurjo-is turned 80 more of the judges against him — Kal ot davarov clvtov Kariyvwaav 7rpoo~6£vT€s aXXas \jrri(f)OV$ 6yhor\Kovra. (iii.) The last words. The latter part from rots §e a7To\jrri(f)Lo-aixivoLs (29 E) we are to imagine as spoken kv w ol apyovres ao-yoXiav rjyov, and only those who chose would hear it (cf. 7rapajueiVare tovovtov \povov, ibid.). c 2 PAET II. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE APOLOGY. i. ITS ORATORICAL STRUCTURE. i. Its employment of commonplaces (ro7roi). ii. The " old accusers." iii. The Delphic response. iv. The general arrangement of the defence properly so called. v. Its dramatic framework. 2. HOW FAR CHARACTERISTIC OF SOCRATES. 3. ITS ADEQUACY AS A DEFENCE. 1. Oratorical Structure. A close examination of the structure of the Apology resolves the question how far it preserves to us the actual defence made by Socrates. The criticism of Wiggers and Schleierma- cher, that the Apology is the purest extant relic of Socrates, falls to the ground before the internal evidence which the Apology itself supplies. Xenophon (Mem. IV. viii. 5) tells us that Socrates turned his thoughts away from the preparation of any defence — ijbr} -[jlov k-niyeipovvros (ppovrto-aL rrjs irpbs tovs biK(MTTas airoXoyias -qvavTi&Qt) to haifjLoviov. Now the Apology is artistic to the core, whether in respect of the recurrence of received tottoi of Attic pleaders, or of the arrangement and out- ward dress of the arguments (observe especially the artifice of " the old accusers/' of which presently), or of the tripartite dramatic arrangement of the whole. The art and the manner, worthy as they assuredly are of Plato, are also distinctively characteristic of him. The subtle rhetoric of this defence would ill accord with the historical Socrates, even had the defence of Socrates been as certainlv as we know it not to have been the offspring of study and premeditation. INTRODUCTION. xiii (i.) Employment of commonplaces. We may trace this in detail through the defence or the first of the three parts of the oration. The exordium may be completely paralleled, piece by piece, from the Orators. The imputation of conjoint falsity and plausibility, the denial of being beivbs Xeyeiv (cf. Lys. xix. i, 2. p. 152, Isseus x. t. p. 79), the asking pardon for Xoyovs ttoXv t&v eWiafjiivGov XeyecrOat. nap vpXv e%r}XXay\xevovs (as Isocr. xv. 179 expresses it), the plea of unfamiliarity with law-courts (Isocr. xv. 38. p. 318, ovtgos airexopm tovtquv cos ovbels aXXos t&v ttoXit&v), the begging for an impartial hearing (Lys. xix. 2, 3. p. 152), the deprecation of Oopvfios (cf. e. g. iEsch. ii. 24. p. 31, eiraivco els virepfioXrjv vixens, co avbpes, otl o-tyf] /ecu Si/cento? 7]\xS>v aKovere), the disclaiming a style unbefitting an old man (cf. Isocr. xii. 3. p. 233, rjyovpLai yap ov\ apixoTreiv), — these topics, of which the exordium of the Apology is wholly made up, occur continually in the Orators. Next, in meeting the judges' prejudices, advantage is taken of another common topic — allegation of the existence of encz- (3oXa£ (cf. Lysias xix. 5. p. 152). The way in which the charge of being a aocpbs is dealt with has many parallels : cf. e. g. Isocr. xv. passim. No accusation was more indiscri- minately launched than this, and the answers to it assumed consequently, in great measure, the character of common- places. Socrates twits Meletus with having instituted the whole of the proceedings for his own amusement (24 C); so Lysias xxiv. 18. p. 170; and again with presuming on the inadvertence or obtuseness of the court; cf. Lys. xxvi. 5. p. 175, ravra XPV v7ro- Xaiifiaveiv (jli) evr\Qeis airco elvai boKr\Te. Socrates alleges (32 A), though in a refined way, the meri- torious acts of his past life ; — a common tottos. Cf. Lys. xvi. 33, xxi. 1. pp. 146, 161. Compare again eyco be bibaaKaXos piev ovbevbs 77007707' eyev6p.r]v (33 A) with Isocr. xv. 85, eyco Se t&v p.ev Ibtoyrcav ovbiva 77co77ore <$>avr](To [xat TrapaKaXeo-as erf ep^avrbv ttjv be ttoXlv oXrjv iretpoopLai TteiQeiv tolovtols TrpaypLacnv einyeipelv ef &v avroi Te evbatpLOvr]- (TOV(JL K.T.X. The answer to the charge about perverting the young is xiv INTRODUCTION. paralleled by Isocr. xv. 240, tovs iraTepas &v ecopaTe t&v avvov- TOUV TjfJLiV KCU TOVS oIk€LOVS ayCLVCLKTOVVTCLS kcu ypatpopievovs. The particular form of challenge is paralleled by Andoc. i. $5. p. 5> tovtwv Toivvv t&v c\vbpG>v ol pkv rJKOvai kcu elcnv evOabe T&v be anoQavovrmv elaX iroWol Ttpoar\KovTes' &v ov av tls v7r6X.r)\j/iv bvv ttoW&v bia(3o\rj re kclI cpOovos. The seriousness of tone which marks the answer to "the old accusers," the rjOiKt] ttlo-tls which is thrown into it, and the absence of irony, contrast sharply with the banter with which the charges of the real indictment are met immediately after- wards. This earnestness and almost anxiety of tone, the prominent position of this portion of the Apology, the irrele- vance of its ostensible reference, the very technicality with which it is drawn up, forbid a more literal acceptation of its drift, and constrain us to find in it a signal exercise of rhe- torical art. (iii.) The Delphic response. Again, as the objective prominence given to " the old xvi INTRODUCTION. accusers'" is a rhetorical cloak for an attack on the prejudices of the judges, so the prominence given to the Delphic response (20 E sqq.) is a device of a semi-rhetorical character under cover of which Socrates is enabled to avoid an avowal of the real purpose which had animated him in his tour of exami- nation, — which was to effect an intellectual revolution by sub- stituting a sounder knowledge for the prevalent pretensions to knowledge, of the hollowness of which he entertained the deepest conviction. Such an explanation would, to say the least, not have been appreciated. What is to be noticed is, that he does not plead the oracle, (the authenticity of which there is no ground for doubting), as an after excuse for his necessarily unpopular mission, — which would have been natu- ral enough. But he goes beyond this, and represents the oracle as the cause of his engaging in that mission; whereas (as Zeller observes) he must have already been committed to this and already been a marked person, before any such ques- tion as that put to the Pythia by Chaerephon could have had any point or elicited any such remarkable answer. The repre- sentation of the oracle as giving him the first suggestion of his crusade against fictitious knowledge, as having through- out been the lodestar to which he shaped his course, and as having sustained him in the thankless labour of years, is unhistorical ; but Socrates employs it in the exposition of his antecedents in a semi -rhetorical spirit, to bring the audience a certain distance on their way without the offence which a direct avowal of his purpose would have aroused in their minds. (iv.) The general arrangement of the defence properly so called. Every care has been taken to marshal the topics of the defence to the best advantage. The answer to the indictment itself is placed in the middle of the speech, where least atten- tion naturally falls upon it. The arrangement is the same as that of Demosthenes' speech on the Crown, but the reasons are different in the two cases. In both the technical argu- ment is introduced, where it will least challenge attention ; but there because it is the weak point of Demosthenes' case, here because, though easily established, it is comparatively immaterial to the issue. The real effort of the defence needed INTRODUCTION. xvii to be exerted first in combating the general prejudices which affected Socrates as a reputed Philosopher and Sophist, and secondly in offering a somewhat more particular personal jus- tification of Socrates. Accordingly the portions of the defence which are concerned with these two points, as they are the fullest and most earnest, are also the most conspicuous by position. The first confronts us at the outset, and the other engages us after Meletus has been dealt with. (v.) Dramatic framework. The customary procedure of an ayav rtju^ros has prompted Plato to crown the Apology of Socrates with a further artistic completeness. The oration becomes a drama. An action in three stages passes before us ; the tone changes with the action; there is even some change in the dramatis persona?. We take our stand among the listeners who crowd the cour The first Act comprises the defence, with the dialogue between Socrates and Meletus, the voting of the judges, and the decla- ration of their verdict. The second comprises the tl^q-ls of the prosecutor, Socrates'' ironical clvt it l^v is, the intervention of Plato and other friends of Socrates, the first suspense, and then the final verdict. In the third Act the judges appear before us distinguished into two separate bodies, addressed separately by Socrates, the one his friends, his true judges, the other divested of the name and doomed to the conse- quences of their unrighteous deed. The tone of apologetic argument in the first Act is succeeded by dignified irony in the second, and this again in the third by a strain of lofty prophecy. 2. how far is the apology characteristic of Socrates ? Zeller (II. 134. note) insists that there is an absence in the Apology of that free artistic handling which characterises the Dialogues, and claims this as an evidence that Plato has bound himself to follow the line actually taken by Socrates. But the strength of this position is diminished by several con- siderations. In the first place we have seen how great an amount of art has found its way into the structure of the Apology; we have seen too how that same art has not been D xviii INTRODUCTION. restricted to the arrangement and outward dress of the speech, but so penetrates its very substance, that even here it is im- possible to ignore or definitively to limit the rhetorical element. It is only with this considerable abatement that Zeller's asser- tion of the absence of free artistic handling can be admitted. But, in the second place, so far as the fact remains, — and to a certain extent it does, — it is referable to more obvious causes than that of fidelity to the speech of Socrates. The con- ditions which Plato had to fulfil were those of a speech in a court of justice, pronounced on a definite historical occasion ; he had to consult the exigencies of forensic verisimilitude, and to embody a reply to the definite charges of a well-known indictment. And although with him (as with Xenophon in the Memorabilia, though in a different manner,) the main object certainly was the ultimate one of presenting to the world a serious and adequate justification of his adored teacher, yet he was none the less under the necessity of adopting for his framework the circumstances of the actual trial. In the third place, — in presence of little or no independent testimony as to what Socrates actually said, — we have the fact before us that the Platonic Apology was not alone in the field as a professed record of the great teacher's defence. The Xenophontean Apology, devoid as it is of authority, being perhaps a compi- lation from Xenophon's Memorabilia I. i, ii, IV. viii (see Stein- hart's Anmerkungen I. 2 in Platon's Sammtliche Werke uber- setzt von Hieronymus Miiller, Leipzig 1851), is a case in point. Had the Platonic Apology been a record of confessed history, is it possible that the Xenophontean Apology should have been so framed as to differ from it not only as to what was said but as to what was done, — as for instance in the statement (22) that Socrates' friends spoke at the trial as Gvvriyopoi, and again (23) that Socrates refused viroTifjiao-dai altogether, both which statements conflict with the Platonic representation? But there were yet other Apologies extant besides these. Aristotle in the Rhetoric (II. xxiii. 13) quotes from a Socratic Apology of Theodectes, as containing the fol- lowing passage, eis irolov Upov fjo-ifirjKt ; rivas de&v ov TZTi\x-r)Ktv ovs f) Ttokis vo[jll(€i ; and besides in the same chapter he quotes the following passages without mention of their authors but obviously from similar compositions ; jue'AAere 8e Kpiveiv ov INTRODUCTION. xix 7T£pt HLvKparovs dAAa irepl kirirrj'b^vixaTos, et \pr] (frtXoacxfie'LV (18), and ro hai}i6viov oiihiu kcmv aXh! r) Oebs r) deov epyov kolitol octtis oUtcli 6eov ipyov zlvai tovtov avayKYj oUo-Oul kcu Oeovs elvat (8). Once more, it is probable enough, that the story 9 of Lysias having offered Socrates for use on his trial a defence of his own composing grew out of his having written an elaborate posthumous Socratic Apology. It is then too much of an assumption, though countenanced by Zeller and Mr. Grote as well as by many older writers on the subject, that we can rely on the Platonic Apology as a substantial reproduction of the speech of Socrates. Inde- pendently of Plate's representation we know not what So- crates said, or whether he said much or little, or how far he concerned himself with a direct reply to the charges laid against him ; nor, when we have studied that representa- tion, do we know these things any the better. Even if the studied speech of Plato embodied authentic reminiscences of the unpremeditated utterances of his master, to disen- gage the one from the other is more than we can assume to do. Notwithstanding, we can seek in the Apology a portrait of Socrates before his judges and not be disappointed. Plato has not laid before us a literal narrative of the proceedings and bidden us thence form the conception for ourselves : rather he has intended us to form it through the medium of his art. The structure is his, the language is his, much of the sub- stance may be his; notwithstanding, quite independently of the literal truth of the means, he guarantees to us a true con- ception of the scene and of the man. We see that " liberam contumaciam a magnitudine animi ductam non a superbia" (Cic. Tusc. I. 29), and feel that it must be true to Socrates, although with Cicero himself we have derived the conception from Plato's ideal and not from history. We hear Meletus subjected to a questioning which, though it may not have been the literal £ parpens of the trial, exhibits to us the great ques_ tioner in his own element. We discover repeated instances of the irony, which, uniting self-appreciation with a true and unflattering estimate of others, declines to urge considerations 9 Diog. Laert. II. 40, Cic. de Orat. 11, Valer. Max. VI. iv. 2, Stob. Flor. I. 54, Quintil. Inst. II. xv. 30, XI. i. VII. 56. D 2 xx INTRODUCTION. which lie beyond the intellectual or moral ken of the judges. Here we have that singularity of ways and thoughts which was half his offence obtruding itself to the very last in con- tempt of consequences. Here we have that characteristic assertion of private judgment against authority which declares itself in the w T ords eyo> vixas, avhpes ' ' AOrivaioi, ao-7ra£bjucu juer kcll (j)L\a) 7T€tVojLiat S£ fxaWov 7<3 0e(3 77 vfuu (29 D). Here we have also his disapproval of the existing democracy of Athens which he rather parades than disguises. And lastly, the deep religiousness which overshadowed all his character breathes forth in the account he renders of his past life, in his antici- pations of the future, and in his whole present demeanour. Thus while the problem of the relation of the Apology to what Socrates actually said must remain unsolved, there is no doubt that it bodies forth a lifelike representation ; a repre- sentation of Socrates as Plato wished us to conceive of him, yet at the same time as true to nature as the art of Plato could render it. 3. The ADEquACY oe the Apology as a defence. That the Apology aims at much more than a refutation of the indictment of Meletus is already sufficiently evident. We have seen that the avowed answer to Meletus is that part of the speech which by its position least challenges attention, and which is least characterised by an air of serious concern. The statement is besides repeatedly made, that the real strength of the prosecution lies outside of the indictment, and requires a commensurately wider effort to meet it. The worth, then, of the Apology as a defence must be measured, in the first instance, if we will, by its sufficiency as an answer to Meletus, but chiefly and ultimately by its suffi- ciency as a justification of Socrates'' whole manner of life. It will not much affect our estimate, whether we regard the Apology as no more than a defence adapted to the historical occasion of the trial and to judicial ears, or as a posthumous justification of the great master in the eyes of the Hellenic world. Though the more comprehensive aim is doubtless the real one, yet public opinion had undergone 10 so little change 10 As a matter of fact, the Athe- death. The story of their passionate nians never repented of Socrates' remorse being evoked by the repre* INTRODUCTION. xxi in favour of Socrates since his death, that the justification which was most calculated to satisfy it was identically that which would have been most to the purpose at the trial. First, then, what sort of an answer is offered to the indict- ment of Meletus ? That indictment divides itself into two allegations, under the heads respectively (as we should say) of religion and of morality. The mischief to morality is the perversion of the youth ; the offence against religion is the setting forth of strange gods in the place of those of the state. Now though these are put into the form of specific charges against Socrates, they are so (all but that of the naiva hai- fjiovia) in appearance alone ; they are really selected from the string of imputations currently brought against Philosophers and Sophists. The Philosophers, i. e. Physicists, were popu- larly associated with atheism, the Sophists with perversion of youth. The allegations of "the old accusers," to which the Apology first addresses itself, are drawn from the same re- pertory, and arraign Socrates in like manner under the two heads of religion and morality as Philosopher and Sophist. It is true that the particular complaints there expressed are not the same ; but it is not that the charges put forward here are less general than those. Thev are onlv omitted there because they were to come under consideration here. In the Clouds both these and those are put forward against Socrates, one after the other. And in the Apology itself (23 C — D) "the old accusers" are represented as eventually appending both " perversion of the youth" and " atheism" to their other charges. The indictment therefore of Meletus contained no charge, save that of baijiovta Katva, which would not be met (so far as might be) by the explanation Socrates had rendered of the deeper and wider and older prejudices, personified in " the old accusers," or by the justification he might be able to offer of the general method of his life. sentation of Euripides' Palamedes (41 whereas we find Xenophon, five years B. n.) is fabulous. Euripides pre- after Socrates' death, dealing with the deceased Socrates by 7 years. Xeno- allegations against Socrates as if still phon and Plato would have made the in full possession of the popular mind, most of any such change of feeling : See Zeller, IT. p. 138. note. xxii INTRODUCTION. Here therefore Socrates contents himself with a dialectical victory over Meletus; instead of entering into the merits of the question with him, he disposes of him summarily by adding him to the list of pretenders. If the charge of haiixovia kcuvo. is subjected to the same treatment, — a treatment characterised by Dollinger as little better than sophistical, — it is because that charge is itself a sophistical one. It wrests to haiiioviov into ScLLfjiovLa, the divine agency of which Socrates consistently spoke into divine beings. Socrates therefore is only returning Meletus' sophism upon himself, when he treats the haiixovia of the indictment as if it had been haiixovia tt pay yxar a. His whole dealing with the question of heterodoxy has an observable air of carelessness. Though he explicitly disavows atheism, and calls the sun and moon gods, yet he nowhere commits himself to a distinct recognition of the state gods, any more than he repu- diates belief in any others. But it must be remembered that in those days few could have cast a stone at Socrates for such reticence : and that if a man's practice was religious, there was little enquiry into his opinions ; and that Socrates' cha- racter as a religious man, his strictness and frequency in reli- gious observances, was beyond doubt and made proof super- fluous, — though the Xenophontean Apology enters into it at length. From the personal imputation of irreligion, in short, Socrates had little to fear, and he could afford to deal with it lightly ; whereas to that of perverting the youth he addresses himself twice elsewhere, in addition to the dialectical refutation of it here. Thus what was really formidable in the indictment of Mele- tus resolved itself into the more general imputations which connected Socrates with those two suspected classes of men, the Philosophers and the Sophists ; and, keeping in view the fact that the Apology addresses itself elsewhere in full to those imputations, any fuller treatment of them under the head of the indictment can be spared. The remainder of the defence is taken up with two lines of argument : the first, at the outset of the speech, deals with the general prejudices, which existed against Socrates as Philo- sopher (Physicist) and Sophist; the other, which follows the special reply to the indictment, offers a particular justification for Socrates' manner of life as a citizen. INTRODUCTION. xxiii In the earlier portion Socrates does what he can, first to separate himself from those two suspected classes, and then to explain how the prejudice arose in the public mind, and how it became strengthened by personal animosity. It is hardly necessary to show that the imputations of " the old accusers" contain nothing of an individual character, but are (as Socrates alleges) mistakenly transferred from the popu- lar notion of the Philosophers and the Sophists. The title v, i. e. tcl ovpavLa, is equally gene- ral. The Scholiast on Aristoph. Nub. 96 says, kolvov t&v (piXocroipcov aixavruav zyKkr\\xa. In 431 B. C. Diopithes, a fanatical Rhetor, carried the law daayyehXtadaL tovs tcl Oela jut) vo\il- {ovtcls r) koyovs i7€pl T&v fj,€Tap(TLcov hhaa-KovTas (Plutarch. Vit. Pericl. 169 D, Aristoph. Vesp. 380). Eupolis (Fragin. Com. ed. Meineke, II. p. 490) says of Protagoras, aka&vtvtTai \xkv^ aAi- T?j/otos, irepl t&v jieTe(opo)v. Once more, the reference in top 7]ttg) Xoyov Kpetrrtt) ttol&v kclI aWovs tovtcl Tama bibda-KOiV is palpably general. The earlier Sophists, as teachers of plead- ing, first incurred and perhaps courted the imputation of tov rJTTO) k.t.X.j and from them the imputation was derived to others. Isocrates (xv. 15. p. 313) speaks of the charge being made against himself, ws iyco tovs tJttovs \6yovs KpeiTTovs hvva- \xai Tioieiv, and again (30. p. 316), g>s biatpQeCpoa tovs veoaTtpovs A-eyeiy hihavKM kcl\ napa to hUaiov kv toXs ayG>cn irkeoveKTelv. Odium also attached to the profession 11 of an instructor in speaking. Hence iEschines' designation (i. 94. p. 13) of De- mosthenes as \oyoypav Koycav T^xyas KaTeTTayyt\\.6fjL€vos tovs z>eoi>s bibao-Ketv, crowned by the 11 A6ywv rex^w M?7 SiSacncetz/ (Xen. freedom of speech. How came the Mem. I. ii. 31) was a law of the suspicion of \6yav rexvy to survive Thirty Tyrants against liberty and the Tyranny ? xxiv INTRODUCTION. designation aofyicnris (125. p. 17): cf. ii. 165, iii. 173. pp. 50, 78. Hence, weightier for its dispassionateness, a remark of Thucydides (VIII. 68) about Antiphon viroirTcas ra> -nkqOet bta bo£av b€LVOTr]Tos bLCLKtLjjLevos, tovs fievTOL ay(£>vi(op.£vovs kclI kv biKaoTrjpici) kclI kv brjfjL(i> TrXelara els avrjp, oo-ois ^vpL^ovkevaaiTo tl, bvvaixevos ax^eAeiy. This odium, in which the profession was held, was akin to fear ; Isocrates (xv. 230) explains it thus, 7} TT€pl tovs \6yovs btLvoTrjs 7roiet rots akXorpLOLS €til- (3ov\€V€LV. Thus the charges recited present us with nothing indi- vidually characteristic of Socrates, but only (as he himself calls them 23 D) ra Kara Travrtov tG>v (f)LXocro(f)ovvTa>v irpo^Lpa. These were the materials for the popular representation of Socrates, which accordingly (like the caricature in the Clouds) is a compound of the conventional lineaments of the Philosopher (Physicist) , and of the Sophist. The juerecopa fypouriCpv is due to the Philosopher, and the tov tJtt(o Xoyov k.t.A. to the Sophist, while the title aov bta(3o\ri re Kal (pdoVOS. On Socratic principles, a defence had discharged its office when it had set before the Court not grounds of feeling but rational grounds for its acceptance. Socrates has hitherto disproved (as fully as the range of the popular mind admitted) the mistaken 15 identification of him with Philosophers and Sophists. He has given the explanation of the mistake, and he has pointed out how that very explanation accounts for the confirming of the mistake irrationally through personal ani- mosity. He has exhausted his armoury ; against this animosity itself he has no weapons; if his judges or the public will allow it to affect their verdict, it cannot be helped — tout Zcttlv vjmv, S) avhpes 'AOrjvcuoL, Ta\rj0rj, teat tol olba o-^ebbv on rots avrols aire^Odvofiat (24 A) . Beyond the reply to Meletus' indictment we find a fresh branch of the defence before us. Socrates is no longer overtly answering charges, old or recent, but rather directly justifying the usefulness of his life. He takes a view of himself, as it were from further off, and reviews his whole attitude as a citizen. The question arises, how this part of the speech serves any direct purpose of the defence. Of the strong points on the side of the prosecution, one has remained hitherto almost untouched : it is not one which appears in the indictment proper, or in that of "the old accusers;" nor again has it that stamp of inveteracy which would have marked it had it been part of the Aristophanic caricature. But it was the moving cause of the present in- dictment being preferred at all. 15 The mob who in 1791 sacked " Philosophers !' 'Church and King for Dr. Priestley's house at Birmingham " ever ! ' And some persons, to escape in consequence of his espousal of the " their fury, even painted ' No Phi- principles of the French Revolution, "losophers' on the walls of their of which the news had just reached " houses ! . . . Boulton and Watt were England, proceeded to threaten all " not without apprehensions that an with whom Priestley had been asso- " attack would be made on them, as ciated not in politics or religion but " the head and front of the ' Philo- mereiy by a common devotion to " sophers' of Birmingham." — Smiles' chemistry and invention. " A com- Life of Boulton, ch. 20. " mon cry among the mob was, ' No E % xxviii INTRODUCTION. It is tolerably clear from the accounts of the speeches for the prosecution that political charges entered freely into them. See Xen. Mem. I. ii. 9, 12, &c. To Socrates was there ascribed the evil done to their country by Oritias the oligarch and Alcibiades the demagogue ; the strange doctrine that the poorer private citizens were a fair mark for ill usage ; the unfriendly criticism on election to offices by lot, — which was probably made use of as a special ground in support of the accusation of perverting the youth, since the ventilation of such doctrines tended to make them disloyal or insubordinate. A line of Hesiod was alleged to have been wrested by him to a like purpose, as countenancing rapacity. There were indeed independent and domestic proofs alleged for perversion of the youth, but those which have been noticed were political. All these topics had been employed by the prosecution, and it is scarcely likely that in addition to them Socrates' abstinence from public affairs, his relations to Char- mides, another of the Thirty, and to Xenophon, the friend of Sparta, and under sentence of banishment at the time, and perhaps his depreciating mention of the tradesmen in the Ecclesia (Xen. Mem. III. vii. 6), was not also brought up against him. Such charges and insinuations as these were indeed foreign to the indictment, but they were calculated to have considerable weight with the Court. For one characteristic of the moment was the keen feeling with which since the restoration of the democracy the Athe- nians cherished their particular conception of political loyalty. That conception was somewhat narrow and exacting. The primary requisite was not only f assent and consent/ but enthusiasm towards the letter of the constitution ; and second only to this, as the natural reaction from the depression which the usurpation had caused, was a devotion to the material interests of the state, and the display of energy in amassing wealth. The prosecutors, or at least the leading spirit among them, were no doubt actuated in their institution of the proceedings by the same political sensitiveness which they sought to in- spire in the judges and betrayed in their speeches. Anytus was a man of strong political convictions ; he had lost a for- tune through his fidelity to the cause of freedom. And if he INTRODUCTION. xxix was partly animated by a personal grudge against Socrates, he was none the less the person to take up a political grievance against him. There must have come to the surface some fresh element for the old prejudice so to pronounce itself. As Sophist or Philosopher, Socrates' cup had long been full ; nor was there any reason in that point of view for its overflowing now if it had not before. Aristophanes 16 had ceased to attack him. As a mark for personal enmity 17 he had been more prominent and defenceless either in connection with the Hermae trials or after the battle of Arginusas. It would be a difficult problem, why the extreme step was taken now and not till now, did we not take into account the 18 political sensitiveness which, as the offspring of the restored democracy, formed a new element in public opinion as it affected Socrates. We shall not be unprepared, then, to find that the remain- ing part of the defence is in some sense political, — as much so, as that of a non-political man could be. It is the defence of a reformer, though not of a political reformer. To ignore the political charge altogether in the defence would have been either a confession of weakness or a dangerous oversight, how- ever fully the indictment might have been disposed of. But, moreover, political insinuations had been pressed into the service of the indictment itself in connection with the charge of perverting the youth. It is obvious, that Socrates was precluded from meeting these charges in the way which would best have pleased his judges. He could have said that he had never transgressed the laws ; he could say (as in fact he does say) that he loved his countrymen intensely ; but for the existing constitution he could profess no enthusiasm. Yet here we must observe, that his coldness did not arise from frank political dislike of demo- cracy, nor is his dissatisfaction to be measured by the one or two well-known criticisms which he passed upon it. He cared 16 [So Stallb.Prolegg. ad Plat. Sym- pation of the Thirty lasted from June pos. p. 28. Zeller (II. p. 150) asserts 404 B.C. to February 403. The Ar- the contrary and appeals to Aristoph. chonship of Euclides began in 403 Ran. 1491 sqq.] and ended in 402. In April 399 Any- 17 Cf. Zeller, II. p. 142. tus brought Socrates to trial. 18 Cf. Zeller, II. p. 152. The usur- xxx INTRODUCTION. for politics only as involving the interests of the individual (Xen. Mem. III. iv. 12), and it is to his view of individual well- being that we must look, if we would understand the degree or the significance of his reserved attitude towards the consti- tution. Its faults connected themselves in his mind with other faults at once further from the surface and far graver. To him the alarming symptoms were such as these, — that this system extolled as so perfect could coexist with an utter abey- ance of principles ; could be carried on by men, who, in know- ledge of it, were mere empirical adventurers ; that it neither undertook nor directed education ; that much might be going wrong within it, without its giving any check or warning; that morality might share the general wreck and not be missed ; — and that, all this while, the Athenian mind should throw itself without misgiving into such a system, and find all its wants satisfied, and its self-complacency encouraged ; that, while intolerance was stimulated, the belief in any unwritten law of right beyond and above the positive enactments of the state had all but died out, and a belief in divine sanctions was scarcely felt (Apol. 35 D). It was for these deeper reasons that Socrates was totally out of harmony with the political optimism of his countrymen. Here was the cause of the gravest manifestation of his irony. The discord was the more complete, because it turned upon considerations of the well-being of individuals rather than upon political predilections and fancies. And out of those considerations there rose up before his mind a clear vision of a great need, and of the remedy which would remove it, and of an obligation upon himself to be the applier of that remedy. The discord had jarred upon the sensitive ear of restored democracy, and filled it with a feeling of oifence which pre- sently found interpreters in Anytus and others. The whole deep disharmony did not strike them ; but, conscious of its presence, they detected and treasured Up superficial results of it, such as the detached adverse criticisms upon the government, and perhaps followed with a like jealousy the abstinence from public life ; and they added to these other irrational aggrava- tions, such as the connection with Critias and Alcibiades, and the well-known cry of perversion of the youth. It was the INTRODUCTION. xxxi same offended sense which prompted the decisive step and brought Socrates to trial ; and which, while the charges brought were the old and staple cries against the Philosophers and Sophists, aggravated these with a new political stigma. But it is time to return to Socrates, and to the part of the Apology which still remains to be considered. We are now in a position to judge of it as a political defence, if such it shall turn out to be. Of the particular political charges we find Socrates here only touching upon one, and that allusively, — the charge of being answerable for the misconduct of Critias and Alcibiades and perhaps others (33 B). The line he mainly follows is general. We have analysed the attitude of Socrates towards the state of which he was a citizen into the following parts ; — first, dis- satisfaction, chiefly on moral grounds, with the prevalent state- theory; secondly, conception of the remedy to be applied to it ; and, thirdly, conviction that the application devolved upon himself. And in a full general justification of himself in a political point of view, he would have had to expound all these points seriatim. We find him however reticent as to the first point : at most he only hints at it iD the simile (30 E) of the high-bred horse, whose greatness of frame makes him some- what sluggish, and who needs some gadfly to stir his spirit, and in the remark (31 A) that it is an extreme boon to be so roused. He interweaves the second point with the third, yet sparingly, and only in the way of explanation. It can hardly be said that the conception of the remedial plan is completely unfolded ; though we find notices of it in the doctrine (29 D sqq.) that the care and improvement of the soul, and the pur- suit of wisdom, truth, and virtue, are to be ranked infinitely above the pursuit of riches ; the doctrine (36 C) of the need of consciously-possessed principles of individual and political action, tested (29 E, also 38 A) by self-examination ; and the doctrine (^ A) of the imperative duty of adhering to what is just, alike in public and in private life. It is the third point, the assumption by himself of this mission, into which the speaker throws his strength : with this he starts, and to this he limits his justification. His first and paramount plea in this justification is that (28 B sqq. and 33 G) the work was under- xxxii INTRODUCTION. taken in obedience to the above-mentioned divine call, i. e. was an indefeasible duty, and therefore to be performed without respect of consequences, or counter-inducements, or human in- hibition (29 D), — the proof of the divine call, i.e. of the reality of the obligation, being that nothing else would have sustained him in such a course of self-sacrifice (31 B). His other plea is that his assumption of this work was an incalculable benefit to his countrymen. In what remains he sets forth, in answer to supposed objections, first, that to have entered public life in preference to dealing with individuals would have been neither a practicable nor an effective method of pursuing this mission (31 C sqq.) ; and, secondly, the innocent tendency of his work (inculcating righteousness, not training for professions or imparting knowledge, ^ A), excluding the suspicion of per- verting the youth, — a suspicion which is also refuted inde- pendently {^ C). To have enlarged upon the first point would obviously have stood Socrates in little stead. He could not have done so without appearing to admit the political allegations of his accusers in their entire force ; and thus the vindication of himself as a reformer lacks the support which it would have gained from a premised statement of the need of reform. But, to pass on from this first drawback to its effectiveness, the actual vindication offered must in itself have seemed to the majority of the Athenians partly paradoxical and partly visionary. In representing himself as having done good service by urging on them the care of their souls, by unswerv- ingly insisting on righteousness in them and in himself, So- crates was traversing ground where they could not follow him. These things had for them no meaning. They required devo- tion to the letter of their constitution, they were on the verge of a panic at the appearance of disaffection ; and this was their righteousness. With this they were content, when the sub- stance of the old religion and the old morality were really departed from them. They were necessarily far from believing that it could be any man's duty or mission to set himself up among them as a preacher of righteousness, — as he himself says expressly in the avTirlfjirjcns (37 E — 38 A). To us there may seem to be nothing so far out of the common in the moral work of which Socrates claims to be the sole promoter, as to INTRODUCTION. xxxiii elevate him to a position of singularity. But it was a novel work enough to his contemporaries. It is a difficulty through- out in the way of appreciating Socrates, that positions, which ever since his time have been household words, not in moral philosophy merely but in common life, were in his mouth, to the men of his generation, original and novel; and that the simple principles he lays down here, so far from being common- place to his audience, must have rather transcended their moral apprehension. Nor must it be forgotten that their old distrust of the Sophist came in to the aid of their distaste for the reformer. So far from believing in his principles of moral reformation, they were confusedly identifying these with the old sophistical teaching. Hence it is that the disclaimer eya> hibaaKaXos ovbevbs k.t.A. finds place here. There were ample reasons, then, why this part of the de- fence should fail. Socrates stood before his countrymen a confessed reformer, and they were strangers to the idea of reformation except in a political sense, — a sense in which the Athens of the day had no room for reformers. But the failure of the defence here urged by Socrates upon his countrymen is to be laid not to his charge but to theirs. The point upon which our whole judgment must turn is this. Was the need of a reformation so urgent as Socrates supposed it to be ? If so, then Socrates was no less in the right, no less a benefactor, because they failed to feel the need, and they in crushing 19 him were no less guilty of a national hypocrisy. There is no need to sum up at any length the results of our 19 It is a poor sophism to urge that step unwilling instruments of a legally the stages of an aycbu tj^tos, or the unavoidable catastrophe, is a plea venality of Athenian jailors, made So- which we never think of allowing to crates' death his own act, — an even- the eastern despot, who after betray- tuality which his accusers themselves ing his righteous minister " laboured never contemplated. This last as- " till the going down of the sun to de- sumption (which Kochly espouses) is " liver him." The justice or injustice directly at variance with the Apo- of the catastrophe is involved in that logy, which (29 C) makes Anytus of the first step. The whole respon- responsible for the argument that it sibility fell upon the judges from the were better Socrates should never moment when, in affirming the accu- have been tried, than that he should sation ^wKpdrrjs aSine? k.t.X., they escape with his life. To excuse the gave their voice against the truth, judges as having been after the first xxxiv INTRODUCTION. inquiry into the worth of the Apology as a defence. Its art is consummate ; its statements are (as the exordium promised) un- alloyed truth ; its reticences are condescensions to the audience •with whom it deals. It is exhaustive ; it lays open by turns 20 all the motives and influences which were at work against Socrates ; and the more pains we are at to represent these to ourselves by means of an independent investigation, the more reason we shall find to acknowledge that the true clue lay all the while close to our hand in the Apology. 20 That the Sophists had no hand selves too much under the same sus- in bringing about the condemnation picion with Socrates to have dared to of Socrates is clear. Anytus was the inflame that suspicion. Cf. Zeller, II. enemy of Sophists. The Sophists had p. 139. no political influence, and were them- ABBEEVIATIONS IN TEXTUAL COMMENTARY. V = "Vulgar text, settled originally by Stephanus. B = Bekker. S = Stallbaum. Z = Zurich editors. H = Hermann. Oxon.=the Bodleian MS. known as 'Codex Clarkianus.' [Dr. Gaisford first published the readings of this MS. in 1820. Mr. Riddell collated the Apology anew for this edition, and also the Crito, Phaedo, and Symposium.] ^ ph . AnOAOriA SflKPATOTX b. 17. Defence. Exordium. I. "O tl pev vpels, co avhpes 'A6r]i>aioi, ttzkov- a. The dare vno tidv epcov KaTiqyopoov, ovk oida' iyco 3' ovv koX avros vtt avrcoi/ oXlyov epavTOv eireXaOopriv' ovtco TTiOavcos eXeyov. Kai tol aXrjOes ye, 009 eiros e«r€«>, 5 ovdev elprjKaai. fidXiara 8e avrcov ev iOavfxaaa tcdv 7To\X(dv eXeyov co? \prjv vpas evXaftelaOaL, prj vtt epiov e^airaTr]6rjTe, 009 Sec^ b vov ovtos Xeyeus. to yap pcrj alcryvv6r)vaL, otl avriKa V7T epov e^eXey^Q-qcrovTaL epyco, eire&av [M]b* O7rcoor- 1Q tlovv tyoLLvcopaL SeLvos XeyeLv, tovto pot eSo^ev avTcov avaio-yvvTOTOLTOV elvou, el prj apa Setvov Ka- Xovctlv ovtol Xeyetv top TaXrjOrj XeyovTcC el pev yap tovto Xeyovatv, 6poXoyolr)v av eycoye ov /cara tov- tovs elvai pr/Tcop. ovtol p,ev ovv, Sairep eyco Xeyco, 15 5. a>s en-os etVeTz/] This quali- ludecl to by the speaker. Digest fies the ov8ev following, making of Idioms, § 90. it equivalent to fj tl rj ov8tv 14. ov Kara] A thorough below. litotes : ' far above these :' ' a 8. firj — i^a7raTr]6rjTe] This far greater orator than they.' sentence is not affected by the Cf. Hdt. i. 121, irarepa ko.\ prj- tense of the main construction, repa evprjaeis, ov Kara Mirpadd- because the contingency it ex- T-qv re rbv (3ovk6\ou kol tyjv yv- presses remains still future at vaiKa avrov. the moment of its being al- F 2, 36 IIAAT0N02 7] tl r] ovhev ahr)6e$ elprjKaaLP' vfiei? 5* ijxov olkov- p. 17 aeaOe iraaav Trjv a\r)0€iai>. ov \xivTOi fxa At", d> avdpes AOrjvaioi, KeKaXXieivqixevovs ye Xoyov?, axnrep 01 TOVTWV, prjfJLCKTl T€ KOU OVO/JLaCTlV, Ov8e K€K0CTfA7)- C 1. rj ti fj ovbev] This form of expression we have from Homer, Oct. iv. 80, 'Avbpav 8 y fj Kev tis fxoi ipiaaercu, rje kcu ovki. So Hdt. iii. 140, fj tis rj ovbels. And Eurip. Dan. Fr. vi. Kpeitr- (toov yap ovtls xpr)p,a.Tiov necpVK dvr)p, HXr)v ei tis' o&tis 6' ovtos ecrTiv ov% Spa). 2. ov p.evToi'] Opposed to aKovo-eaOe 7J\ r. dX. — You shall have the truth entire, but not drest up. This contrast is only carried as far as 6v6p.ao-t' after which the idea of the contrast between truth and falsehood is resumed (that is, mo-Tevca yap k.t.X. gives the rationale of vp.els S' — d\r)6€iav) and con- tinues to dauvai, — since liXaT- tovti \6yovs refers not to arti- ficial language but to falsifi- cation \ a fX€ipa.Kt,oi/, to hide a fault, uses falsehood and not rhetoric. 3. wWep ol] The nom. is the regular construction, where the noun brought into com- parison can be made the sub- ject of the clause introduced by ooWep. The attracted con- struction, exemplified by d>Wep fxeipaKico below, is less common. Dig. 176. 4. pfjpacri . . . 6v6p.ao-i\ What do these two terms mean here 1 For in Sophist. 262 a, b, they distinctly mean 'verb' and 'noun,' in Cratyl. 399 b, c, as distinctly ' expression' and 'word' (Aa cpiXos is the pr}p.a, AlcfiiXos the ovop.a). Now the conjoint phrase seems to have had a familiar rhetorical sig- nification ; cf. Symp. 198 b, to 8' eVt TeXeVTrjs tov koXXovs to>v dvofiaTCDV Ka\ prjp.aTa>v tis ovk av egenXdyr) a.KOva>v * 1 99 b, 6vop.ao-i Ka\ 6eo~ei pr)p,aTcov, 2 21 e, ToiavTa Ka\ ovoyiara kou pr)paTa m whence we may conclude that the asso- ciation here is similar. And if we compare passages of rhe- torical criticism in the Ora- tors, where these words occur, we shall find the meaning ap- proaches to that in Cratyl. ra- ther than that in Sophist. : cf. iEschin. iii. 72. p. 64, ov yap €(prj Sell/ (xa\ yap to prj/xa p.e'p.vr)- p.ai a>s eiire, dia Tr)v drjdiav tov ovop.aTOs) a.7roppr)^ai Tr)s elpfjvrjs Tr)v o-vp,p,axiav — where the pr)p.a is the whole expression, the ovo- p.a is aTroppr)^ai. Further, as So- crates could not speak without 'expressions' and 'words,' it is the artistic use of them he here disclaims ; which, in the case of ovofiara, would consist in what iEschines— -ii. 153. p. 48 — calls r) t5)V bvop,a.T Kapol pev ra 7rpoeiprj- peva dieiXeKTO eVi rfj QiXiov rpa- TreCy and shops generally, cf. Lys. xxiv. 20. p. 170. vpcov ttoWoI ] vpcov is em- phatic. As Stallb. remarks, the frequenters of the Tpdrrefci would be of the richer class. 10. 6opv$eXv\ See Introd. p. ix. note 8. 1 1 . eVl biKatTTr)piov\ The prep, has the notion of 'presenting oneself to ' the court. Cf. Isseus, Fr. vii. I. 1. 15, Xeyeiv eirl biKa- o-Trjpiov. The dva(Sej3riKa refers to the firjpa, cf. Introd. p. vii. 38 nAATQN02 First part of Defence; — Justifi- cation of himself against the prejudices of the court, and his coun- trymen ge- nerally. aTeyycos ovv £evco? e\co rrjs evOdSe Xe'^eco?. coarirep p* 17 ovv av 9 el tco ovti Ijevos eTvyyavov cov, ^vveyiyvco- (TK€T€ 8r]7rov av jjlol, el ev eKeivrj rfj (pcovrj re kou tco p. 18. Tpo7rcp eXeyov, ev olcnrep eT€0pa/jL/jLr)v, Kal St) Kal vvv 5 touto vfxcov Se'ofjLou otKaiov, cos y ipLoi 80KCO, TOV pL€l> Tpoirov rrjs Xe^ews eav la cos p,ev yap yeipcov, Icrcos de fieXricov av eirj' avTO 8e tovto crKoiveLv Kal tovtco tov vovv 7rpocr€)(€iv, el OLKaia Xeyco rj fir)' oiKaaTOv fiev yap avTTj apeT-q, pr)Topo? 8e rdXrjSrj Xeyeiv. io II. UpcoTov fxev ovv 8iKai6s elpa a7roXoyr)cracr0ai, co dv8pe? AOrjvaloL, irpos ra wpcora /jlov yj/evdr) KaTrj- yoprjjjLeva Kal tov? 7rp(OT0vs KaTrjyopovs, eweura 8e irpos Ta vaTepa Kal tov? vcTTepovs. e/iov yap 7roXXol b KaTrjyopoi yeyovacTL npos vfias Kal 7raXai ttoXXol rj8r] i^eTYj Kal ovoev dXrjOh XeyovTes, ov? iyco fxaXXov olato- rem referamus. Immo facile ejiei poterat propter CritoD. 52 e, videturque jam Apollodoro ignotum fuisse, qui apud Diog. La. II. § 44. ipso septuagesimo ante mortem anno natum statuit ; at duos ut minimum annos adjiciendos esse scite Boeckhius Corp. Inscr. II. p. 341 probavit, nosque mox comparato Synes. Calv. Encom. c. 17 confirmavimus \ cf. de theor. Deliac. p. 7." Zeller agrees, but makes 7 2 years the extreme limit. 5. SUaiov] 'I request this of you as a piece of justice/ Cf. 41 d, XPV • • • • tovto 81a- voeladai aKrjdes, Legg. 795 C, ravrbv drj tovt . . . . iv rois ak- \ois nacri XP1 npoo-boKav 6p66v 'as the right thing.' 6. urea? fiev yap] The reason urged is a general one. The consideration of style, if al- lowed at all, will be operative just in those cases where it is better or worse than the case deserves, — just where it will interfere with true judg- ment. 9. avTT)] This represents the preceding clause abrb — rj fir)' being in fact roOro, at- tracted into the gender of dperr). Dig. 201. 14. kol naXai] This Kal only emphasises naKai. Dig. 133. And in kcu ovdev — Xeyovres we have the common kcu after n-oX- Aoi. — It was 24 years since the Clouds were represented : Forster. AnOAOriA 20KPATOY2. 39 p. 1 8. tovtov? Sewovs' ciXX* eKeivoi SecuoTepot, co ctvbpes, ol a. Exist- VpLCOV TOVS 7ToXXoVS' €K 7ral$(DV TT(XpaAaflf3ai>OVT€9 such pre- v a' v ' ) « « u J £ v J \ Z3 ' judices, eireiuov re koli Karrjyopovp epov pLaAAov ovoev aArjues, and their t v x?'' . \ a / / / nature, viz. COS eCTTC TL$ ZcOKpaTT)?, CTOCpOS OLVrjp, TOL T6 pL€T60)pa that So- i \ \ \ « \ ~ tt > y > v crates was, (ppovTicrT-qs kcu tol vtto yr)$ airavra aveCflTrjKco? /cat 5 as a Phy- \r/ n/ / ~ -? SV5s sicist and C TOP 7JTTCO AoyOV Kp€LTTCO TTOICOV. OVTOl, CO OLVOpeS a Sophist, * * /i « * . / v jl ' £> ' 'a subverter Aurjvaioi, ol ravriqv tyju (p-qpLrjv KaracrKedacravTe?, ol seV eraUy £ ' > / r < \ > / t/> of religion 06LVOL €lctl fMov KarrjyopoL ol yap cikovovt€? r\yovvrai and f mo _ tovs ravra (jtjtovvtols ovde Oeovs 1 vop,i{pa (ppovr, points to the Philosopher, the tov — noiav to the Sophist. The title o-ocpbs dvrjp would at once be under- stood as a class-appellation, — cf. 23 a, 34 c; in it the mean- ing and associations of Philo- sopher are uppermost, yet not so as distinctly to exclude those of Sophist. See Introd. p. xxiv. n. 12. 13. naiBes .... fieipaKia] We should have reversed the order, and said, 'when you were all of you young, and most of you mere children.' 14. 6 de — on] This is not a changed but an abbreviated 40 nAATONOS 7ravrcov aXoycorarov, otl ovde rd bvopara o\6v re p. 18, avrcov e&evai Kal ehreiv, 7rXrjv et n? KcopcpStOTrotos d rvyyavu cov' oaoc de (f)66vcp kol Sia/SoXy yftcopevoi v/jLa? ai/t7T€i0ov, ol de kcu avrol TveTreia-pevoi aXXovs 5 TTetOovTes, ovtol iravres chropcoTaToi elavv ovde yap avafiLfiaaaaOai oiov r ecn\v clvtcdv evravOol ovS iXey^ac ovdeva, dXX* dvdyKrj dreyycos oocnrep ovaa- fia)(elv chroXoyovpievov re kcu eXey^eiv prjbevhs cbro- Kpivopievov. d^Lcoaare ovv kcu vpels, cocrnep iyco ioAeyco, Slttov? pov rov9 Karrjyopov? yeyovevai, ere- povs p.ev tovs apri Karriyopr)o-avTaS) erepovs de Toys' 7rdXcu, ov? iyco Aeyco, kcu olrjOrjre delv 7rpo? tKelvovs e 7TpcoTOv pee a7roXoyr]craa0at' kcu yap v peels tKeivoov ivporepov rjKOvcrare KaTrjyopovvTcov, Kal 7roXv paXXov 2. K8o7roi6$ BSZ with 2 MSS. B quotes Fischer mistakenly asserting that at Phsedo 70 c all the MSS. have Kcofxadon. ; but this is untrue for Oxon. and 6 others. Moeris' assertion that Kdf.ia8onoi.6s is the Attic and the other the common form does not bind us. construction. In full it would Plato (Menex. 235 e, Euthyd. be o de ndvTcov iar\v aKoydoTarov, 272 c), and made the music- eVri tovto, on. Dig. 247. master Connus Socrates' in- 2. ei Ti$] Aristophanes is structor. named below, 19 c, and is 3. 6W de includes all but doubtless chiefly meant, but the el ns' that is, 6'0-ot stands not exclusively. Eupolis had for 80-01 aXXoi. Cf.Theset. 159 b, said (Meineke ii. p. 553), Miaco where navra d is equivalent to PXV?i riy V Karrjyo- 10 pia eariv^ e£ rj? rj ep,rj dia,8oXrj yeyovev, fj 8r) kcll b TTLarevoov MeA^roy pie eypa\j/aTO ttjv ypares' ; cocnrep ovv Karrjyopcov ttjv clvtcqploctlclv del dvayvco- 3. eax^re] BZH; e^ere V. The preposition iv would be strange with eo-^ere if the meaning were ' have entertained ebbing so long a time.' iv means rather ' within the limits of ;' and so, with respect to the further limit, 'at the distance of.' Thus cohere exactly falls into its place ; ' ye first came to have so long ago.' 4. iv ovtws] Though this collocation is rarer than ovTas iv 6\., yet it occurs ; e. g. below 24 a (where this passage is alluded to); Isseus vi. 33. p. 59, iv iravv 6\iya> xp° vc pi Lysias, xix. 8. p. 152, iv ovtco deivco Ka6eo-rr]Kev. The rhythm probably determines the order. There is no need for the ovrao-lv of V. 2. rrjv $iaf3o\r)V ] Not the iarlv 6 ipe alpr]0~ei, . . , ov Me'X^- name of o~o(fi6s (cf. 2 d, to re ros, . . . aXX' f) Ta>v noXXcov dia- ovopa Ka\ rrjv diaftoXrjv, and again j3o\rj. 23 a); nor ' calumny' simply 13. 8u{3a\\ov ol Sta/3aXXovre?] (cf. below, 77 Karrj-yopia . . . e| tjs This fulness of expression is rj i/xrj diaftoXri)- but calumny common in Plato, and gives believed, i. e. ' prejudice.' the air of deliberateness. Dig. 7. ov naw here as elsewhere 262. retains its meaning of 'hardly,' 14. aanep qualifies not only ' scarcely ;' but this is to be in- Karrjyopcov but also avrcopoaiav - terpreted as a litotes : — 1 1 can and dvayv&vai. They are quasi- hardly say I do not know.' prosecutors ; it is a qiiasi-in- Dig. 139. dictment ; and Socrates makes 11. fj §r{\ The antecedent of believe to read it. fj is hiafioXrj. Cf. 28 a, Ka\ tovt avrcopoaiav'] $0 24 b. This G 42 IIAATQN02 vat avTcov' iLodKparris ddiKel kgu 7reptepyd^Tat Qq- P- *9- tg)V rd re v7ro yrjs /cat ovpavia, koll tov tjtto) Xoyov KpeiTTCO 7TOL0Ql>, KOI dXXoV? TaVTOL TCLVTa 8t8av eyco ovdev ovre fieya b. Refu- ovre pLiKpov irept errata), Kal ov)( 9 drtfidfyov Xeyco tation of y , , , v v ~ * them. TTjV TOiaVTK)V €7T LCFTr) fXTjV ', €t Tl? 7T€pi TCOD TOLOVTOOV i°cro(f)os iart' /jltj 7ra>9 iyoo vtto MeA^roi; roaavras 2. Kai ovpdvia ] So Z; VBSH kcu to. irrovpavia. 8. uiKpou] According to Mceris, apiKpos is Attic. Yet in iEschin. and Isocr. IxiKpos occurs uniformly. Below, d, all the MSS. have vuiKpov. But to press uniformity would be arbitrary. See Lobeck, Pa- thol. Pars II. De Orthogr. Gr. inconst. § i, who instances pas- sages in which both forms occur in close neighbourhood or even in the same sentence; Dem. 01. B. 14. p. 22, Arist. Hist. An. II. xv. pp. 506, 507. He quotes from Apollonius (Pron. 63) the general principle ovk it-cduakicTTcu ra rcov dicikeKTcov kcu uaXiara to. t5>v 'Attikwi/. Cf. Phaedo, 90 a. Bhythm must be in some degree a guide. term, like avnypacpr] 27 a, is 8. kcu ovx &s — eo-n] This is used to designate the ey/cX^- well-marked irony. Socrates ua. Both avToopoo-ia and clvtl- declines here to pronounce, ypcxfir) were properly said of before an audience who would the defendant's plea, presented have welcomed it, a condem- in writing and sworn to, in nation of studies against which the dvaKpicris, or preliminary at other times he had freely proceeding before the archon declared himself, on the double Basileus. But as the eyKXrjua ground (1) that human nature was likewise then presented in ought to be studied first, Xen. writing and sworn to, the same Mem. I. i. 12, and (2) that the words came to be applied to it physicists got involved in ques- also. See Introd. p. i. tions which were really beyond 7. Ziv eycb] The antecedent the powers of the human mind, of 03V must be the matters in ib. 11, and arrived moreover the avroipoaia, not the mime- at impotent conclusions, ib. IV. diately preceding words. vii. 6, 7. ovdiv ovre ueya\ AccilS. COg- IO. tocravras] ' Upon SO grave nate, not accus. of the object; a charge' as that of pronounc- Dig. 6. 'Encuoo is intransitive. ing upon things of which he AnOAOHA 2QKPATOY2. 43 p. 19. 8iKa? (pvyoifAL' dXXa yap epol tovtcov, (6 dvdpes d A$r)vcuoL, ov8ev /lerecrrc. pdpTvpas 8' avrovs vpcov tovs 7roXXovs TrapeyppLai, Kal d^ico vpds dXXrjXovs StdaaKecif re kou (j) patens, ocroi epov Trcoirore afcrj- Koare 8iaXeyopepov' ttoXXoI 8e vpcov 01 tolovtol elcri' 5 (f)pd(JET€ ovv dXXr/Aois, el Trcorrore rj crpiKpov rj peya rjKovae tls vpchv epov rrepl tgqv tolovtcov dtaXeyopie- vov % Kal 4k tovtov yvdacrecrQe on roiavr earl Kal rdXXa wepl epov a ol 7roXXoi Xeyovaiv. IV. 'AAAa yap ovre tovtodv ov8ev ecrTiv, ov8e y 10 el tlvos aKrjKoare cos eycb Traifteveiv eiTL\eLpco dvOpco- e 7rovs Kal xprjpaTa 7rpaTTopac, ov8e tovto dXr/Oes. eirel Kal tovto ye pot SoKet KaXov eivai, ei tls olos r e'lrj 7rai8eveii> dvOpcorrovs Scnrep Yopylas re 6 3. tovs] H. brackets. But if we read avrovs just before, follow- ing the weight of MSS., tovs is required by the Greek. was ignorant, — the fault he himself so strongly reprobated in others. 1. dXXa yap] ' But the truth is.' Dig. 147. 3. tovs noXXovs] A modest way of saying ' all of you.' -Cf. Isocr. xvii. 23. p. 363, tL av vplv to. 7roXXa Xeyoi/ii • and Rep. 556 a, ra. rroXXa TCOV iKOVO~LC0V crvpftoXaicov. dXXrjXovs dibdo-Keiv re m\ (ppd- &w~\ This is a hysteron pro- teron : Dig. 308. With v -qpzis pvrjpovevopev, Topytas 6 Aeovrlvos, though a single man and unburdened by Liturgies, ^tAiou? povovs o-rarrjpas KareXme. Isocr. XV. 1 55. p. 83. The vnoKpiTal, he says, ib. 157, made much greater fortunes. Nor indeed is Socrates saying that the profits made by the Sophists were great. The sum which Socrates mentions below, 20 b, as Evenus' price, 5 minse (500 francs), seems to have been above the average : Iso- crates, xiii. 3. p. 291, speaks of 3 or 4 minse (3-400 fr.) as a common price. Isocrates has been said, it is true, to have taken as much as 10 minse for his rhetorical course ; Gorgias and Prodicus even 100. But what made the frequenting of Sophists' courses expensive was that people never thought they had had enough of them. 44 X1AAT0N02 AeovTtvo? kou YlpoSiKo? 6 Kejoy KaShnrias 6 'HAetby. p. 19. tovtcov yap etcaoTOs, co avdpes, 6I69 r kariv Icov 6L9 eKacrTTjv tcov iroXecov tov? veovs, 0I9 escort tcov eavTcov ttoXltcov irpoLKa ^yvelvai co av fiovXcovTai, 5 tovtov? TreiOovcFL ret? eKeivcov ^vvovcrias anvokmovTOLS p. 20. cr(j)i(Ti gvyetyai \prjpLara 8i86vTa$ kou ydpiv Trpocrei- Sevat. iirei kou aXXos dvrjp eart Yldpios evOdde crcxpos, bv eyco rjaOofxrjv eiribrjiiovvTa' eTvyov ydp irpocreXOcov dvdpl oy rereAe/ce xprj/mara re Kal ayaOw] So Oxon. It seems unnecessary to introduce a synalcepha. 5. tovtovs neiBovai] The there is quite as good a field construction is changed from for professed teachers as else- the infin. to a finite verb. Dig. where.' 277. The change of construe- 8. bv iya> yaOonrjv] Socrates im- tion is not gratuitous, but ex- plies that he speaks from hear- presses (ironical) admiration. say when he states iarlv evddde. The passage in Theages, 128 a, 10. KaXkia] Cf. Cratyl. 391b, is a reminiscence of this pas- ol o-ocpia-Tai, olo-nep kcu 6 dde\Oai 8ia tt)v tcov vlecov kttjcflv. kcrri tl$, e eyo), 77 ou ; Uopi; ye, 77 oy. 1 ty, ^ o eyca, /cat 7roSa7ro?, kcu ttoctov dtddaKec ; Ei^oy, e'07?, 00 ILcoKpaTes, Ylapios, irevTe pivcov' kcu iyco tov YiVirjvov c epaKapLaa, el cog aXijOcos eyeL tolvtt)V ttjv Teyyiqv kou outcos' eppeXcos StddaKeL. iyco ovv kcu clvtos iKaXXv- voprjv re kcu rj/3pvvoprjv av, el rjTTLaTaprjv ravra. aAA' ov yap ewLaTapaL, co avdpe? ' AOtjvcuoc. V. 'YttoXciISoi dv ovv T19 vpcov lacos' dXX' co l£co- Kpare?, to aov tl earn it pay pa ; TroOev al Sia^oXai aoi aurai yeyovaaiv ; ov yap hrjirov aov ye ovdev tcov ciXXcov irepLTTorepov wpaypaTevopevov erretTa TOcravTY] (f)r)pr) re kol Xoyo? yeyovev el par] tl eirpar- T€9 dXXolov 7] ol 7roXXoi m Xeye ovv qplv, tl iaTiv, d Iva prj -qpels irep\ aov avToa^e^La^copev, TavTi p.01 SoKei SiKata Xeyeiv 6 Xeycov, Kayco vp.lv ireipaaopai dwodei^ai, tl ttot eaTL tovto o ipo\ 7reiroLr]Ke to re 6. eya) ovv] So Oxoii. and 2 other MSS. eycoye is not wanted here. 9. 'YTToXdfioi av ovv ] Here Socrates, though still ostensibly occupied with ' the old ac- cusers,' passes from the denial of the imputations current against him as a reputed 0-0- ipco' iyco yap, co avftpes 'Affrjvouot, di ovSev aAA' 77 $lol cro(piav rwa tovto to ovofia ea^rjKa. swolav 8r/ aocplav ravrrji/ ; 7]7T€p iariv lacos avOpco- invrj crcxpLa. tco ovti yap klvSvvcvco ravrrjv clvai cro(p6?' ovtol Se rd)( dv, ov? aprc ekcyov, pel^co tlvol e rj Kar avOpcoirov aotplav ao(pol elev, rj ovk eyco ri Xeyco' ov yap dy eycoye avri)v iwicrTafim, aAA' octtis 10 (prjal yf/evSerai re kcu eVt Sta/BoXf} rfj e/mrj Aeyet. Kai fiot, co avftpes ' AOrjvaloi, firj Oopv/BrjarjTC, ptrjo* iav Sofjco ri v/jllp peya Xeyeiv' ov yap iphv ipco top 1. ovofia] Of cro(f)6s. See note on aonou, which Socrates affects to be at a loss for. The idiom is an expe- dient for abbreviation ; the sentence is hurried to its con- clusion after its point has been expressed, by a clause super- seding the enumeration of fur- ther particulars : cf. Dig. 257, where the present passage is especially compared with Gorg. 494 d, (A) rjfxl rbv Kvapevov r)dea>s av (Sioovai. (B) ILorepov el tt)v KeqbaXrjV povov Kvijaia, r) en tl o~e epcoTG) ] 12. ov yap epov] Cf. Symp. 1 77 a ? V V-tv H' 01 vpxv T °v Aoyov earl Kara tt)v TLvpinidov MeXavin- Trrjv' ov yap epos 6 pv6os dWa $al8pov rovde. Cf. also Ale. I. 113 e. The verse in the Me- lanippe was ovk epos 6 pvQos aAA' ipr)s pr/rpos ivdpa. So Eur. Hel. 5 x 3j Xoyos yap eo~Tt.v ovk epos, o~o avdpes' -qpeTO yap Srj, el tis io hpiov etr] ao(pcoTepo?. avelXev ovv rj JJvOla fir)8eva 3. pdprvpa — AeX^ots] " There is no need (says Zeller, Phil, der Griechen II. p. 45. note 2), to deny the authenticity of the oracle, but we cannot regard it as having given the primary impulse to Socrates' tour of enquiry. Socrates must have been already a known per- sonage for Chserephon to have put his question to the Pythia, or for her to have taken it up." It is therefore semi-rhetorically that the oracle is here repre- sented as the cause of Socrates' eccentric and unpopular pro- ceeding. The Iambic form, — crocpos SocpoKkijs &c. — in which the response appears in Diog. II. 37, and Suid. o-o(p6s, is a later invention — an expansion of the Pythia's simple negative recited here. 6. Kal vpoav — KaTrj\6e\ This allusion to Chserephon' s ante- cedents is added not without purpose, — to dispose the court to hear more indulgently the story which is to follow. In detail ; — The full point of the phrase nXrjdet eralpoi is to be found in the contrast of the adherents of the Thirty ; more especially the iraipot of the oligarchical clubs, and the body of 3000 hoplites organ- ised by the Thirty from their partisans, (pvyrjv refers to the subsequent expulsion of all not included in the 3000 from Athens, and their withdrawal presently after (when they found no safety in Attica) to Thebes, Megara, Oropus, Chal- cis, Argos, &c. This flight, as an event still vividly remem- bered, is called tcivttjv, ' the re- cent.' So Isocr. matches it with the old troubles under the Pi- sistratidse ; — ttjv drjpoKpartav . . . dls rjdrj KaTakvOeiaav, Kai ras (fivyas ras em twv Tvpdvvoav Kal ras enl tcov rpiaKovra yevop.evas, viii. I 23. p. 1 84. With KarrjXde cf. Lysias, X. 4. p. Il6, e£ otov vpels Kare- XrjXvdare' it is the recognised description of the restoration of democracy and end of the eight months' reign of the Thirty, signalised by the solemn return of Thrasybulus and the exiles from Piraeus to Athens. 48 IIAATQN02 and the course of experi- ments by which he had con aocpcoTepov elvaL. KCLi tovtcov irepL 6 aSeXcfrb? Vplv p. 21 avrov ovroai papTvprjaeL, kiretbr) eKelvos rereAev- rrjKev. VI. ^Keyj/aade 8e cov evefca ravra Xeyco' p,eXXco h 5 yap vpas 8L8d£eLV, 06 ev p.01 rj ScaftoXr} yeyove. ravra yap iyco aKovcras eveOvpLOvpur^v ovtcoctl' tl wore Xeyei firmed that O UeOS, Kai TL TTOTt aiVLTT€Tai ; tyCD yap Oil OVT6 conviction; , v > > ' « » ~ j ^ " ' ■? fieya ovre aptKpov ^vvoLoa epavTco ao(po? cov' tl ovv 7T07"€ Xeyei (paerKcov e/ie aocpoWaTov elvaL ; ov yap io 8r]7rov xjsevdeTaL ye' ov yap Oepus avTcp' Ka\ 7roXvv p.ev \povov rfiTOpovv, tl irore Xeyei, eireura poyL$ Trdvv eiri (jjTrjaLv avrov TOLavTijv tlvol er pa7r6p.i]v •. r/XOov mi TLva tcov 8okovvtcov aorficov elvaL, chs c evTavOa, el Trip ttov, eXeyijcov to pavrelov /cat diro- 15 (pavcov tco -^pijapco otl ovtool epov ao(j)coTepo9 eo~TL, av 8' 6/xe ecprjaOa. 8LacrK07rcov ovv tovtov — bvopaTL yap ov8ev 8eop.aL Xeyeiv, rjv 8e tls tcov ttoXltlkcov, Trpos- ov eyco ctkottcov tolovtov tl ewaOov, co dv8pes 'AOrjvaloL — Ka\ 8iaXeyopevos avTcp, e8o£e pcoL ovtos 206 dvr)p 8ok€'lv pev elvaL ao(po? clXXols re 7roXXols 1. abe\~\ Cf. Pind. Pyth. ix. 42, top ov Oepu- tov tyevdei Biyew. 17. TQ)V 7T0\lTlKGiV~\ III itself this word means no more than ' statesman/ in the sense in which it might have been ap- plied to Pericles, and is applied, Legg. 693 a, to the old law- givers and settlers of Hellas. But an Athenian of Plato's time speaking of Athens would mean by n-oX enrol that class of men who made public business a profession, — tovs itoXitlkovs Xcyopevovs (Politic. 303 e). As distinguished from the prjTopas, they were men who sought appointments to public offices, while the pyropes were pro- fessional speakers in the Ec- clesia. Cf. 23 c, and see Introd. p. ii. note 1. 19. diaKeyopevos avrto, e8oge p.01] This inversion of govern- ment is of common occurrence among the forms of changed construction : Dig. 271. eSoge is ' I came to think,' as 32 b. AnOAOriA 20KPATOY2. 49 p. 21. av6pcoiroL$ kcu fiaXLcrra eavTco, elvaL 8 ov' Kairevra d e7reLpcopr)v avTco 8eLKvvvai, otl ol'olto pev elvaL ao(po?, ear) 8 ov. evTevOev ovv tovtco re cmr\y6opx\v kcli 7roA- Aoi? TCOV TTCtpOVTWV, TTpOS' tfAOLVTOV 8 OVV OTTLCOV eXo- yi£p\xr\v otl tovtov pev rod avOpcoirov iyco cro9 tiros eiffelf, tovtovs 8e y ydecv otl evprjaroipu woXXa kou KaXa e7narafxevov9. kou tovtov fiev ovk iyj/evaOrji/, dXX* TjiriaTavro d iyco ovk TjTno-rdpirjv kcli fxov ravrrj o~o(f)coT€poL rjcrav. aAA', oh dvbpes \ AOrjvouot, tclvtov 15 pLOL edotjav ^\ eLV d/iaprrjpia, owep kou ol 7rocr)Tai, kou ol dyaOol Sr]fjuovpyor 81a rb rrjv re^yyjv kolXcds e£ep- yd^zcrOai eKaaros rj^iov kou rdXXa ret fxeyLara ao- (pcoTCLTO? eivou, kou OLVTcov avrrj rj ttXt] pfieXeia iKEivqu e rrjv crocfriav diroKpvTTTeiv' coar e'/xe l\xavrov dvepco- 20 20. diroKpinrreiv] This is the reading of one MS. $. The dominant reading of the MSS. (including Oxon.) is aTTOKpvirTei. The editors have espoused dTreKpvnrev' but such a text would not account for such a variant as diroKpynTei, in the best MSS. 'A7roKpu7TTct itself is scarcely possible (on the principle of ireirpay- The usage of the orators e. g. Antipho vi. 14. p. 143, proves this ', cf. Antipho ii. A. ttoXXoi tcov TrepiearcoTCCiv tovtcov a. 9. p. Il6, and (esp.) y. 5- ravra rravra dicpiftcos eTriaTavrai, p. Il8, ovdeh yap cxttls tcov Trap- Andoc. i. 1 39. p. 1 8, ovcf vp-av tcov 6vt(ov ovk av OKvrjporepos .... rjv. Ka&qjt4vGtv ov8e\s av emTpeyj/eie. Lysias uses in the same mean- 16. ebogav] The nom. is ib. 98b); but points to diro- KpvTTTciv, which is to be governed by eboge understood from edogav' which gives also the best sense. 6. ravrrjo-l] The — 1 is not always strictly SeucTucov. Lob. Path. Pars II. p. 230, " Ssepe Oratores, etiamsi de absentibus loquuntur, quos modo designarunt et auditoribus quasi spectandos propo- nunt, iota demonstrativo utuntur, et ssepius etiam negligunt, si de prsesentibus." Cf. tovt\, 37 e. i^rdaeas] We cannot fol- low Oxon. and 3 other MSS. in reading egeas, which is the result of an old contraction misread. 15. tovt oi] This conjecture of F. A. Wolf we must needs adopt for tovtov of the MSS. 9. ovopa §e — e ivat] Lit. ' and I am called by this name, that I am wise.' The subject of Xe- yeaOai is [epe], not ovopa. And o-o(Dl> TCDV 10 fastening ,, v>v ../ > \ ~ 9»on Socrates OLVUpWTTCDV, KCU aVTOL TTOAXaKLS- e/Xe Hl/JLOVVTCU" €LT individu- eiriyeipovoriv aAXovs e£eTa£ea>' KaireiTa, oifJLou, ev- imputation ' n x 'A/3 ' » ' v '£' (previously pLCTKOVCn 7T0AAT]V CltyvOVlCLV OLOpL6P00V fXeV eideVCU TL only a * A r >$r £\ » -. / * j^/ > -/) 9 class-impu- avupcD7rcov, etoorcov oe oAiyct tj ovoev. evrevoev ovv tation) of t r » * ^ >$- w j v » />* > ^ N > » perverting Ot V7T CWTCDV e^€Ta(^OpieVOC EpLOL OpyiCpVTCU, aXX 0^15 the youth: cwtoIs, kcu Xeyovcnv &>? iLooKpaTT]? ti? kcrrc uiapco- d tolto? kcu StctfpOeipec rov? veovs' kcu kireidav tls 1. pev %tl\ Oxon. gives pev e'xa> en, but in the hand of a re- storer, and not on the traces of the old letters. (Graisf. wrongly represents ex<*v as the reading. %x<* v would be redundant, like excov (pXvapels, &c.) 2. kcu gevcov] So Oxon. and 3 other MSS. Ecld. kcu rail/ |eVcoz/. But the variation is in the spirit of Plato : cf. Dig. 237, and add Phsedo 85 a, avrrj fj re d^Scbi/ ical x^iScbi/ kol 6 eTToyjr. 11. iiifiovvraij So Oxon. &c. /jufiovfievot is a con- jecture of Hermann. 4. vn6 tcivttjs] Later, 31 c, ster compares Eep. 539 b, ol he gives a Second reason for /xetpaKLO-KOi, orav rb Trpcorov Xoyov abstaining from public life. yevcovrat, cos 7rait)ia avroLS Kara- 6. iv 7revia fivpla] Cf. Legg. xP avTa h <*el els avrikoyiav XP W " 677 c, the beautiful expression p.evoi, Kal pip.ovp.evoi rovs i&Xe- p.vpiav TLva cfiofiepav eprjpiav, Rep. yxovras clvtoI aXXovs iXeyxovcrt 520 C, pvpico (3e\Tia>v. .... Kal e/c rovToav 8r] avroi re For the fact, with respect kol to 8Xov TCdv irpo- X 6L P a TavTa Xeyovaii/, ore tcl peTecopa kcu tol vtto syrj?, kcu 0€ovs per} vo/JLi^etv, kcu rov yjttcd \6yov KpelrTco TTOieiv. tol yap aXrjOr), olpcu, ovk av eW- Xoiev Xeyetu, otl KaTcidrjXoi yiyvovTai irpocnroiov- pevoi pev eldepat, eidoTe? Se ovbev. are ovv, olpai, (piXoTL/jiot ovTes koll a(j)o8pol kcu 7roAAo4 koll £vvt€- loTaypevois kcu 7ri6avm XeyovTes irep\ epov, ep7T€7rXr}- e koxjiv vpcoi/ tol cor a koll tvolKcu koll a(j)o8pco9 8lcl- f3aA\oi>T€?. €K tovtcdv koll MeArjTo? pot hriQero KOLL 9. gvvTeTayfxevais] So BSZ. H with two MSS. ^vvT€TafM€va)S. But gwrerayix. means 'in set array:' cf. iEschin. ii. 74. p. 37, ol ^vvreraypevoi prjropes. 4. ravra] Latin ista ; idio- matically expressive of con- tempt, Dig. 318. 6V1 ra fiereopa] Understand £77-00 or the like, by com- parison of 19 b. 12. i< tovtcov] ' It is upon this footing' — namely that of an old general prejudice, ag- gravated by supervening per- sonal animosity, — ' that I am now attacked by' &c. The meaning 'in consequence of would be too strong, both for the sense here, and for the idiomatic use of the phrase ; cf. Dig. 116 : the meaning ' upon the strength of would also exceed the warrant of the Greek, though not of the sense, cf. 19 a, fj drj kcu 7TiarT€VQ>v Me- Xrjros K.r.X. kcu MeXrjros — prjTopcov] For an account of Socrates' three accusers and their motives, and of the classes of per- sons called here noXiriKol and prjropes, see Introd. p. ii. note 1. The hrjyuovpyoX are here joined with the 7ro\iTtKol, because Any- tus represented a trade himself, and herein was but one of many instances of the same conjunc- tion of pursuits in those times at Athens. Socrates was wont to speak slightingly of mechan- ical arts (Xen. CEcon. iv. 3), — a view which would seem to connect itself with his praise of o-^oXr) (Diog. ii. 31, Ml. Var. x. 14) : and a conversation, in which he pressed an uncom- mercial view of education upon Anytus himself with reference to his son, seems to have been among the causes of Anytus' personal hatred of Socrates. (See again Introd. p. iv.) AnOAOHA 20KPATOY2. 55 p. 23. "AVVTOS KCU AvKCOP, MeXrjTO? fxeu VTrep TCOV 7TOL7]TC01/ with the • d r "A ** ' * ~ £ - * old general aXVO/jL€V09, AwTOS be Virep TCOV OrjfXLOVpyCGV KCU prejudice, . A , ^ e > r t , <, hadin- p. 24. TCOV TTOAlTLKCOV, AvKCOV 0€ V7T€p TCOV prjTOpCOV' GXTT€, spired the » » »\ > 8e ] See In- stating the facts I am virtually trod. p. vi. reiterating and attesting the 56 IIAATONOS a. Perver- ev eKOLCTTOV e^eTOLCTCOpeV. (pY]CTL ydp 8rj TOVS VeOVS p. 24. youth. dSiKeiv pe 8ta(j)0€[povTa. iyco 8e 9 co av8pes 'AOrjvouot, ci8iKelv (prjpl MeXrjTOis, on a7rov8rj yapievTitgrai, paSicos eh dyusvas KaOicrTas civOpcoTrovs, 7rep\ irpay- 5 paTcov irpocrTroLovpevos cnrov8d^eiv koll Krj8ecr0ai, cov ovbev tovtco 7T(DTTore efxeX-qaev. cos 8e tovto ovtccs e\ei, Treipaaopai koll vpxv i^ide^ou. Two an- XII. Kal ijloi 8evpo. co Me'XrjTe, elire' dXXo n swers (both ' ' 7 ' . dialecti- y 73-epi 7ToXXov 7TOiei, 07TCO? CO? f3eXTl(TTOL ol VeCOTepOl d 1. the 10 ecroi/Tai: 'Eyarye. *\6l 8tj vvv elwe tovtols, tis av- hypocrisy ' of the row fieXrlovs Tvoiel ; drjXov yap on oiaOa, peXov ye charge ; \ \ \ » *. / ' aot. tov piev yap diacpOelpovra igevpcov, cos $1)?, ipe elcrayeis rovrotal Kal Kanqyopels' tov be 8rj /3eA- tlovs TTOiovvra Wi eiire Ka\ p-qvvcrov avToh, tis ecrnv. I 5o/)as , 5 co Me'A^re, on criyas koli ovk e^eis emeiv ; /cat toi ovk a\o~yj)ov croi 8oKei elvai koi 'iKavov TeKpiqpiov oi) 8rj iyco Xeyco, on croc ov8ev pepeXrjKev ; aAA erne, co 'yafle, ti$ amovs apeivovs 7roiei ; Ol vopoi. 'AAA e ov tovto epcoTco, co fieXTLCTTe, dXXa tls dvOpcoiros, lOOCTTLS TTpCOTOV KCU ai)TO TOVTO ol8e, TOV? VOpOVS. Ovtol, co ^coKpaTe?, ol SiKacrTaL Ylcos Xeyets, co 3. o-TTovdfj xapwri&rai] Oxy- though it naturally affords moron : ' is playing off a jest scope for exhibiting Socrates' under solemn forms.' The characteristic talent, is legally machinery of the law, with all speaking the customary ipa>- its solemnity of circumstance 7-770-1?, to which either party and all its serious consequences, was bound to submit at the is set in motion by him for his requisition of the other. In- mere amusement. Cf. x a P<* VTl - trod. p. x. £oprvos in the same sense 27 18. afxeivovs] c Better citi- a, where it is explained by zens,' — better toward others : naiCovTos. whereas PeXrlovs above means, 8. Kal pot k.tX] The ex- strictly speaking, better in animation of Meletus by So- themselves, crates, which now follows, AnOAOriA 20KPATOY2. 57 p. 24. MeArire ; oi8e tov? viovs waiSevetv owl re eiai kou fieXriov? ttolovctl ; MaXicrra. Horepov diravTes, fj ol pev avTCQv, ol 8* ov ; ( Airavres. Eu ye vr) ttjv Hpav XeyeL?, kou ttoXXtjv a(p6oviai> rcov dxpeXovv- P- 25. rcov. tl 8e 8r] ; ol8e ol OKpoarau fSeXrlovs ttolovctlv, 5 77 ov ; Kcu ovtol. T7 8e ol ftovXevTal ; Kat ol fiov- Xevral. 'AAA* dpa, co MeAiyre, /at) ol eV rfj eKKX-rjcria, ol €KKXr)crLau-Ta[, 8ia(p6eipovcri too? vecorepovs ; rj KOLKeivoi fieXriovs ttolovctlv diravTes ; KctKe^ot. Yldv- rey apa, cb? eoiKev, ' KQtjvouol kclXov? KayaOovs ttolovctl 10 TrXrjv epov, eyco 8e povos 8ia(p6elpco. ovtco Xeyeis ; Ylduv cr(j)68pa tclvtcl Xeyco. YloXXrjv y epov kut- eyvcoKas dvarv\lap. kcli poi diroKpivai' 77 kou Trep\ b Ittttovs' ovtco ctol 8ok€i eyeiv % 0L ^ v /SeAr/ouy 7tol- ovvres clvtovs Travres avOpcoiroL eivaL, ei? de tls 6 15 8ia ; 77 tovvolvtlov tovtov ttolv els pev tls 6 fBeXriov? 0169 t cov iroielv 77 iravv oXiyoi? ol lttttlkoi' ol 8e 7roXXol eavirep ^vvcoctl kou \pcovrai c l?t7tois, 81a- (pOeipovcrLv ; ov\ ovtcd? eyei, co MeXrjre, kcu 7rep\ llTTTCOV KCU TCOV aXXcQV OLTTOiVTCOV ^COCOV J TTCtVTCOS 8rj- 2° 7rov 9 eav re crv kou ' Avvtos ov (prjre eav re (prJTe* ttoXXyj yap av tls ev8aipovia eirj irep\ too? veovs, el els pev povo? avrovs bioxpOeipei, ol 8* aAAot a>0€- c Xovctlv. dXXd yap, co MeXrjTe, 'iKavcos e7ri8eiKvvcrai ore ov8e7rco7TOTe iffipovTLcra? tcov vecov, kou cracpCQ? 25 a7ro0atVety tyjv cravrov dpeXeLav, otl ov8ev ctol pepe- XrjKe irep\ cov epe eicrayei?. 24. aWaydp] i But the truth play upon words is doubtless is;' as above 19 c, &c. Dig. intended; see several instances 147. in Plato collected Dig. 324. 26. dnoffiaiveis — d^ieXeiav] Be- In this case the probability is tween d/xeXeiav and MeA^re a strengthened by the constant 2. the stupidity of it. 58 OAATON02 XIII. "En Se rjplv ebre co irpo? Aio? MeXrjre, p. 25. izorepov ecrrcv otKelv dpieivov ev woAitous 1 xprjarols 1 r\ iroviqpois ; co Wdv, diroKpivai' ovdev yap rot ^aXeirov ipCOTCO. 0V)( ol ptev TTOVTjpoi KOIKOV TL ipya^QVTOLl TOV$ 5 del eyyvrarco eavrcov ovra?, ol 6' dyadol dyaOov tl ; Udvv ye. 3/ E>o~tlv ovv oaris fiovXeraL vtto tcov ^v- vovtcov fiXdirrecrOaL paXXov rj cbcpeXelaOaL ; diroKpi- d vat, co 'ya@e' kou yap 6 vopos KeXeveL diroKpivecrOai. ecrO' octtls fiovXerai ^XairreaOaL ; Ov Srjra. Qepe *°8rj, irorepov e/xe eladyei? Sevpo cos SiatpOelpovra Toi>? vecorepovs kou TTOvrjporepovs iroiovvra eKovra 77 aKOvra ; hiKovra eycoye. 1 1 orjra, co MeXrjre ; toctovtov crv ifiov cro(j)coTepo9 el ttjXlkovtov ovtos TrjAtKocrde cov, chare erv pev eyvcoKa? otl ol pev KaKol KaKov tl epya- *5 fyvrai del tovs paXiara irXrjcriov eavrcov, ol be dya- e 66l dyaOov eyco he drj e!y toctovtov apLaQlas tJkco, chare kou tovt dyvoco, oti 9 idv Tiva poySiqpov 7roLiqaco tcov i^vvovTcov, KLvdvvevaco KaKov tl Xafielv dir av- tov, cocrTe rovro to toctovtov KaKov eKcov ttolco, cb? 20 (py? av ; ravra eyco croi ov ireiQopai, co TS/ieXrjre, olpai Se ov8e aXXov dvOpcoircov ovoeva' dXA* rj ov P- 36. 8ia(j)0elpco, 7] el dtacpOeipco, clkcov, chare crv ye kot dpLCporepa \f/evSei. el de olkcov SiacpOeipco, tcov tolov- tcov kcu aKOvcricov apLaprrjparcov ov Sevpo vopcos elad- 25 yeiv ecrTiv, dXK ISla Xafiovra StSdcrKeiv Kal vovderelv' recurrence of the juxtaposi- 0U1, ra prj vopl^eiv ov$ r) woXis 10 fort^ff vopi^ei, erepa 8e 8aipovia Kaivd ; ov ravra Xeyeis on Jf^Jj^ SibdcTKcov SiachOelpco ; Haw aev ovv ad)68pa ravra a §' encies — r r 7 r t r answered Xeyco. Upo? am cov rolvvv, co M.eXr)re, rovrcov rcov ^/mT Oecov, cov vvv Xoyos ecrriv, eiire en cracpecrrepov Kal tustoa c epol kcu roh dv8pdcri rovroi&L eyco yap ov 8vvapai i S dic tion. paOeiv, irbrepov Xeyeis 8i8dcrKeiv pe voplc^etv eival rivas Oeovs, Kal avrbs dpa vopl^co elvai Oeovs, Kal ovk elpl to irapdrrav aOeos ov8e ravrrj (x8ikco, ov pevroi ovenrep ye r) ttoXis, a A A' erepovs, Kal rovr ecrriv o pot eyKaXeh, on erepovs' r) TravraTracri pe 20 (pfj? ovre avrbv vopi^eiv Oeov? rovs re aXXovs ravra SiSdcTKew. Tavra Xeyco, cb? rb irapdirav ov vopltjcis 2. eepvyes] ' Didst decline,' nom. to ip.e\r}aev. Dig. 6. Cf. Ar. Ach. 717, mgeXavveiv 1 4. av vvv] ' Whom the ar- Xpr) to \oitt6v, Kav vyr] tls &- guinent at present concerns :' fxtovv. With Plato, however, equivalent to ovs \4yofxev as this meaning of the word is distinguished from rrepl a>v \e- more common in the com- yopev. — Stallb., rightly. Cf. pound 8ia(pevyeiv. Cf. Symp. Soph. 263 a, o-bv epyov drj (ppd- 174 a. e'efcvyes and ovk r)6. £eiv rrepl ov t eo~r\ Kal otov form a hysteron proteron, [6 \6yos], Legg. 678 a, 7t6\<-cds though not a strongly marked xa\ noXiTeias iripi kcu vopo6eo~Las, One. cov vvv 6 Xoyos r)piv TrapeaTrjKev, 7. ovre — o-p.iKpbv~\ AcdlS. . . . p.vr)pr)v elvai. cognate after e/xe'Xr/o-ei/, not I 2 60 nAATONOS Oeovs. 'O Oavfidaie Me'A^re, ha ri ravra key* is ; p. 26. ovde rjXtov ovde o~eXrjvr}v apa vofjiifa Oeovs elvai, eocr- 7T€p ol aXXoi avOpcoiroL ; Ma Al\ co avSpe? StKacrrai, €7T6t tov fiev rjXtov XiOov (frrjaw eivai, T7]v Se aeXrjvrjv hyrjv. ' ' Ava^ayopov diet Karrjyopelv, a> 0/Ae Me'A^re, kou ovrco Karatypoveis TGovSe kou diet olvtovs 1 a7reipov9 ypafxpLCCTcov eivai, cocrre ovk dbevai on ra 'A^a^a- yopov /3i/3\la rod KXa^opeviov ye/jtec rovrcov tcop Xoycov ; koll 8r] kcu ol veoi ravra Trap ifiov /JtavOa- \oVQvcriV) a e^eanv if lore, el iravv ttoXXov, Spa^r/v e 3. Ma A"] Understand ov vopigei. 5. 'Avagayopov] Xen. Mem. IV. vii. 7, makes Socrates re- fute the alleged opinion of Anaxagoras, tov fjXiov XLBov bianvpov eivai. Anaxagoras' formula was pvdpov didnvpov, which others took to mean a mass of iron. Of the moon he asserted that it had ohrjo-eis, X6(povs, (pdpayyas, whence that he believed it to be yrj was an inference. 8. /3t/3Ata] " Is secundum Laert. II. iii. 8, et Clem. Alex, ibi ab interpp. lauda- tum, philosophorum primus fiifiXiov egedwKe arvyypaqbrjs, U- brum a se scriptum edidit. Hoc tamen de Anaximandro alii, alii de Pherecyde Syro dicunt." — Forst. 9. Kai drj kcu] Ironical : 'and so then.' 10. a — irpiapivovs] The doc- trines, not the books, eviore' that is, if they should happen to see a play in which these doctrines are promulgated, as in Eurip. Orest. 982, poXotpi rav ovpavov pearov x.6ovos re rera- pevav alcoprjpacri Tterpav aXvcrecrt Xpvo-eaiai, (pepopevav divmari, /3oo- Xov eg 'OXvpnov. Dacier, as Stallbaum observes, curiously mistook the sense of this pas- sage, and imagined that a volume of Anaxagoras might be bought at that time for a drachma. But in fact the price of paper itself was then excessive at Athens. Emile Egger, in a letter to Firmin Didot (Revue Contemporaine du 15 Septembre, 1856), men- tions fragments of an account rendered by certain Athenian officers in 407 B.C., in which the price of sheets of paper (xaprcu), for writing copies of these accounts (dvriypa(pa) upon, was 1 drachma and 2 obols each, i. e. 1 fr. 20 cent. — a sum which, according to Boeck's computation, accepted by Eg- ger, would be equivalent to 4 fr. 80 cent. now. el 7ra.vv ttoAXov] ' At the most :' the same expression occurs Alcib. I. 123 c, agios pvS)V 7repTr)KovTa el ivavv 7roXXov, Gorg. 5 1 1 d, eav 7rap7roXv, . . . Svo dpaxfias eirpagaTo. The ut- AnOAOriA 20KPATOYI, 61 p. 26. eK rrjs opxrjcrTpas' irptafxevovs ^coKpdrovs KarayeXav, kav 7rpocnroir)Tai iavrov dvai, aXXcos re koll ovtco? aTOTTCL OVTOL. GcAA* CO 7Tp09 AlOS, OVTCOCTL CTOl 80KCO, ovSeva vofiutJEiv Oeov dvai ; Ov \xivroi fid A" ovcf ottcocttiovv. ' Air lottos y el, co MeXrjre, kcu ravras /jl€i>toi, cos IpLoi SoKels, cravTcp. e/xoi yap dotcei ovtoctl, cd avbpes 'AOrjvaioi, ttolvv elvau v/Spcarr)? kcu olko- XacrTOs, kcu dre^ycos tttjv ypacprjv ravrrjv v/3p€i tlv\ p. 27. kol aKoXaaia kol veorrjTi ypd\j/aaOai. eoiKe yap 4. vofjii£eiv] Oxon. alone has vofxifa, which, though anacoluthic after Sokco, has a vividness of its own, and certainly points to the right way of understanding the sentence as an instance of binary structure : see Commentary. But we cannot claim acceptance for vofxifa with such preponderating authority in favour of pofLi£eip. most the Bearpcdvrjs could de- mand for any place was a drachma ; the price for an or- dinary place was two oboli. See Boeck, Public Economy of Athens, translated by G. C. Lewis, p. 223. n. 315 of 2nd edition. 2. aWcos re kcu] Which the youths must know are not mine, ' to say nothing of their singularity,' which would make the theft still more glaring. Steinhart has well observed that the meaning of aroira is not ' absurd,' but ' uncommon' or ' peculiar ;' etymologically, what cannot be assigned to any known place or origin. He further remarks that nei- ther Socrates nor Plato would have rejected these notions as ' absurd.' Cf. the striking passage in Legg. 886 d, where Plato declines to controvert these positions although he would uphold the gods. 3. ovraxrl — ehac~\ The two sentences ovracri 0-01 8okco and ovbeva — ehat are both descrip- tions of the same fact, the re- statement being the more pre- cise ', ovraxrl croi doKco stands by a sort of attraction for ovrcoo-l croi SoKet 7rep\ e/j-ov, of which the filling up in the re-statement would have been e/xe ovbeva — etvac. Dig. 207, 208. ^."Attio-tos /c.r.X.] The ques- tion Meletus had answered affirmatively was, not whether Socrates was an atheist, but whether it was his opinion that Socrates was an atheist, — ovtghtl o-ol dona • Socrates' comment on this is ' Very well ; nobody else will believe that, and I am pretty sure you do not yourself,' i. e. I am pretty sure you are saying what you know to be untrue. 62 nAAT0N02 cocnrep diviy[ia J~vvti6£vti SLaweLpcoixevco^ dpa yvcocre- p. 27. toll ^coKparrjs 6 crocpos drj kpov ^apLevrL^ofikvov koll evavrC kfiavrco Xeyovros, rj k^a7rarrjo-co avrov koll tovs aXXov? tovs olkovovtols ; ovtos yap kfioL (pai- 5V€tou ra ivavria XeyeLv avro? eavrco kv rfj ypcKpfj, cocnrep av el enroc ddwel ^.coKpdrrjs 6eov$ ov vo- fJiitcov, dXXa Oeovs vojjll^cov. koll tol tovto kcrri TTOLlZpVTOS. XV. Evv€7ri- v, rav- ra. erepcos re Kai erepcos Xeycov, dp(porepcos elnelv apiora, 27 1 d, ecrnv ovv e'lftrj rocra Kai roaa, Kai roia Kai rata, Legg. 721b, XPV~ fiacri p.ev rocrois Kai roaois, rfj Kai rfj be dripiq, Phileb. 24 d, rb els avBis re Kai av6is. 16. &opv@elra>] Merely by making irrelevant remarks in- stead of answering ; — brawl- ing, as we might say. AnOAOriA 2QKPATOY2. 63 p. 2J. dXXois rovroicri. a A Act rb hri rovrco ye diroKpivai' c &T0* ooTis Saifiovia pev vopitei irpa.yp.ar eivou, 8ai- povas 8e ov vopi^ei ; Ovk ecrriv. 'Qs Svrjcras, on f poyis direKpivco vtto rovrcovl dvayKa^opevos. ovkovv daipovia pev (prjs pe Kal vopi^eiv koli SiddcrKeiv, elr 5 ovv Kaiva eire iraXaid' dXX' ovv Saipovid ye voptQoo Kara rov aov Xoyov, koi ravra Kal Sicopocrco iv rfj avrtypafpfj. el Be Saipovia vopi^co, Kal dalpovas 8rj- irov itoXXtj dvdyKTj vopl^eiv pe ecrriv' ovy^ ovrcos ey^ei ; eyei 8rj' riOrjpi yap ere bpoXoyovvra, enreiSr) 10 d ovk diroKplvei. rovs he Salpovas ovyl fjroi Oeovs ye rp/ovpeOa rj Oecov iraldas ; (prjs i] ov ; Haw ye. Ovkovv eiirep Salpovas rjyovi±ai, d>s crv (j)ys, el pev Oeoi rives' elcriv 01 Salpoves, rovr av e'lrj b eyco (prjpl ere alvirrecrOai Ka\ yapievri^eaOai, Oeovs ovy^ -qyov- 15 pevov (pavac epe Oeovs av -qyelcrOai iraXiv, eireibrjirep ye Salpovas rjyovpac el S' av oi dalpoves Oecov iralSes elcri voOoi rives rj e/c vvp(pcov 7] eK rivcov ~aXXcov, cov drj koi Xeyovrai, ris av dvOpcoircov Oecov pev iraiSas Tjyolro elvai, Oeovs Se prj ; bpolcos yap av aroirov eirj, 20 e coairep av el ris tirircov pev iraldas rjyoiro fj Kal ovcov 6. daLfiovid ye] To make the equivocation of Meletus is the reasoning sound, Scil/jlovici simply returned upon himself. here and baip.6vLa irpdyp-ara Contrast, where Socrates is above ought to mean the speaking uncontroversially of same : which it must be ac- his monitor, the distinctly ad- knowledged they do not. It jectival deiov n s ov] The ov is not simply pleonastic, as in the case of two negatives in the same clause, but it is irra- tional. It is a confused anti- cipation of the coming negative ovdepia. Dig. 264. 18. ovdev — art}] ' The rule is in no danger of breaking down in my case.' This use of ovdev bewov is idiomatic : cf. Gorg. 520 d, ovdev deivov avT

avOpame, el diet, Seiv Ktvdvvov viroXoyiteaOcu taken in ' ^ / v P , v x ,, / obedience ro ^ b77^ *7 TeQvavai dvdpa brov tl kolI crputpov 60eAo? 5 to the >,.,,, „ , „ r, / already eCTTLV, aAA OITC €KUVO pOVOV CTKOTTeiV, OTCLV TTpaTTTj^ mentioned &' * "X ' * • £ v ' //~ divine call, TTOTepov oiKcua if] aottca irpaTTei, koli avopo? ayaoov andthere- v ,\ , ^ v v * ' - ~ . / 9 fore to be c epya rj kolkov. (pavAoi yap av tco ye crco Aoyco eiev performed < /)/ «/ m / x f n without tcov rjpiuecov ocroi ev 1 poia TeTeAevTrjKaaiv ol re respect of vx x x < - /-x / cs < 1 is - -. conse- akkoi Kai O TT]S KjeTLOOS VLOS, 09 TOCTOVTOV TOV KM- io que nces £/ 1 1 xx, / < ~ or counter- ovvov Karecppovrjae irapa to aia^pov tl viropeivai, induce- » rr i ^x 9 * / j /i / ments COCTTe €7T€lOr} etireV 7] pj]TT]p aVTCp IT pOUV fJLOV peVCp r ]&KTopa airoKTeivai,, Oeos ovcra, ovrcoai ttcos, cos ey co- par co irai, el TipLtoprjcreis JJaTpOKAco tco eTalpco top (povov KaVEiKTopa diroKTevel?, avTO? diroOaveC av- 15 TtKa yap toi, (prjcri, peU s^KTOpa iroTpos eToipos' o 8e Tarn aKovcra? tov pev Oavarov Kal tov tavftvvov cbAcycoprjcre, iroAv 8e pahAov Selcra? to Qjp Kai] At Poti- 20. Kal tovto .... avrr{\ Not dsea (see Charm, init., Symp. pleonastic ; but ' what is this 219, 2 20) between 432 and 429 but that very same reprehen- B.c, Socrates rescued Alcibi- sible ignorance?' tov oteo-Oai ades but resigned in his favour which follows is a genitive his claim to the reward of epexegetic of dfxaBia. Dig. 24. AnOAOFIA 20KPATOY2. 67 p. 29. rod dleaOai eidepai a ovk olSep ; iyco Se, co apdpe?, Tovrcp kou kvravQa 'laws dtacfyepco tg>p ttoWcdv avOpco- 7rcop, kou el 8r/ rco acxpcorepos rov (pairjv eivou, tovtco clp, otl ovk eldco? lkolpq)? 7rep\ tcqv iv e Atdov ovrco koll o'lofiai ovk eloevai' to Se abiKeiv kou anrziQuv 5 r» fie\TLOPL, kou Seep kou avOpcorrcp, otl kolkov koll alcr^pop iarLv ol8a. irpb ovv tgjp kolkow, g>p ol8a OTL KOLKGL io~TLP, £~ » \ * « * » \/\ ~ * » s^ > ~\ iuhibi- apyj]v ov ouv e/me oevpo eLcreAueLP y, eTreLorj eLarjA- tion;— 6ov, oi>)( chop T€ elpaL to fxrj airoKTelpai fie, Aeycop irpos v/ua? coy, el 8La(pev^olfJL7]p, rjSrj Sip vfxojp ol viel? 2. TOVTCO KOI K.T.A.] C 111 tlllS province also [of the unseen] I believe I am distinguished from the mass of mankind herein, and if I were to say I was wiser in any point than any other person, I should say it was herein, that' &c. The former as well as the latter tovtco both relate to the same fact, to the same 6Vt, — upon which a strong emphasis is thus made to converge. Cf. Gorg. 484 e, \ap7rp6s t ecrriv €KaaTos ev tovtco, Kcrnl tovt eVet- yeTac, Nepcov to 7r\eitrTov rjpepas tovtco pepos, "lv avTO? avTov Tvy- xdvei jSeXnoros &v. The sup- pression after tovtco av is a graceful evasion of self-asser- tion. See Dig. 255. 10. ci7no-Tr)o-avTes] ' Disbeliev- ing' the representation urged by Anytus as the reason why Socrates should die ; not ' re- fusing to follow Anytus' coun- sel' to put Socrates to death. It is therefore to be connected, not with the words imme- diately following (os eqbrj — cmoK- Tiiva'i pe), but with those next to them (Xeycov — 8iacp0apr)crov- Tai). Stallb. differs. 13. rjdrj av] The construction of the fat. indie, with av is abundantly established, av here belongs to 8iaiXocro(f>ew' idv 8e dXco? en tovto TTparrcou, (XTToOaveC el ovv fte, birep ehrov, d. eiri tovtol? dfpLOtre, e'nroip! av vpuv on eyco vfxa?, to dvSpe? ' KOrjvaloi, dcnrd(p/jiat piev kcu (piXco, 7r€i(TOfJL0U the plan Se fldXXoV TCp 0€Cp 7] VpUV, KCU eCOCFTTep OLV IpilTVeCO KCU being, to T , 9 » > / ,. , ~ v < ~ teach the io OL09 T€ CO, OV [AT} TTaVCTCOpai (plAO(TO£ / > , r \ » / /■ \ need of eVOOKipLCOTOLTrjS €£9 CTOtyKW KGLl LO")(VV, XprjfiaTCOV fA€V consci- »>/>-»/ rf 3/ f N ^ ously-pos- T 5 OVK tUCryVVCl €7Tlp€X0VfJLei>0$, 07TCOS CTOl earai coy 7rAet- principles CTTa, K0LL 8o^Y]9 K0LL ™l*V?i pOVqCT€C09 $€ KOLL CtXrj- e 6eia$ kcu 7-779 ^vyfjs, ottcos wy fteXricrTr} earai, ovk einpeXel ovde (ppovrltec? ; kcu idv rt? vpccov d/ui(j)icr~ firjTrj kcu (f)fj eiripeXelcrOai, ovk evOvs d(j)r}crco avrbv toovS (XTreipLij dXX eprjcrojiai avrbv Kal i^erdcrco Ka\ iXey^co, kcu eav /mot /jltj Sokjj K€KT7Jor0ac dperrjv, (pdvai then it is not an event which transference affects both : it is is assumed as about to happen not that Here of course both words are Opanrois. used, by transference, for the 14. laxvv] Stallb., after Fis- feelings which those actions cher, " de animi magnitudine betoken. Note too, that the et fortitudine." AIIOAQriA 20KPATOY2. 69 p. 30. 8e, ovetdcco on rd irXeiarov a^ta irepl eXa^iarov TroieiTou, ra 8e (pavXorepa Trepi wXelovos. ravra koll vecorepco koll Trpeafivrepco, brco av evrvyyavco, iroufjaco, KOLL <^€VCp KOLL darcp, fiaXXoV 8e TOL9 OLCFTOLS , OCT CO fjLOV eyyvrepco ecrre yeveL. ravra yap KeXeveL 6 deos, ev 5 \crre, kcu eyco cuo/xcu oi8ev itco vplv jieltpv dyaffbv yevecrOai ev rfj 7roAet y rrjv epLyv rco Oeco virrfpecrlav. ov8ev yap aXXo irparrcov eyco 7re pLe'pxppaL rj ireLQcov vpLcov koll vecorepovs koll Trpecrftvrepovs fxrjre crcojxdrcov h ewLpLeXelcrOaL pcrjre \prjpLarcov irporepov prj8e ovrco 10 a? rr)$ tyvyfis, bircos cos aplarrj ecrrai, Xeycov brL ovk €K yjpiqparcov dperrj yiyveraL, dXK e£ aperrjs Xprjpara koll rdXXa ayaOa row dvOpcoiroLs diravra koll 181a. kol Stj/jloo-lol. el pev ovv ravra Xeycov 8La- (f)0elpco rovs veovs, ravr av eirj f3Xa/3epa' el 8e rls fxe 15 (pr](TLv dXXa XeyeLv 77 ravra, ov8ev XeyeL. irpos ravra, (f)aLT)v av, co ' AOrjvaloL, rj irelQecjOe 'Awrco rj put], koll Tj OL(j)Ler€ 77 fXTj OL(f)L€r€, COS i/JLOV OVK OLV TTOLTjCTOVrOS c ctAAa, ovo' el pceXXco 7roXXaKL$ reOvavaL. XVIII. M77 Oopvfielre, dv8pes ' AOtjvoIol, dXK 20 b. That it t r t ■? »c\ //i e ' « ^/i n ~ »j» f was of vital efJLpeLvare jjlol ols eoerjVrjv vpLcov, pjj OopvpeLV e(p ols use to his * \ > j^.»»/ \ / t y \ 3 > ' country- ay Aeyco, a AX aKOveLv KaL yap, cos eyco OLp.aL, ovrj- men _ a n » ' '\ \ ^ 3 v t ~ * ~ divine aecrue aKOvovres. pLeXXco yap ovv arra vp.LV epeLV blessing kcu dXXa, e(f) oh icrcos ftorjcreaOe ' aXXd fxrj8apLcos to t em > iroLelre rovro, ev yap tare, eav epte aTroKrelvrjre roL- 25 ovrov ovra, olov eyco Xeyco, ovk e/xe pLel(joo /3Xa\j/ere 15. ravr av e'trj] ' If preaching prehensive ; it stands for the virtue is perversion, then in- whole clause referred to in the deed I am a mischievous per- phrase ravra \eya>v, and means son ; for I never rest from ' this practice of mine.' preaching it.' The ravra is not 24. (Borjo-eade] A stronger ex- identical with the ra€ra of the pression of feeling than 6opv- line before, but is more com- ftelv. 70 IIAATQN02 r) vpas avTOvs ' ep.e pev yap oi8ev av /3Xa\j/eiev p. 30. ovre MeXrjTos ome "Avvtos' ov8e yap av dvvairo' d ov yap olopai Qepirov eivai dpeivovt dv8pl vtto \eL- povos j3Xa7TT€a0ai. airoKTeiveie pevT av 'laco? r) e£e- sXacretev rj aTtpaaeiev' dXXa ravra ovtos \aoas olerat Kal aXXos ris ttov peydXa KaKa, iyco 8* ovk oiopai, dXXa ttoXv paXXov iroieiv a ovtqs vvvl Trocei, dv8pa dStKcos eTTL^eipelv diroKTivvvvai. vvv ovv, co av8pe? 5 'AOrjvaloi, ttoXXov 8eco iyco VTrep epavTOv dmoXo- 10 yelaOat, d>s tls av oiouro, dXX* virep vpcov, prj tl e^apdprrjre Trepl rr)v tov Oeov 86otlv vplv i/iov Kara- \j/r}(pi(TapL€voi. eav yap epe aTTOKTeivrjTe, ov pablws e dXXov tolovtov evprjaere, dre\v(bs^ el Kal yeXoiorepov €L7T€LVy TTp00~K€LpeV0V TYj TToXeL VTTO TOV 0€OV, QXJTTep i5t7T7np peyaXco pev Kal yevvalco, vtto peyeOovs 8e vcoOe- arepco Kal 8eopevcp eyeipeaOaL vtto pvcoiros twos' olov 8rj poL 8oK€i 6 Oeos epe rfj 7roXei irpocrTeOeiKevaL tolovtov Tiva, bs vpas iyelpcov Kal 7rei0cov Kal ovec- 8l£cov eva €Kao~Tov ov8ev iravopai tt)v rjpepav oXtjv p. 31. 2oiravTayov 7rpoo~Ka0l£cov. tolovtos ovv dXXos ov pa- 8lcos vplv yevrjaeTai, (6 dv8pes, dX?C lav ipol irei- OrjaOe, (peiaeaOe pcov' v peels 8 l'o~cos Ta^ av d)(0o- pevou coenrep 01 vvaTaijovTes iyeipoptevot, KpovaavTes 5. dripdareiev] H substitutes a conjecture of lllS Own, aTifiaxreiev, quite needlessly • for dTipd£a>, though it properly means to treat or regard as arifios, while aTip,6a> is to make arip.os, yet also has this technical sense : cf. Legg. 762 d, nep\ ras t£>v vea>v dpxas tjti- pdo~6co Trda-as. 23. Kpoixravres] Another unhappy conjectural substitution of H occurs here, — opovaavres, because (he says) 13. el Kal yeXoiorepov refers, which follows them, not to the words immediately 23. Kpuvo-avres] 'With a sin- succeeding, namely, 7rpoo-Kelp,e- gle tap,' — as you would a vov — Oeov, but to the simile nvayjs. AnOAOriA 20KPATOY2. 71 p. 31. av fie, iretOo^ievoL 'Apvtco, paSlco? av aTTOKTeivaiTe, eura tov Xolttov /Slop KaOevdovTe? StaTeXolr dv, el firj nva aXXov 6 Oebs vplv e7rL7repL\j/eLe KTjSofxevos 1 v/jlcov. otl 8 eyco Tvyyavco cov tolovto?, 0I09 VTTO as itssin- b tov Oeov tt\ iroXeL SeSocrOat, evOevhe av KaTavorjcraiTe' 5 alone //, / v v > \ ~ > > ~ might suf- ov yap avupwiTLvcp eoL/ce to e/xe tcov \xev e/mavrov fice to arravTcov rj/JLeArjKevaL /cat aveyecroaL tcov olk€lcov ap.e- Xov/xevcov roaavra rjdr) err), to Se vfxeTepov irpaTTeiv dei, ISia eKaaTco irpocnovTa cocnrep iraTepa r) ddeXcpbv 7rpeo-f3vT€pov, irelOovTa eirLpLeXelaOaL dpeTrjs. Kal el 10 fxevTOL tl goto tovtcov dweXauov /cat pucrOov Xafifia- vcov Tama TrapeKeXevo/irjv, elyov av Tiva Xoyov' vvv Se bpare Srj /cat avTol, otl 01 KaTrjyopot TaXXa rravTa avaLO~xyvTCDS ovtco KaTrjyopovvTes' tovto ye ov% olol c re eyevovTO chravaicryyvTrjCjaL irapacrypixevoL fiapTvpa, 15 cos eyco iroTe Tiva rj eTrpa^afxrjv /jllctOov rj fjTrjcra. LKavov yap, olfxai, eyco irape^ofxat tov fiapTvpa, dXrjOrj 009 Xeyco, tt]v ireviav. XIX. "icTLOS OLV OVV do^eL€V OLT07TOV elvai, OTL Srj c. (In an- swer to a Kpovo-avres is ' debile pulsandi verbum.' Such a word however is just what was wanted. 10. Kal el fxeuroL ti] H drops the toi, probably for want of con- sidering that the collocation is hyperbatical for Kal pkvroi ei ti. Cf. 41 e. 14. ovx otoi re] They would 1 9. "icrcos ai> ovv] The domi- doubtless make the assertion, nant reason of Socrates' absti- cf. 19 d : but what they did nence from public affairs was not find it practicable to do not so much the impossibility was to bring evidence in sup- of maintaining himself in a port of it. That is, gram- public position without sacri- matically speaking, the pri- fice of principle or of life ; but mary intention of the sentence rather, that he felt his mission d7ravaL(rxvvT7]a-aL — fxaprvpa lies to be a moral and an indi- in the participial clause, and vidual one, and that from his not in the verb dnavaiaxwr^- point of view it was infinitely o-ai. See Dig. 303. less important to rectify a 72 riAATQNOS supposed objection) that to have en- tered pub- lic life, in preference to dealing with indi- viduals, was not a method practically- possible for a righteous man, eyco Idia Liev ravra i^vLifiovXevco Trepucov kou ttoXv- p. 31 7rpaypovcd, drjLioala 8e ov toXllco dvafiaivcov els to ttXtjOos to vpeTepov ^vpflovXeveiv tt) woXei. tovtov Be diTLOv ecrTLV o vfxeh epov ttoXXolkls 1 aKrjKoaTe 7roX- 5Xa)(ov XeyovTO?, otl llol Oeiov tl kou SaiLLOviov yiyve- d toll (pcovrj, b dr/ kou ev ttj ypoKJ)fj eirLKcoLLCpbcov MeA??- to? iypd\j/aTO' i/xol Se tovt iorii/ e/c ^aiSo? dp^ape- vov cpcovr] tls yLyvoptevrj, fj otuv yevrjTat, del diro- Tpenec pe tovto b av peXXco irpaTTeLv, irpoTpeTrei Se 10 0V7T0T€' TOVT eCTTLV O LLOL IvOLVTlOVTOLl TOL 7ToXlTLKo\ irpaTTtiv. kou irayKaXcos ye llol Sokcl evavTiovcrOaC ev yap 'laTe, co dvSpes ' KOtjvoIol, el eyco irdXou ewe- Xelp-qara irpaTTeiv tol ttoXltlkol TrpdyLiaTa, irdXou av aTToXcoXr) kou out av vpds cb(f)eXr)Kr) ovSev ovt av e ^epavTOv. Kai llol pur) ayQetrOe XeyovTL TaXrjOrj' ov 5. yiyverai cpcovrf] All MSS. have this covrj, and all edd. except V bracket it. Needlessly ; Fischer points out the parallel to the next sentence, tovt cottIv i< 7rai86s dp^dpevov (poovr) tls yiyvo- pevr}. 9. tovto av] Edd. prefer tovtov. But aTroTpeneL irpaT- T€iv tovto is a construction borne out by Theset. 151 a, ivlois pev to yiyvopevov pot baipoviov dnoTpeTrei ^vveivai, [Dem.] Procem. XX. p. 143 1 , deltas a totc rjpdpreTe, vvv aTTOTpe^rco tovto. nadeiv, and analogous constructions such as Xen. An. III. i. 20, iropi£eo~6ai to. imrfideta Karexovaiv rjpds. tovto here is the reading of five MSS. besides Oxon. It is moreover less likely to have been invented than tovtov. 15. Kai poi pr)\ H alters this into Ka\ prj pot, comparing Phsedo 105 b. But Kai pot is a common commence- ment of a sentence in the Orators. particular policy, than by laying hold of individuals and making statesmen of them to raise the standard of statesmanship. 2. dvaftaivcov] To the Pnyx ; as in the famous nds 6 brjpos ava KadrjTo, Dem. de Cor. 169. p. 285. 5. Oeiov ti Ka\ haipoviov] See Appendix A, on to baipdviov. 6. ev Tf) ypacpjj] When he spoke of the eTepa Kaivd 8aipo- via, — a perversion of the truth which Socrates characterises as a caricature by his use of the word iiriKccpabav, which seems to mean 'selecting for caricature.' So o-KanTeiv is to mock at, e7rio-Kd>7rTeiv to mock at some particular trait in a person. AnOAOriA 2QKPATOY2. 73 p. 31. yap k(TTiv octtls avOpcDTrcov o-coOrjaerat ovre vpiv ovre aXXcp 7rXrj0€L ovSevl yvqcricos evavnovpevos koi Sca- lp. 32. kooXvcov iroXXa aBuca koll irapavopa ev rfj iroXei ycypecrOat, a A A' avayKaiov ecrrt rbv rat ovti payov- p.evov virep rod Sikollov, koll el peXXec oXiyov \povov 5 crcoOrjcrecrOai, IdicoreveLV dXXa prj brjpoaievetv. XX. MeyaAa 8* eycaye vplv reKpunpta irapepopai as expe- tovtcdv, ov Xoyovs", aXX o vpeis ripare, epya. olkov- two occa- care £77 /xoi> ra €/xo2 tjvpPeftTjKora, tv elSrjre on ovd* his life had * t s r , n v v 3, «v : / /, / shewnhim. az/ ew vireiKavoipi napa to OiKaiov detcra? Uavarov, 10 /*?; vireiKcov 8e apa kolv airoXoipr]v. epco 8e vplv (pop- b TtKa pev kcu SiKavcKa, aXrjOrj 8e. iyco yap, co 'A0r)- 11. apa kclv] This is Ast's conjecture. MSS. are chiefly divided between apa 6pcos, a>? kv rco varepcp XpOVW TTOLCTLV VfXLV eBo^6. TOT kyCD pLOVOS TCOV TTpV' Tavecov r)vavTi(£>6r]v vplv prjBlv iroieiv Trapa tov? 7. vfxiv is retained, in deference to weight of MSS., and with all the edd., against Oxon. and 2 other MSS.: although ivav- riovaOai does not require a dative of reference, especially in a description of formal proceedings. stands here in its simple meaning of 'vulgar' in the sense of 'common,' — not as implying (as Fischer and others think) self-assertion or bad taste ; a meaning which (1) would make epa> vplv sound blunt even to harshness ; (2) does not harmonise with 8iku- viKa, for an arrogant tone is not characteristic of persons addressing their judges ; and (3) does not suit the parallel passage Gorg. 482 e, els roiavra ayeis (popriKa kcu Srjprjyopiica, ... a (pvcrei pev ovk. iari KaXd, vopco 8e. diKaviKa is likewise a colourless word ; — not l lawyerlike ' in the sense of ' dry,' nor yet ' streitsiichtig' (Steinhart), but simply ' characteristic of speak- ers in courts of justice.' 3. tovs 8eKa~\ Strictly only eight ; for Conon was not in- cluded, and another of the ten was dead. Xenophon, in one of his accounts (Mem. I. i. 18), speaks with more definite in- accuracy of ivvea o-Tparrjyovs. 5. napavopcos, in two re- spects; (t) that they were tried atipom (see Thirlwall, Hist. Gr. vol. IV. App. 2, where it is shewn that this right of sepa- rate trial is not to be traced to the decree of Cannonus) ; and (2) that they were not heard in their own defence ; for in the assembly in which the charge was brought first in- formally, they only (Xen. Hell. I. vii. 5) @pa-X* a cmzo'tos a.7re\o- yrjcraro, ov yap irpovTtQr) acpLO-i Xoyos Kara tov vopov' and in that in which they were con- demned they were not heard at all. 7. TjvavTiondrjV . . . ivavrla tyr)- 0r)v a refusal to put the question 1 This is left for uncertain by Mr. Grote, who says that upon Xenophon's shewing ' it can hardly be ac- counted certain that Socrates was Epistates.' (Hist. Gr. ch. 64.) Again, to what act does ivavrla i\j/T)(pio~dp.r]v refer 1 It may be well to give the other accounts of this occur- rence at length : — (a) Xen. Mem. I. i. 18, j9ou- \evo~as yap nore, . . . iniVTarris iv AIlOAOriA 2QKPATOY2. 75 p. 32. vofiovs kou Ivavria ey\rr]^)Ladixr]v^ koll irolfAcov bvrwv r<5 8r)fi(0 yevopevos, einQvprjcravTos tov brjpov irapa tovs vopovs evvea (TTpaTTjyovs piq \j/f)(pc0 diroKTe7vai ndvTas, ovk r)6ekr](rev ein\frr](pi(ra.i i dpyi^opevov pev avTcZ tov drjpov noWcou be K.a\ bvvarCctv cmeikovv- TGiV. (b) lb. IV. IV. 2, i7riO-TCLT7]S yevopevos ovk eneTpe\j/e ra brjpco wapa tovs vopovs yjfr](pi£eo~dai, aXXa crvv toXs vopois r)vavTia>0T] roiavTT] oppfj tov brjpov k.t.X. (c) Xen. Hell. I. vii. 9-15, evTevdev eKK\r)o~iav enoiovv, els r/v fj (SovXr) elo~r)veyKe ttjv eavTrjs yva>- firjv, KaXXi^evov emovTos, rrjvbe .... tcov be 7rpvTa.veo3v tlvg>v ov v TTpo6r)creiv ttjv biayj/r]- (fiicriv trapa tovs vopovs, av&is KaXXi^evos dvaj3ds KaT-qyopei av- toov to. avTCi. ol be e(36cov KaXelv tovs ov (pacrKOVTas. ol be TTpVTCL- veis (pofirjdevTes a>po\6yovv ndvTes TrpoOfjaeiv, ttXtjv ^ooKpaTovs tov 2(0(ppOVLO~KOV' OVTOS S' OVK 6pr)V ov yap eqbaiveTO p,oi crepvbv paivo- p,evco brjpco avve^dpx^i-v ' ol be ivepX Qrjpapevrjv Kal KaWl^evov Trj vo~Tepaiq npoebpovs eyKadeTovs vcpevres KaTexeipoTovqcrav tcqv dv- bpa>v aKpiTov Qdvarov. The word eyKaOeToi is explained by iEsch. 111. 3. p. 54? kgi TavTa erepol Ttves to. \lrrj(pio-pa.Ta eTri-^rqobi^ov- o-tv, ovk eK tov bimioTaTov Tpo- ttov Xa^ovres irpoebpeveiv, dXX' €K 7rapao~Kevrjs Kade£6pevoi. (e) G-org. 474 a, trepvo-i (3ov- Xevetv Xaxoov, erreibr) r) cpvXrj evpv- Taveve Kal ebei pe e7rtylsr](pi£eiv, yeXcora 7rapel%ov kou ovk rj7no-Ta- prjv e7riyf/r)6r]v must therefore be to Socrates' refusal to put the question, which resulted, as (d) credibly relates, in the adjournment of proceedings to the next day, when a more pliable Epistates presided. The other clause, evavTia eyj/t](p., is, equally with r)vav- TicoOrjv, in connection with po- vos tcov TvpvTaveodv' the struc- ture of the sentence points to this inevitably. Now against referring this to the eventual voting in the assembly is (1) the unlikelihood that So- crates should be the only one of the prytanes who voted in the minority, when several of them had come to see that the bill was illegal. And (2) what if he had been the only one ? it was no marked distinction : the minority was large, and he and the rest of the prytanes would merely vote as indi- viduals. So likewise to refer it to the stages immediately preceding that final voting, would be in contradiction with the mention made in the ac- counts of the opposition of others beside Socrates. To refer it, again, to the debate on the bill in the council, before it was adopted as a L 2 76 IIAATONOS ivhuKvvvai fxe kcu cmdytiv tg>v prjTopcov, kou vjjlcou P* 3^- TrpofiovXevfxa, would be to lay the scene of it too far from that of r)vavnco6r]V vp.lv with which it is coupled, and would make fjbovos tq>v irpvrdveoov flat, since the irpvTaveis had no prominent functions in the council. The remaining alternative, and this is in itself a plausible one, is to refer it to the first stage of proceedings in the assembly, where, preparatorily to the irpo- (3ov\evp,a being read out by the Krjpvg, it was handed to the proedri, who with the nomo- thetae had to pronounce whe- ther it contravened any exist- ing law. Here was the precise moment at which legal pro- vision had been made for enter- taining the very objection taken by Socrates. We may then, with at least some probability, refer ivavTia i^r-i)v 7rpoe8pcov Arjpocrdevrjs ovk evto>v be vpa>v kcu tovs npoedpovs iru to ftrjpa KdT* ouofxa KakovvTGOV, OVTCOS O.KOVTOS CIVTOV TO "^^ICTjUa €7re\f/r](plo-dT]. The series of checks which the forms of the Ecclesia im- posed on bills in progress, with a view to guard existing laws, was as follows : — 1. The Trpofiovkevpa was handed to the proedri, who after conferring with the nomothetse pro- nounced whether or not it contravened existing laws ; and, if they passed it, it was read out by the Krjpvg. 2. After this, it was open to any citizen to stop it by lodging an vnoi- fiocria in earnest of his inten- tion to bring against its author a ypa rj Oavarov. koll ravra pev rjv en SrjpoKpa- Tovfievrjs tt}? TroXecos' €7rei8r] de oXLyap^la iyeveTO,$ 01 TpiOLKOVTOL aV pL€TaTT€pL\j/apL€POL fl€ 7T€fJL7rTOV OLVTOV el? tyjv OoXov TTpoaera^av ayayeiv Ik ^aXa/juvos 1 AeovTd tov iLaXapLLVcov, Iv (modavoC ola Sr) koll clXXol? eKeivoi troXXols ttoXXol irpoa-iTarrov, (3ovXo- fievoi ay? TrXeLcrovs avairXr\(jai alricov ' Tore pevTOi 10 d iyco ov Xoycp dXX epyco av eveBeL^apLrjv, on epuol instance) against any prytanis or proedrus who in discharge of his function in an assembly of the people should depart from the form of proceeding prescribed by law (Dem. c. Timocr. 22. p. 707). In the latter case, offenders were liable to a fine, and to evbei&s, which evdeLgis was not only an expe- dient for levying the fine, but had the immediate effect of suspending them from office until the fine was paid. The thesniothetse had exclusive cognisance of evdeigis. The statement of Pollux, that it pertained to the archon Basi- leus, is unsupported ; likewise his definition of evdtigts, on which some writers rely, — that it was 6/jLoXoyovfj.evov ddiK-qnaros, ov Kpiaecos dWci TLfxcopias Seo- uevov, — is called by Heffter 'a mere jingle of words.' 'A7ra- yayrj was of wider application than evdeigts. Moreover, its object was the bringing the offender into custody, which in eV£ei£i9 was not the rule. evdeigis was an interdictory procedure, dnaycoyrj a proce- dure of summary arrest. To be liable to it, a person must be taken eV airocpapco, in per- petration of an illicit act. The body which had cognisance in array coyrj was the Eleven, who registered (Heffter p. 210) the apprehension of the criminal and the cause of arrest (Lys. xiii. 86. p. 138), and who fur- ther, supposing the arrested person to be already under sentence of law, had charge of the execution of this sentence. 7. 66Xov] The building where the prytanes, and while they lasted the Thirty, daily ban- queted and sacrificed. It was near the council- chamber. 10. dva7v\rjo-ai\ This word, like implere in Latin, is used idio- matically of communicating pollution ; whence here ' im- plicate.' See for example Phse- do 67 a ; and cf. especially with the present passage Antipho, ii. A. a. 10. p. Il6, o-vyKaTairiii- nXdvaL tovs dvaiTtovs. 78 nAATQNOS d. (In an- swer to a supposed objection) that the innocent tendency of the re- formatory- doctrine, which was simply to teach un- compro- mising ad- herence to righteous- ness, and not to train for professions or impart knowledge, excluded the sus- picion of perverting the youth, Oavarov pev fieAet, el prj aypoiKOTepov i]v enreiv, ovS p. 32. otiovv, tov Se prjSev SjSikov prqS avocriov epyd^eaOat, tovtov Se to 7Tav /xe'Ae*. epe yap eKeivrj rj dpyr) ovk i^eirXrj^ev ovtcos Icryvpd ovcra, cociTe aStKov tl epyd- 5cracr0ai, dAX* e7retSrj e/c rrjs OoXov e^rjXOopev, ol pev rerrapes' co^ovto eh ^aXaplva kou rjyayov Aeovra, eyco Se co^op.rjv diricov olKaSe. kou \ctcos dv Sia ravr direQavov, el prj f) dp)(V Sid Tayecov KaTeXvOrj' koll e tovtcov vpuv eaovrai iroXXoi piapTvpes. 10 XXI. ' Ap ovv dv pee olecrOe roadie err] Staye- vecrOat, el eirpaTTOv ra Srjpocria, kou irpaTTcov d^lco? dvSph? dyaOov ifforjOovv rots SiKaloi? kcll, cocnrep Xpr/, tovto irep\ TrXeiaTov eiroiovp^v ; ttoXXov ye Set, co dvSpes ' AOrjvcuoi. ovSe yap av dAXos dvOpcowcov 15 ovSel?. dXX* eyco Sid iravTos tov fiiov Srjpocria re, el P« 33' 7TOV tl eirpa^a, toiovtos (pavovpat, koi ISia. 6 avTO? ovtos, ovSevl ircoiroTe <~vyycopr)cras ovSev wapd to SiKaiov ovTe dXXco ovTe tovtcov ovSevl, ov? ol Sia- ftakXovTes pe (fiacriv epiovs paOrjTa? elvai. eyco Se 10 diSdcTKaAo? pev ovSevos ttcottot eyevoprjv' el de tls pov XeyovTOs Kcti ra epavTov irpaTTOvTos emOvfJLel aKOveiv, eWe vecoTepos e'ure 7rpeaf3vTepo?, ovSevi TTCoiroTe ecpOovrjo-a, ovde xPVf xaTa M ez/ Xapifiavcov b 9. ifiiv] So MSS. and edd. generally. vpS>v is a conjecture of H. 9. paprvpes] The paprvpiai are supposed to follow here. In- trod. p. x. 20. 8idd(TKa\os ovbev6s~\ He means (see b below) that he imparted no padrjpa, — no pro- fessional knowledge ; even of KakoK.aya.6ia he never v7recrx€TO diddo-KaXos clvai Xen. Mem. I. ii. 3. Cf. his declining impe- \fia-6ai Mcias' son, Laches 208 d. What he sought to impart was rather a habit of mind ; "not to dispense ready-made truth like so much coin, but to awaken the sense of truth and virtue ; not to force his own convictions on others, but test theirs." — Zeller. AnOAOriA 20KPATOY2. 79 p. 33. StaXeyofxat /jltj Xapt^dvcov S* oil, etAA' optotcos' Kal TrXovertcp kol irevrfrt irape^co eptavTov epcoTav, kgu eav Tis fiovkr)Ta.L ciTroKptvopLevos aKOvetv cov av Xeyco. Kat tovtcov eyco e'tre tls XPV°" ro ? yiyverat etTe prj, ovk av Slkoucd? ttjv alriav VTre^otpt, cov fxr/re VTreaypixrjv 5 paf]Sevl ptr/Sev TTCoiroTe pLciOrjpa fxrjre eStSa^a* el Se to (prjcn Trap eptov TrcoiroTe tl ptaOelv rj aKOvcrat ISta tl jxrj Ka\ ol dXXot 7ravTe?, ev 'tare otl ovk dXrjOr) XeyeL. XXII. 'AAAa Slol tl Srj Trore jner eptov yaipoverl -a sus- C TLJ/69 7TOXw \pOVOV OtOTptpOVTeS ; aK7]KOaT€, CO av- 10 which was 8pe? AOrjvaloL' iraaav vp.lv ttjv aXrjOecav eyco elirov' fated inde- v » / / , c. <> / , / pendently. otl aKovovTes yaipovcnv e^eTaCppevots tois otoptevot? ptev eivat cro(j)OL?, overt 8' ov' earc yap ovk arjSe?. €/jloI Se tovto, cb? eyco (prjpLL, irpocrreraKTai viro rod 6eov irpaTTeiv Kal e'/c ptavTetcov Kal i£ ewnvicov Ka\ 15 Travrl TpoTTco, cbirep to Trore kcu aXXrj Beta potpa dvOpcoTTCp Kal otlovv rrpoaera^e TTparreiv. ravra y co 'AOrjvaloL, Ka\ dXrjOrj earl Kal eveXeyKra. el yap Srj d eycoye tcov vecov tov? pev SiacpOelpco^ tovs Se Steep - OapKa, XPV V SrjTrov, e'tre Ttves avrcov tt peer (3vre pot 20 yevofxevot eyvcoerav brt veots overtv avTols eyco KaKov TTcoTTOTe rt £we(3ovXevcra, vvvl amovs dvafiatvovras eptov Kariqyopelv Kal Ttptco peter Oat' el Se ptrj avTol rjOeXov, tcov olKetcov Ttva? tcov eKetvcov, iraTepas Kat aSeXepovs Kal aXXovs tovs 1 irpocrr]KovTas, elirep vtt 2 5 11. etnov] So Stallbaum, rightly, ehov, Hermann. See Commentary. 2. Kai idv tis] This is a soft being interjected. Then 6n is way of saying, ' And I am ready ' because.' See the examples to question him, if he chooses.' which Stallb. quotes — Euthy- 12. 6Vt aKovovres] Stallb. right- phro 3 b, Kep. I. 332 a, III. ly joins this with ak\a 81a rt — 402 e, 410 d. 8ia.Tplf3ovTes; the aKrjKoaTe — elwoV 80 nAATON02 e/uLOV Tl KOLKOV eTTeTTOvOeCTaV OLVTCDV 01 OLK6101, VVV /JL€fA- P- 33' vrjcrOai Kal TificopelaOai. ttolvtcos Be Trdpeujiv olvtldv ttoWol evravOoi, ovs iyco opco, 7rpTOv jiev Kpircou ovrocrl, ipLo? r)AiKicQTT]s Kal SrjfioTT]?, KptTof3ov\ov e 5TovSe 7raT7)p m enena A.voravias 6 12(pr)TTLO?, Aiayivov Tovde 7raTr/p' en ' Kvtl(J)(dv 6 Krjfpicriev? ovrocri, 'YfiTLyevovs 7rarr}p' aXXoi roivvv ovtoi, (bv oi d8eX(f)ol ev javTYj rfj Starpi^fj yeyovacri, Nt/cdor/oaro?, 6 Geo- £otl8ov, dSe\v tto- \itik5>v kcitcx* 1 ' Adimantus is an interlocutor in the Pep. (357-368, 548). Apollodorus appears in the Phsedo (59 a, 1 1 7 d) as passionately attached to Socrates, and in the Symp. says of himself (172 e), iyeb 'SiOKpa.Tec crvvc)ictTpl(3a> Kai eVi/ieXes 7T€7roi,7jpaL eKdcrrrjs rjpepas elDevai tl av \tyrj rj 7rpaTTrj, and is said (173 d) to have got ttjv inavvpiav to paviKos Ka\eio~6ai. Nicostratus, Theodotus, Para- lus, and iEantodorus are only mentioned here. AnOAOHA 20KPATOY2. 81 P- $$. T€T€\€VT7}K€l/ 9 C0O~Te OVK OLV eKtLVOS ye CLVTOV KCLTd- p. 34. der]0eLrj — , Kal IldpaXo? ode, 6 AypodoKOV, ov rjv Qeayrjs dSeXcpo?' ode 8e ' A8eip.avTO?, 6 ' AplcrTcovo?, ov ddeXcpo? ovtocfl IlXarcov, kol Alavrodcopo?, ov ' A7roXX68copos' ode ddeXcpos. kol aXXov? woXXovs 5 eyco e)(co vplv elnelv, cov tlvol exP^i v f JLa ^ L0 " ra M 6 ^ ez/ rco eavTov Xoycp Trapaa^eaOai MeXyrov \xdprvpa' el Se Tore eireXaOeTo, vvv TTapaayecrQco, eyco irapa- XMpto, kol Xeyerco, el ri eyei tolovtov. dXXa rovrov wav rovvavriov evprjerere, 00 dvbpes, iravras e\xo\ 10 fiorjOelv eroiptovs too 8ia(p6eipovr^ too Katcd epya{p- b p>evod rovs oi/ce/ofs* avrcov, cos (j)aai MeX^ros* kol 3 Avvtos. ovto\ pev yap ol dtefpOappLevot rd^ av Xoyov eypiev fiorjOovvres' ol Se ddtdcpdaproi, TTpecr- fivrepoi rjdr] avSpe?, ol tovtcov irpoarjKOvres, Tiva^i dXXov eypvai Xoyov (3orj@ovvTe$ epol dXX 77 top bpOov re Kal diKaiov, on £vvicracn M.eXrjrcp pev y^ev- dopievop, e/xoi Se aXrjOevovri ; XXIII. Yllev Srj, cb dvSpes' a pev eyco eyptf^ Conciu- av airoXoyeicrvai, a\eoov eari ravra Kai aXXa lacos 20 reason for r 3/ e ~ 3 f 3 not en- c TOiavra. raya o av ti? vpcov ayavaKTrjcretev ava- treating /j\r ^»e\ \ >^ / .\. ~ the mercy /nvrjaaeis eavrov, ei o pcev Kai eXarrco tovtovl tov fthe dycovop dycova dycovL^ofievos' ederjOrj re koll iKerevae tov9 SiKacrras fierd woXXoov SaKpvcov, Traidta re avrov dva/3il3ao~apLevos, tva o ri paXcara eXer)6eirj, 25 /cat aXXovs rcov OLKeicov Ka\ (filXcov ttoWovs, eyco 8e I. Karaderjdeu] ] The Kara— pijuaros, ecos av eiirtjs.. Note by implies absence of all reserve the way, that the examination or modification : here in a bad of witnesses was extra to the sense it expresses an imprin- time allowed for the pleadings ; cipled act. Dig. 122. cf. Lysias xxiii. 4, 8. pp. 166, 8. eyaj TrapaxcopS) 1 The full 167, Kat H- 01 efi"i/\.a/3e to vdcop. expression occurs J^schin. iii. 26. iya> 8£ apa\ ' And then 165. p. 77? 7rcipax&p 2a>Kparet] VBS tov 2a>Kpar?7, ZH to ScoKpaTrj, both with some MS. authority. The last is worst ; for such an emphatic use of the name Socrates palpably requires the article. And 2. cos av 86gaifxi] Refers to 11. eh pev] Lamprocles KLvhwov, not to eaxaTov — 'dan- (Xen. Mem. II. ii. 1). dvo' ger, as he would think it.' Sophroniscus and Menexenus 5. ovk d£ia> pev yap] yap (Phsedo Il6 b). refers to el — ['I say if,] for 15, elp.lv] 'Whether I can though I do not expect it of look death in the face or not.' you, yet [making the suppo- — Whewell. sition,] if it should be so.' 19. rovvopa] The name of 6. e7neiKTj] 'Conciliatory/ a-ocpos' cf. 20 d, and below, eke 9. 'Oprjpov] OdySS. xix. 163. crocpia eire k.t.A. AnOAOHA 20KPATOY2. 83 p. 35. av0p(07rcov. el ovv v/jlgdv oi 8oKovvTe$ 8ia(j)ep€ip eire ao(j)ta eire av8pela eWe aXXrj tjtlvlovv apery tolovtol ecovraL, cuxrypov av elrj' oiovcnrep eyco ttoWclkls eoopCLKa rivas, brav KplvcovTat, 8oKOvvra$ fxev tl elvai, OavfAaaia 8e epya^ofievovs, a>? 8eivov tl olofievov? 5 ireiaecOai el airoQavovvTai, cocnrep aflavaTcov eoropie- vcov, eav vpels avrovs pnq aTTOKTeivrjTe' oi epoi Sokov- (tlv alcryvviqv rfj 7roXeL TrepiaivTeiv, cogt av Tiva /cat b tcdv ^evcov vTroXaftelv otl oi 8ia 2w/cparet leaves this clear. It is the reading of Oxon. and three other MSS. ; and in accepting it we follow Bernhardy (Syntax, p. 94), who supports it with parallels. See Dig. 183. 2. avbpeiq~] Oxon, here has dv8plq, but is not consistent. Dindorf (on Ar. Nub. 510) says dvdpeia alone is the true form, — as proved (1) by the Ionic diseresis dvdprjtij' (2) by the fact that in poetry it never occurs where the metre would require dvbpla (except in Eur. Here F. 47 5 5 naTr)p errvpyov, peya (fipovcDV eV dv8p[q, which Elmsley has emended evavBpia) ; (3) by the testi- mony of Etym. M. p. 461. 53, that the traditional orthography was dvdpeia till Apollonius invented dvdpia' (4) by the prepon- derating adherence of the MSS. to dvbpda. 13. ovre vpds] VH vpds, BSZ (following 2 MSS.) fjpds. H says " vpds com- modum sensum prsebet ; nee plebem, modo aliquo loco haberi velit, facere, nee si singuli faciant, permittere debere." 3. eo-oj/rni] i If we are to given a different turn to the have such conduct on the part meaning. of those,' &c. ehv would have M 2 84 flAATONOS (pieiade tov tol eXeeiva ravra dpdpara elcrayovros p. 35. kcu KarayeXaarop ttjv ttoXlv ttoiovvtos rj tov rjav- yiav ayovros. XXIV. \c0p\9 Se tt)s do^r)?, co avSpes, ovde sdiKatov fxoi Sok€l elvai SelaOai tov SiKaarov ovSe c deopevov dirocpevyeiv, dXXa diSaaKeLv kcll ireiQeiv. ov yap eiri tovtco KaOiqrai 6 SiKacrTrjs, hri tco Kara- Xapi^ecrOai to. SiKoua, ctAA' eVt tco Kplveiv rama' Kai opcopoKev ov yapielcrOai oi$ av SoKrj avTco, dXXa 1° dtKaaeiv Kara tovs vop.ov$. ovkovv XPV °^ Te VI JL ®'? eOi^etv vpds eiTLopKelv, ovO* vpds eOi^eaOai' ovSe- repoc yap av rjpcov evae/3olev. prj ovv d^tovre pie, co dvdpe? AOrjvaioi, roiavra deiv Trpos vpds irpaTTeiv, a pL7)T€ rjyovpLac KaXa elvai pj)Te dUaia pLrjre baia, l 5aXXco? re pevTOi vrj Ala iravTcos Ka\ acre/Betas (fiev- d yovra v7ro MeXrjrov rovrov'L aa(j)m yap av, el TrelOocpLt vpds K.a\ tco deiaOat ftiafyipxiv opLcopLOfcoras, Oeovs av 8c8daKOt,p,i pcrj rjyelaOac vpds elvai, koli dre\vcos diroXoyovpevos Karrjyopoirjv av epcavrov cos 9. 6/jlo)ixok€v] Part of the hyperbaton. The phrase a\\v Karij-yopovvTcov admit the fievroi vrj Aia (which koI tgdv aTToXoyovixevcov Isocr. is also a familiar sequence, xv. 21. p. 314. Phsedo 65 d, 68 b, 73 d, Rep. Xapie7a$ai] 'That he will 332 a), which could have found favour whomsoever he feels no other convenient place, inclined to favour.' What makes such a tmesis 10. J7/xn?] Defendants in possible, without prejudice to general. perspicuity, is the very fact 11. i3i£ecrdcu] ' Allow your- that aXXccs T€ ncivTcos kcu is a selves to be habituated ;' an sufficiently familiar phrase to instance of the semi-middle admit of this dismemberment sense. Dig. 88. and yet be recognised : Dig. 15. aXAco? — *ai] 'But, by 294. Thus Bekker, in reading- Zeus, especially, when I am on arbitrarily ciXKcos re ttcivtcos vrj my trial at Meletus' instance Ala paXicrra ptevroi kcu, is wide for impiety.' A remarkable of the mark. AHOAOriA 2QKPATOY2. 85 p. 35. 0€ov? ov vopl^co. aAAa ttoXXov Set ovtcds €)(€LV' vo~ jxi^ay re yap, cb avftpes ' AOrjvdioi, 00? ovdeh tcdv kpcbv Karrjyopodv, kgll vpiv eTTiTphrcD koll tcd 6ecp Kpivai 7T€p\ ipov otttj peXXei ipoi re apiara eivcu Kai vpiv. 5 e XXV. To u,lv aij ayavaKrelv* cb dvdpes ' AOr/- B - The Counter- p. 36. VCtloi, €7Ti TOVTCp TCD yeyOVOTL, OTL p,OV KaTexf/rjCJjLaaaOe, assessment aAAa re pot TroXXd £u/x/3aAAera£, koll ovk aviXincTTOv Penalty. poi yeyove to yeyovos tovto, aAAa ttoXv paXXov OavpdtcD eKarepoov tcdv yj/rjcpcov tov yeyovoTa cipiO- 10 pov. ov ydp cpprjv eycoye ovtcd Trap oXiyov ecreadat, aAAa 7rapa ttoXv' vvv 8e, ch$ eoucev, el TpidfcovTa 12. TpLaKovra] So ZH ; rpa?VBS. Of MSS., Oxon. with five others has TpiaKovra- which also approves itself independently. 5. Kai vfxlv'] The defence of Socrates, which would occupy the second division of the pleadings, being thus con- cluded, there would follow here the voting of the judges, and the announcement of their verdict, declaring the charge proven. Then would begin the third division of the pleadings, consisting firstly of a speech on the side of the prosecution in advocacy of the penalty named, and secondly of So- crates' avTiTL/jLTjaris, where the Apology again takes up the thread. Introd. pp. vi, xi, xvii. 8. Kai ovk — tovto~\ The halt- ing connection (grammatically speaking) between this clause and the preceding part of the sentence is idiomatic. The shortest way is taken to arrive at the particular which is the point of the sentence : Dig. 258. It is incorrect to sup- ply, as Stallbaum does, Kai [8j) Kai tovto otl] ovk, fc.r.X. Ra- ther there is a substitution of a shorter form of expression, complete in itself, but not agreeing with the plan on which the sentence set out. 11. ovrio Trap' oklyov] Hyper- batical for nap* ovtcds okiyoV Dig. 298. Lit. 'up to so lit- tle' difference from the other quantity compared : i. e. ' so close.' Dig. 124. 12. Tpi&KovTa] The number of condemning votes was 281, out of a court of 501 : so 30 in round numbers, or 31 ex- actly, changing sides, would have effected an acquittal. See, for the fuller discussion of this point, Introd. p. iv. 86 IIAAT0NQ2 a. Proposal on the footing of full justice, — ironical. {xovai ixereireaov tcdv yf/rjcjycov, (X7ro7re(j)evyrj av. Me'- p. 36. Arjrov pep ovp, &>y epol Sokcd, kcu pvp d7T07re(f)evya } kcu ov popop diroirecpevya, dXXa ttclpti StjXop tovto ye, otl, el par) dpe'/Brj "Apvto? kcu Avkcop KctTrjyopr)- ScrovTe? epov, kolp cbcpXe xiXla? Spa^pd^ ov fxeraXa- b ficop to irepiTTOP pepos tcop yfsrjcpow. XXVI. Ti^tarat S* ovp pot 6 dvrjp Oavdrov. elev eyco 8e 8rj tipo? vplp dpTLTipr)aopcu, co dpdpes 1 AOtjpcuol ; r) StjXop on tyjs d^las ; ti ovv ; ti dfyos I0 elpt iraOelv r) diroTlaai, o ti paOcop ev tco /3/gp ov^ rjav^lav rjyop, dXX* dpeXrjcras (bvirep 01 7roXXoi, XprjpaTLO-pov re kcu olKOPoptlas kcu aTpaTrjyccop kcu ($7i/jLr)yopLCQi> kcu tcop dXXcop dp^cop kcu ijvpcopocncop The implication in povai that the majority was small would recommend the corruption of TpiaKovra into rpels. In Andoc. iii. 4. p. 23, nevTrjKovra is a necessary emendation for irevre. Cf. Taylor, Lectt. Lys. cap. vi. 2. aivoTr€(pevya\ Half in jest, in allusion to his accusers being three to one, Socrates represents the majority as obtained by the joint influence of the three : supposing then each accuser represented by one-third of the majority, Me- letus gets less than 100, i. e. less than one-fifth of the whole. The indictment stood in Me- letus' name, but the really formidable accuser was Any- tus : see again Introd. p. ii. 6. to Tre/xnTou /*.] Not ' a fifth,' but ' the ' indispensable < fifth/ IO. Tradeiv rj dwoTlo-ai] A tech- nical legal expression ; cnroTlo-ai applies to a pecuniary penalty, naOelv to death, imprisonment, or the like. So Dem. Mid. 47. p. 5 2 9> ° T0V av Karayva r) r)\iaia> Tipdrw irepi avrov 7rapaxpr}p,a, otov av doKrj agios elvai TraOeiv r) a.7ro- rivai (part of the vop,os vfipeas), in Timocrat. 105. p. 733. o ti pa6a>v] i For having taken it into my head, in the disposal of my life, to deny myself rest.' iv is not ' during.' 13. aXXcoi/] Here is the idio- matic use of (iXKos for 'be- sides :' Dig. 46. aX\p.oo-iS>v~\ These associa- tions were as rife at Athens under the Thirty as in the Peloponnesian war. AFIOAOriA 20KPATOY2. 87 p. 36. kcu cTTciaecov tcov ev rfj woXei ytyvopevcov, yyycrct- c fxevos ifiavTov rro ovri ermeiKecTTepov elvcu y coare eh tglvt iovra (Tco^ecrOai, evravOa pev ovk yet, ol eXOcov fjLTjre vplv /uLrjre epctvTco epeXXov p,yoev bcpeXo? elvcu, eiri Se to iSla eKetcjTov Icov evepyerelv Tyv$ peyicrTyv evepyeaiav, cb? iyco (f)ypu, evTctvOct yet, e7n\eLpeov eKctcrTOv vpcov TreiOetv py irporepov pyre tcov eetvrov pbydevo? eTripLeXelcrOcti, irplv iavrov eiri- peXrjOely, ottcos cos (3eXTLcrTO? kcu (ppovLpeoTctTOs ecrotTO, purjTe reov rrj? TroXeco?, irp\v avTrj? rrjs 7ro-io Xecos, tcov re ctXXcov ovtco KctTct tov clvtov rpoirov d eiripeXelcrQac ri ovv elpu dittos iraOelv touovtos cov ; ctyaOov tl, co ctvdpe? ' ' KOyvcuoi, el Set ye Kara ttjv atjlctv rfj akqOeia TipacrOcti' kcu ravrct ye ctyaOov tolovtov, o tl ctv TTpeiroL epol. tl ovv irpeireL ctvhpi 1 5 irevryri evepyery, Seopcevco ctyeiv a\oXyv eiri ry vp.e- repct TrapctKeXevcrei ; ovk ecrO b tl paXXov, co ctvdpe? ■ A0y vcuol, Trpeirei ovtcos, cos tov tolovtov ctvSpa ev irpvTctveicp atrelaOai^ iroXv ye paXXov y el tl$ vptcov lirncp y ^vvcopidt y {evyei veviKyKev 'OXvpnrLaaiv. 10 5. eVi be evepyeaiav ] This XX. 1 9. p. 1 59. Add Dem. F. clause is repeated in the word L. 330. p. 446, tl be ; boirjr evravOa, and governed by r t a' av ev Trpvravelco crirrjenv rj aXkrjv and the Icov with evepyereiv is a riva bcopedv, als npare rovs ev- redundancy. (At the same epyeras \ time probably another clause 17. paXkov TTpenei ovrcos cos] is confusing itself with this in This is the form of comparison the speaker's mind, to which with cos, complicated by the Icov would be essential, namely, redundant insertion of ovrcos. ol be Ibia eKacrrov epeXkov Icov Dig- 1 64. evepyereiv, i.e. 01 Se Icov epekkov 2 0. £evyei\ Here this word Idia eKacrrov evepy.) plainly stands for three or 14. ripaadai] t That I should four horses. Hesychius in voc. lay the penalty.' says kcu eVt rpicov Kai recrcrdpeov 16. cvepyerrj] Stallbaum cites eracrcrov. Xen. de Vectig. iii. n, Lys. 88 riAATONOS o p,ev yap vpds irocel evSalpova? SoKelv \elvai\, eyco p. 36. de elvar /cat 6 ptev rpo(j)rj? ovdev delrai, eyco de e Seopai. el ovv dec pe Kara to dlftaiov tyjs a^ta? rt-p. 37. pacrOai, tovtov Ttpcopai, ev irpvTaveico aiTrjcreoo?. b. Com- 5 XXVII. "Icra)? ovv vuiv /cat tolvtL keycov wapa- promise, — ' ' ' ironical TrkrjcricQs 8okg> keyetv cocnrep irep\ tov oiktov /cat tyjs also, avTifio\rjcreG)S) diravOaditppevos' to de ovk ecrTiv, do AOrjvaioi, tolovtov, dkkd TOtovSe pakkov. Treireicrpai eyco encov elvat prjdeva ddiKelv dvOpcowcov, akka vpds iotovto ov irelOco' oklyov yap yjpovov akkr)kois hiei- keypeOa" eirei, cos eyeppai, el rjv vplv vopos, cocnrep Ka\ akkois dvOpcoirois, irep\ Oavarov prj piav rjpe'pav b povov Kplveiv, akka irokkds, eireLcrOrjTe dv vvv 8 ov paSiov ev XP 0l,( P oklyco peyakas diafloka? dwokv- i$ecr6ai. TreireLcrpevos drj eyco prjdeva ddtKelv nokkov de'co eptavTov ye ddiKYjaetv /cat /car epavrov epeiv av- tos, to? agios' elfil tov /ca/cou /cat TipLrjcrecrOai tolovtov twos epiavTcp, tl delaa? ; r\ prj iraOco tovto, oij MekrjTOs piOL TipaTai, o (prjpt ovk elde'vat ovt el 20 dyaOov ovt el KaKov Icttlv ; clvti tovtov drj kkoopai cov ev old* otl KaKoov ovt cov, tovtov TLprjarapevos ; iroTepov Secrpiov ; /cat tl p.e del £rjv ev Sea pcoTrj pica, c SovkevovTa Trj aet KaQicrTapeviQ dpxfji T °w evdeKa ; akka xprjpaTcov, /cat dedeaOaL ecos av Iktictco ; aAAa 12. aXKois dv0pQ>7rois] The finite instead of a participial Lacedaemonians, for instance. construction : Dig. 279. See Thucyd. i. 132. 23. rols evdem] eis- d(j) y ticdcr- 2 1. el ovtcos aXoyiaros elpi, (Dare pur] SvvaaOai Xoyl^eaOai, otl vpels pcev bvres 5 TroXfrai jxov ov)( olol re iyeveaOe iveyKeiv rag ipas d dLarpcfia? Kal tovs Xoyovs, d\X' vplv fiapvTepat ye- yovacri Kal e7TL(j)0opcoT€pai, coare ^qretre avTtov vvvl airaXXayrjvaf aXXoi Se apa auras olaovat padloos. 7roXXov ye del, d> ' AOrjvaioi. KaXos ovv av poL 6 /3los*o eirj e^eXQovTL TrjXiKcode dvOpcoTrcp aXXrjv e£ clXXtjs ttoXlv 7r6Xecos dpL€L/3opLevcp Kal i^eXavvopevco £fjv. ed yap old' otl, ottol av eXOco, XeyovTOs ipov aKpod- crovTai oi veoi coairep evOdSe' kolv pev tovtovs dire- Xavvco, ovtol ipe avTol i^eXcoai, TrelOovTes tovs 15 e 7rpeo~l3vTepov9' iav Se parj aTreXavvco, oi tovtcov ira- re'pes re Ka\ olKeloi 81 avTovs tovtovs. XXVIII. "laws ovv av tls earotf crtycov 8e Kal ijavylav dycov, co EcoKpaTes, ov)( oios T ecrei rjplv e^eXOcov {rjv ; tovtl 8rj iaTi TrdvTcov yaXeTrcoTorov 20 irelaai TLvas vpcov. iav re yap Xeyco otl tcd 6eco aTreiOelv tout earl Kal $La tovt ddwarov 7]orv)(tav p. 38. ayeiv, ov ireicrecrOe pLOL a>s elpcovevoptevcp' iav r av Xeyco otl Kal rvy\aveL pteyLaTOv dyaOov bv dvOpcoirco tovto, eKaaTrjs rjpepas irepl dpeTrjs tovs Xoyovs ttol - 25 eicrOaL Kal toov dXXcov, irepi (bv vpcels ipov aKOvere 20. rovrt] Cf. textual note on Tavrrjo-i, 22 e. 2. fiXka 8rj] Introduces the n. i£ik66vTi~\ e If I quit the last of a series of suppositions. city :' as below e, igeXQcov £fjv. Dig. 142. 20. tovti] Namely, on ovx 9. aXXoi 5e apa] Ironical. otos re ea-ofxai. N 90 nAATONOS diaXeyofxevov kcu i^xavTov Kai aAXovs i^erdtpvTO?, 6 p. 38. 8e ave^eracTTOs filo? ov fitcoro? avOpcoTrco, Tavra 8* 1 . 6 dve^eTaaros — av&pu>7T(o ] The interrogatory discipline which Socrates thus extols was that to which he sought to bring all with whom he conversed. The subject, about which the answerer was questioned, was himself: which is the rea- son why Socrates always iden- tified the process with the carrying out of the Delphic precept, TvwBi veavTov. The branches of enquiry to which it led were manifold : — (1) knowledge of one's own natural endowments and posi- tion, with a view to living for the greatest good of oneself and Others : — 6 eavTov eVicrKe- yj/dpevos oirvlos t'is £o~ti irpbs ttjv avdpcoTrivrju XP €ICLV k.t.X. Xen. Mem. IV. ii. 25 : (2) review of the actual use to which one has been and is putting one's life — Laches 187 e, 8i86vai nepl avrov Xoyov, ovTiva rponov vvv re £r} Kai ovriva t6v napeXrjXvBoTa \povov fiefticoKev' and below 39 C, dibovai eXeyxov rov (3lov' (3) examination of one's opinions, — their coherence, their consistency, the history of their formation ; of which the results are — consciousness of one's own ignorance, and consciousness of the grounds of one's knowledge : Xen. Mem. III. ix. 6, Soph. 230 b — d : (4) investigation of the prin- ciples of human life and action (for which the knowledge of one's own nature is a pre- requisite : Ale. I. 133 C, ap ovv pr\ yiyvdxTKOvres rjpas avrovs . . . bvvaipeO* dv elbcvat rd. fjperepa avrav kuko. re Kai dyaBd j) — Xen. Mem. I. i. 1 6, 7repl tcov dvBpw- 7reia)v del diekeyero o~kottS>v ti evo-eftes, ri d(re(3es, ti KaXov, t'i alaxpov, ri biicaiov, ti abiKov, ti acocppocrvvT], ri pavia, t'i dvbpeia, t'i deiXia, t'i ttoXis, t'i ttoXitikos, ri dpxr] dvdpd)7r<0v, ri dpxi7raiV, Kai 7rcpi to>v tiXXoov, a tovs pev ddoras fjyelro KaXovs KayaBovs elvai, tovs §' dyvoovvTas dvdpanodeodeis dv biKaicos kckXt}- a-Oai' and here (just above) Tvyxdvei piyioTov dyaBbv ov dv- 6pa>7T(o TovrOy iii>, rd piyia-Ta aKaBaprov ovTa, diraibevTov tc ko.1 alo-xpbv k.t.X., Hip. Ma. 304 e, to koXov dyvocov' Kai Snore ovtco biaKeiaai, o'lei croi MIOAOriA 2QKPATOY2. 91 p. 38. en rjTTOp TreiaecrOe /jlol XeyovTt. ra 8e e^e* jmev ovtco?, co? eyco (prj/JLi, co dv8pes, iruQeiv 8e ov pa8tov. kou eyco dp! ouk eWior/jLca ipavTOV d^iovv kclkov ov- 8evo?. el jilv yap rjv /mot ^P'll JLaTa i c.Tipxjcrdpr]v b av xprjixaroov oora epieXXov tKTicreiv' ov8ev yap av 5 efiXafirjV vvv 8e ov yap ecrTiv, d prj dpa ocrov av iyco Svvaiprjv iKTiaai, toctovtov fiovXecrOe /ulol rifir}- crai. tcrcos 8* av SvvalpLrjv eKTccrat v/uv pvav dp" yvplov toctovtov ovv TLfXcopai. YIAcltoov 8e o8e 9 CD avSpes" ' AOrjvaloL, koll KpiTcov kol KpiTofSovXos Kal 10 ' A7ToXXo8copO? KeXeVOVCTL fJL€ TpiaKOVTa pLVCDV TLpLTJ- aacrOai, avTo\ 8* iyyvdcrOaC TificopLat ovv toctovtov, c lyyvryrcu 8* vjuuv ecrovTat, tov dpyvpiov ovtol d£io- XP €C P- KpeiTTOV eivat £fjv paWov t) re6vd- vai ; and in the passage be- fore us. And was there not a cause 1 The current opinions, drawn from men's practical exigen- cies, imperfect observation, and debased morality, were no sounder than their sources. It was abhorrence of this mass of error and conventionality (which meanwhile the Sophists were accepting as the material of their system), which impelled Socrates to seek to reconstruct human opinion on a basis of ' reasoned truth.' 3. koi iya> afi] A supple- mentary reason; — 'Were si- lence possible, it would-be no less a kcikov' which therefore I should decline imposing on myself.' 6. vvv be ov yap] This com- bination of particles occurs always in setting aside a hy- pothetical case which is the opposite of the existing state of the case. The 8i and the yap enter simultaneously into the combination, where there is no ellipse nor aposiopesis. Dig. 149. 12. iyyvaa-Qai] Governed by an equivalent of 'they say' contained in KeXevovai. Cf. Symp. 213 a, ndvras ovv . . . KeXeveiv elaievai ko\ KaraKAiWo-- 6ai, koi tov 'Aya#ooi>a KaXetv av- tov. Dig. 245. 13. dgioxpey.] The third and last division of the pleadings being thus concluded, there would follow first the final voting and then the final ver- dict of the judges : by which the formal trial would be con- cluded. After this, however, some * last words' are still conceded to Socrates, who continues to address those of his judges N 3 92 IMATQNOS C. Last reflections, addressed to the judges : a. to those who had voted for his con- demnation XXIX. Ov 7roXXov y ev€Ka \p6vov, cb av8pe$ p. 38, 1 A07]vouol, ovofia e£ere Kal air lav viro tg>v /3ouAo~ jievoov rr]v itoXiv Xoi8opelv, a>? ^coKparrj dnreKTovaTe^ dv8pa (ro(j)6i>' (j)r)crov(TL yap 8rj fxe orotyov elvat, el 5 kcu jjirj el/ml, ol ffovXofievoi v\uv bvei8l^eiv, el ovv Tvepieixeivare bXiyov yjpbvov, airo tov avrojJLarov av v/juv tovto eyevero* opare yap 8r) tt\v rjXcKiav, ore 7roppco r)8r) earl tov f3lov, Oavarov 8e eyyvs. Xeyco 8e tovto ov irpos TravTas vpLas, dXXa Trpos tovs e/xov d 10 KaTa\j/7](pLo-afxeifOV9 OavaTOv. Xe'yco 8e Kal To8e irpog tovs avTovs tovtov?. \o~co? /jl€ oleaOe, d> dv8pe?, airopla Xoycov eaXcoKevai tolovtcov, oh av vpLoi? erreiaa, el copLrjv 8elv diravTa iroielv Kal Xeyeiv, wgte airofyvyeiv Ti]v Slkt/v. 7roXXov ye £e?. aAA* airopia 15 pcev idXcoKa, ov p.evTOi Xoycov, aXXa toX/at]? koI avai- o-yyvTias Kal tov eOeXeiv Xeyeiv irpo9 v/jlols 1 ToiavTa, oV av vpuv 7]8lctt rjv aKoveiv^ OprjvovvTOs re fxov Kal 68vpop.evov Kal aXXa ttolovvtos koI XeyovTOS iroXXa e Kal avd^ia e/xot), cos* eyco (prj/ju' 61a 8r] Kal elOicrOe iovp.el$ Ttov dXXcov aKOveiv* ctAA' ome tot€ cprjOrjv who choose to remain and hear him. Whether such a concession was actually made to Socrates, or whether it was only a suf- ficiently common practice to give verisimilitude to the fic- tion, is a question which can hardly be determined. See Introd. p. vii. I. ov 7roXKov y eveKa xp^ vov \ Socrates is telling the Athe- nians that they would not have had to wait long to be saved the reproach of putting him to death, by letting nature take her own course. ' It was but a brief space after all, by fore- stalling which they were en- tailing on themselves the re- proach.' eveica marks here the efficient not the final cause ; the meaning is not 'you will incur reproach for the sake of taking from me a brief re- mainder of life,' — but ' a brief space will be the cause of your incurring it.' The 'brief space,' accordingly, is not that between the present moment and his execution, but that be- tween his execution and the moment when he would have died in the course of "nature. AIIOAOriA 2QKPATOY2. 93 p. 38. Selv eveKa tov klvSvvov irpa^ai ovdev dveXevOepov, ovre vvv fJLOi peTapeXeL ovtcos diroXoyrjcrapevcp, dXXa woXv fxaXXov aipodfiai code a7roXoyr)crapLevo? reOvavai 7] eKelvco? £fjv* ovre yap iv Slkyj ovt Iv noXepLco ovt p. 39. e/xe ovt aXXov ovdeva del tovto pLrjyavdcrOaL, ottcos 5 diro(j)€v^€TaL ttolv ttolcov Qdvarov. koll ydp kv rah lia^ais 7ToXXolkl9 Sr]Xov ylyveTcu ore to ye diroOaveLV av tls €K(j)vyoL koll owXa cupels koll i(f) iK€T€iav Tpa- 7TOJJL6P09 TCOV SlCOKOVTCOV KOLL CcXXdl fJLT))(ai>GU TToXXctL elcnv iv i/cdo-Tot? toIs klvSvvol?, &ctt€ SLacpevyeiv 10 OavaTov, iav tls ToXpa izav tvolClv koll XeyeLv. dXXa jjlt] ov tovt fj ■xaXeTTov, co avSpes, Oolvoltov iKCpvyelv, dXXd ttoXv ^aXeircoTepov Trovr\piav % Oolttov yap Qa- b vaTOv Oel. Ka\ vvv iyco jxev are ftpadvs cov koll TrpecrfivT'qs v7ro tov /3pa8vT€pov idXcov, ol 8* ipo\ 15 KarrjyopoL are StLvo). koll Opels' ovtzs vtto tov Qdr- tovos, Trjs /ca/c/as 1 . koll vvv iyco p.ev aTrtLfXL v(j) v/icov OavaTOv Slktjv 6v KaKu>v iar\v 12. [*rj . . . 77] An instance of 77 dbiKia ra clSikovpti. Between the presumptive variety of the danger and death there is many deliberative conjunctive. It a chance of escape, as Socrates is confined to negative sen- has just before said ; but none tences. Dig. 59 note. between the evil deed and its 13. Bclttov yap 6. Bel] This internal consequences. Stallb.'s refers to the reflex effect of quotation of Odyss. viii. 329$ wickedness on the evildoer's ovk dpera kokcl epya' Kiyavei tol soul, which it degrades and /3pa§us ojkvv is not to the point, ruins. Cf. Crito 47 e, d\\d 18. vtt6 — axp\r)KOTes] ' Sen- der iiceivov (sc. the soul) apa tenced by Truth to receive the rjutv picoTov hiecpdapp.evov, a> to penalty of.' — Whewell. 94 nAATONOS w^XrjKOTes 1 po\6y]piav kolL aSiKiav. kgu iyco re tcq p. 39. Tiprjpart e/uL/xevco kou ovtol. ravra piv 7rov \ KaTa\f/r](f)La-dp,€POL jjlov kcu yap el/uu c r/8r] ivravfla, Iv re . . . kcu ovtoi\ ' I illud est Calani, de quo ante as well as they.' eyo> has the dixi, et Homerici Hectoris qui stress, and stands (in accord- moriens propinquam Achilli ance with Greek arrangement) mortem denuntiat. So Shak- first for that reason. Dig. 307. speare, Rich. II. Act II. Sc. i. 6. iv © — xPWH-ydovo-iv] The (Gaunt) " Methinks, I am a opinion, which connects pro- prophet new inspir'd ; And phetic enlightenment with the thus, expiring, do foretell of approach of death, has main- him." And Sir H. Davy (" Re- tained its hold upon mankind mains," p. 311) speaks of him- in all ages. Patroclus foretells self as " looking into futurity Hector's death, II. xvi. 851, with the prophetic aspirations and Hector the death of Achil- belonging to the last moments les, II. xxii. 358 : instances to of existence" — in a letter dated which classical writers often just two months before his appeal ; thus Xen. Apol. 30, death. dvedrjKe pep kcu "Ofirjpos ecrriv ois 9. olav~\ Sc. ripotplav. A vir- tS)v iv KaraXvcret rov filov npo- tual cognate accusative after yiyvaxTKeiv ra peWovra, fiovkopcu aTreKTovare. Dig. I. be kcu eyo> ^p^cr/LuaS^o-ai n, Cic. II. dibovcu i'Xeyxov] Namely, De Div. I. 30, Facilius evenit under the process of egeracris' appropinquante morte ut animi cf. 38 a note, and esp. Laches futura augurentur ; ex quo et 187 e there quoted. AnOAOHA 2QKPATOY2. 95 P- 39- vpuv ttoXv ivavTLOV diro^rjaera^ cos iyco (f)r}pi. rrXei- d OV9 kcrovrai vpas ol iXey^oure^ ovs vvv eyco KaTeiypv, V/J.6L? Se ovk r)a6dvea6e' kou )(aXe7rcoT€poL eaoprac oaco vecoTepol elcri, kou vfxeis paXXov dyavaKTrjaeTe. tl yap oieaOe diroKTeivovTes dvOpcoirovs kivLCTyr\o'eLv 5 tov ovetdi^ELV Tiva vpuv otl ovk bpOm ^rjre, ovk op- 6 cos StavoelaOe' ov yap eaO* avrrj r) a7raXXayrj ovre iravv SvvaTrj ovre KaXr), aXX' eKelvrj kou KaXXlarrj Koi paarr), p.rj tovs dXXovs koXovelv, dXX eavTov irapaaKevd^etv oircos ecrrac cos $£Xtlcttos. ravra 10 piv ovv vpuv toIs KaTa^rrjfyicraiiivoLS pLavTevadptevos e airaXXaTTopLai. XXXI. To?? Se a7roylrr)(bicrapL€vois rjSeco? dv Sia- b. to those Xe\6eir)v virep tov yeyovoros tovtovL irpayp.aTos, ev voted for co ol ap\ovTes dcr^oXiav ay ova 1 Ka\ ovirco epxopiac 15 quittai, ol iXOovra fie Set reOvavai. dXXa pcoi, co avdpes, irapapeivaTe toctovtov yjpovov ovdev ydp KcoXvec p. 40. hiapvOoXoyrjo-ai irpbs dXXrjXovs, ecos e^ecrTLV. ifuu ydp cos* (j)lXoi? ovctlv hrthd^ai iOeXco to vvvl pioi £vpL$efir}Kos tl 7tot€ vo€i. epiol yap, co dvdpes StKa- 20 crTai — vptas yap diKacrTas KaXcov opOcos av KaXoirjv — Oavpidcriov tl yeyovev. r) yap elcoOvla pLOL ptav- tlkt) r) tov SaipLOvlov iv pev tco irpocrOev \povcp iravTL iravv ttvkvt) del r)v kou iravv iiri crpiKpols evavTiov- pLevrj, el tl peXXoipLL pir) opOcos irpdtjeLV' vvvl 8ei5 15. ol apxovres] That is, ol 22. rj elcoOvla] ' The direction evdeica. I am wont to receive from the 20. diKaarai] Steinhart re- divine voice/ See App. A, on marks that up to this point, to dmpoviov. where first the true and false 24. iravv eVt o-piKpoU] eVi sepa- judges are separated, the form rates ndw from apifcpoZs, to of the address used has been which it belongs : Dig. 298. & avbpes 'AOrjvaiot, 96 I1AAT0N02 $zVfX0€fii]K€ fxoi, Strep 6 pare kcll avrol, tolvtl a ye 8r) p. 40. olrjOeurj av tls kcll vopLt^erat ea\ara kolkcdv eivcu. ifidi 8e ovre e^iovri ecoOev oiKoOev rjvavTLOiOr] to tov b Oeov crr/pLelov, ovre rjvLKa avefiaivov evravOoi eiri to 5 SiKacTTrjpioir, ovt ev tco Xoyco ovdafjiov fxeXXovTL TL epelv kclitol ev oXXqls XoyoLs TroXXa\ov 8rj fie ewecr^e XeyovTa jmeTa^v' vvvl Se ov8afiov irepl Tav- ttjv ttjv Trpa^Lv ovt ev epyco ov8evi ovt ev Xoyco rjvavTLcoTai pot. tl ovv c&tiov elvcu viroXapi^avco ; ioeyeo vpuv epco' Ktv8vvevet yap /jlol to ^vpLfiefirjKos tovto dyaOov yeyovevai, kou ovk ecrO' ottcds r/fxei? opOco? v7roXap,f3avofJLev, bcroi olofieOa kglkov elvai to c TeOvavat. fxeya jjlol TeKfirjpiov tovtov ye'yovev* ov yap ecrO bircas ovk rjvavTtcoOr/ av jjlol to elcoOos 15 cry jneiov, el ptrj tl epceXXov eyco dyaOov wpd^eLV. XXXII. 'Kvvorjcrcop.ev 8e Kal TjjSe, a>9 woXXr) eXm? eaTLv dyaOov avTO elvai. 8volv yap OaTepov ecFTL to TeOvavaC rj yap olov /nrjdev eivaL firj8 % a\crOrj- ctlv /jLT)8ejjLLav ixr)8evos e^eLv tov TeOvecoTa, rj Kara roc 20 Xeyofxeva p.eTaf3oXrj tls TvyyaveL ovaa Kal fieToUrjcrL? 5. fieXKovri tl] This accurately represents the reading of Oxon., which stands fieKXovri (tl being prima manu), importing that n should follow }xk\\ovTi. Gaisford here is inexact in his repre- sentation. 7. TavTr)v\ So VBH ; avrrjv SZ. It is impossible to find a clear meaning for avTrjv, which is the reading of Oxon. and five other MSS. Cf. Phsedo 60 a, where Oxon. (alone) has ravTtjv for avrrjv. 4. ivravBoi an to due.] An 1 8. olow] l As it were.' Pa- emphasised equivalent of iiii renthetical to the construction. ToSe to 8lk. Cf. Legg. 679 d, The words which it qualifies Kara tt6\iv yiovov ovtov, equi- are firjbev elvai. (The subject Valent to kot avTrjv fiovov Tr)v of firjbev elvai is tov Tedveeora^. nokiv, Thucyd. vii. 1 6, tS>v ovtov Dig. 16. Cf. below, olov vnvos, (Kel dvo irpoeikovTo, viii. 28, Ka\ and again e, olov dnobrjurjo-ai. is tt)v MlXtjtov avTov ^ikinnov 1 9. to. \ey6fieva~] In the popu- KaBio-Tao-i. lar religious teaching. AIIOAOriA 20KPATOY2. 97 p. 40. rfj "^v\fj tov tottov tov evOevSe els aXXov tottov. d /cat el ye pr]8epia alaOyals ianis, aAA' olov vttvos, eireihav tls KaOevBcov prjd' ovap prjSev 6pa, 6avp.a- ijiov Kephos av elr) 6 Odvaros. eyco yap av olpai, et TLva eitXe^dpevov deoc ravTrjv tyjv vvktol, ev y ovtcob KGLTedapOev, coare pr)8* ovap Ideiv, koX ray aAAa? vvKTas re /cat rjpepas Tas tov /3/ou tov eavTov avrt- napaOevTa raurrj rfj vvktl Seot aKe\)/dpevov ehrelv 3 irocras afieivov /cat rjdiov rjpepas /cat vvKTas Tavrrjs ttjs vvktos /3e(3icoKev ev too iavrov (Slgo, olpac av prj 10 e otl idicoTrjv rivd, dXXa tov peyav f3aaiXea evapcOpLrj- tovs dv evpelv avrov ravras irpos Tas dXXas rjpepas Ka\ vvKTas. el ovv tolovtov 6 Oavaros eari, KepSos eycoye Xeyco' /cat yap ovdev TrXetcov 6 ttols \povos (fiaiverai ovtco 8r) elvai r\ ptla vv£. el 5' av olov aTTodrjprjoraLi^ ecrTiv 6 Odvaro? evOevhe els aXXov tottov, /cat dXrjOrj eaTL ra Xeyopeva, 00s dpa e'/cet elalv diravTes 01 TeO- vecoTes, tl pel^pv ayaOov tovtov eirj av, co avSpes p. 41. diKaaTal ; el yap tls d(pLKopevos els'AiSov, diraX- Xayels tovtcov tu>v (paaKOVToov difcaaTcov elvai, evprj- 20 crei tovs cos dXrjOoos ^t/caora?, o'nrep /cat Xeyovrat e'/cet diKa^etv, Mivcos re /cat 'PaddpavOvs /cat AlaKOs 21. cos] So VBS ; ZH omit. Oxon. has it above the line but in first hand. The cos is constantly added where it is a popular appellation of which the propriety is recognised, and is frequently found after the article, as Phdr. 256 b, tcov cos akrjdcos'OXviJLmaKcbv, Rep. 345 e, tovs cos dXrjdcos ap^ovTas, &C, &C. 1. 77/ yjrvxjj] An intensified 22. Mivcos re — a'XXot] These form of the dative of reference, nouns are in the nominative equivalent nearly to a genitive : by attraction to the interposed Dig. 28. relative clause, as the nearest 12. civt6v~] A resumption of construction: Dig. 192. 18icott}v Tiva and @aaikea, after Nowhere else does Triptole- the intervention of evapidfj.. av mus occur as judge of the evpelv. dead (though in Horn. Hymn. O 98 nAATONOS KOLL TpLTTToXejuLO? KOU GtAAoi OCTOL TCOV TjfllOeoOV SlKCUOL p. \ eyevovro ev rep eavrcov fiioo, dpa (j)av\7j av e\rj rj a7ro8r)/jua ; rj av 'Qpcfiel ^vyyeveaOaL kou Movaalcp KOLl HcTLoScp KOLL '^OjXTjpCp ItTL TTOCTCp OLV TL$ Se^OlLT OLV 5 v/ulcov ; iyco pcev yap ttoXXolkls iOeXco reOvdvaL, el ravr ecrrlv dArjOrj' eirei epLOLye koll avrcp Oav/naarr] av eiy f) $LarpL$r} avroOi, birore evrv^OLpL YlaAa/JLrjSeL b Kal KlavTL rep TeAajxcovo? Ka\ el rt? aAAoy rcov TraAaLcov Blol KplcrLv ol8lkov reOvrjKev, dvruirapaftaX- Demet. 153 he sits in judgment on earth). Also Plato is the only Greek who styles iEacus judge of the dead, here and Gorg. 523 e ; though many Eo- mans mention him thus. But the same principle accounts for the ascription of such a sub- terranean preeminence to these two, and to the remaining two more widely recognised judi- cial personages named here. All four were connected with the secret rites, or mysteries, of their native places ; Minos with the Cretan mysteries, which through the Orphic in- fluence were widely known. Ehadamanthus, his assessor, is his countryman. iEacus was the hero of iEgina, where there were (Pausan. II. 30, Origen adv. Cels. vi. 290. c. 22, Lu- cian, ISTavig. 15) mysteries of Orphic origin. And Triptole- mus was connected, of course, with Eleusis. These judges are an instance of the fact that certain features of the Greek mythology were first the pro- duct of the mystery-worship, and thence made their way into the popular mind. — Dbl- linger, Gent, and Jew, Vol I. Bk. iii. p. 175. The same ac- count may be assumed to hold of the aXkoi rcov r]ixidea>v } who are subjoined to these four ; for very many places had mystery -rites. Ehadamanthus is mentioned in Homer, (Od. vii. 323), and therefore ante- cedently to mysteries, as a judge, but on earth and not in the nether world. 6. epoiye Kai avrcp] I. e. 'I should have a pleasure pecu- liarly my own.' 7. Starpt/3r;] Of. Euthyphro sub init., Legg. I. 625 a. Snore — redvrjicev] This depends upon dvri7rapa(3dXkovri. The whole sentence Snore — cirjdes e'irj is a re-statement more at length of Bavpacrrrj av elrj f) biarpifir), which it follows asyndetically, — an instance of Binary Struc- ture : Dig. 207. 9. dvrnrapafidWovri,] Socrates' comparison of himself with Palamedes recalls the fable of the representation of the Pa- lamedes of Euripides soon after Socrates' death, when, at the words eKavere eKavere rbv ndv- aocpov, co Aavaoi, rav ovbev dX- yvvovaav drjbova Movcrdv, rcov iWdveov rav cipiaTov, the whole AnOAOriA 2QKPATOY2. 99 p. 41. Xovti tcl efxavrov ttolOt] irpos ra iKeivcov, &>$ eyco oi/JLCti, ovk av drjSeg eirj. kou Stj to peyicrTOV, tovs €K€t i^erdtpvTa Kal epevvcovTa cooirep tovs evTavOa Siayeiv, rls avTcov cro(f)os eo~Ti kcu tis oUrai pev, v 5? v i \ 1 <\> 3/ 9 v £, o, / eCTTl O OV. €7TL ITOCTCp O CLV Tl?, CO OLVOptS OLKCKTTOU, 5 Se^curo e^eracrai tov hit Tpoiav ciyovra tyjv 7roXXrjv c urpaTtav rj 'Odvcr erect rj ^io~vv"\ The wants Minos), 677 c, Qcbpev 8r) ra? ev and hardships of old age. Cf. 7reSta) iroXeis . . . cipdrjv ev r

$€ 8eop,at pivTOi avToov' tov? vieis uov, kireibav rj^-qacoa^ TipooprjcracrOe, eb ai>8p€9, TOLVTa TCIVTOC Xv7TOVVT€?, Cl7T€p kyCO VjULOS kXlJ- wovv, kav vplv Sokgoctlv rj yjpr]paToov 77 aXXov tov jo7rpoT€pov eTTLueXeicrOcu r\ apeTr)?, kou kav SoKcoal tc eivat prjSev ovt€? 9 6vetd[(^eTe auroty, oocnrep kyco vplv, oti ovk eiripeXovvTat cov del, kcu duovrai tl elvcu bvTes ovSevbs aijioi. kcu kav TavTa iroLrJT€ 9 hlkaia Treirov- p. 42. 6009 eyoo kcrouai ixfj vp.cov ai)To? T€ koi 01 vleis. *$aXXa yap rjSr) 00 pa aTnevai, kpdl pev anroOavovpivoo, vulv 8e fiicocropevois' 07roT€pot 8e rjpcov kpyovTai kiri apL€ivov 7rpaypa, adrjXov iravTi irXrjv rj too Oeco. 6. deofiai pevTOt avrav] Edd. pevToi avT&v beopai, and SO all MSS. except Oxon. But which collocation most exactly suggests the emphasis required *? The position of peWoi has often to be referred to a subtle ear. Cf. 31b, kcu el \iivroi n, and Dig. 294. 17. rj\ So edd., rightly. The weight of Oxon. with four other MSS., giving el, is diminished by the itacism. 6eoraroj> is exactly parallel to aXX* rj. a7reXi7re k.t.X. The two particles enter the 3. ov naw] Here, as else- combination coordinately, in- where, ov iravv marks only a troducing the exception to the bare denial: Dig. 139. So- preceding universal negative in crates is satisfied with saying, their own several ways, i:\r\v 1 1 have no sufficient cause to implies ' it is known to none, — be displeased.' His elpcoveia saving that [in contradiction would in no case have suffered to this] it is known to God ;' him to say, ' I am far from r), less harshly, ' it is known being displeased.' to none, or however [only] to 8. TavTa TavTa XvnovvTes] By God.' See Dig. 1 48, and cf. Ar. plying them unweariedly with Nub. 360, ov yap av a'XXw y vn- warning and remonstrance. aKova-aipev . . . iikr)v r) JlpobUco. APPENDIX A. To BaifiovLOV. The word 8alpa>v was used to denote either 6e6s or a spiritual being inferior to Beds. Its distinctive meaning as applied to either class is that it denotes such a being in his dealings with men. From Homer to Plato dalpwv is persistently marked by this mean- ing \ Aaifxovios therefore denotes a connection with divine agency ; and to daifioviov denotes sometimes such an agency, and sometimes the agent itself. So Aristotle (Rhet. II. xxiii. 8), r6 daipoviov ovbev idTiv a\X' rj debs r) 2 Beov epyov, and for this distinction we may com- pare Plato (Phdr. 242 e), el §' eo-riv axmep ovv '4o~ti 0e6s rj ti Oelov 6 "Epcos. When we read in Xenophon (Mem. I. i. 2), 8icTedpv\r)To as (pair) "EooKpdrrjs to daipoviov iavToi crqpa'iveiv' 66ev dr) Kal paXiaTa poi doKOvaiv avTov alTidaaaOai Kaiva baipovia elo~(p€peiv, both senses of the word are exemplified. Socrates meant by t6 baipovwv a divine agency; Meletus wrested this into the sense of a divine being. In the Apology Socrates marks the position as a caricature by the expression imKcopcoBwv, and then gives the interpretation consistent with his own meaning — viz. 8aip.6via irpdypaTa. That Socrates is not speaking of a being is clear from other passages also, as when he Says (Apol. 31 c), oti pot BeTiov ti Kal daipoviov yiyveTai, or (Phdr. 242 b), to daipoviov Te Kal to elcoOos crrjpf'iov yiyveaOai, or (Euthyd. 2*72 e), to eloodos o-qpeiov to daipoviov, or (Theset. 151 a), to yiyvopevov p.01 daipoviov. Nor does Plato, who recognises the common notion 1 In Plat. Symp. 202 d — 203 a, daipwv. this view of Sai/xaiu appears very dis- 2 Whence the phrase of iEschines tinctly, though there, as the doctrine (iii. 117. p. 70) laws 5e Kal daipoviov held is that 0eos avOpumtp ov piyvvrai, rivbs i£a/j.apTdv£iv avrbv irpoayofxivov all /uavTt/d) is the province of the is indeterminate. 102 To baifjioviov. of a personal attendant Saipwv (Legg. 730 a, Tim. 90 a), ever give this name to the phenomenon in question. Even Theages (as Zeller remarks, II. 65. n. 2) gives no personality to to daipoviov. 'H (piovi) r) tov daipoviov (Theag. 128 e) is ambiguous. Plato's use is some- times adjectival (e. g. to daipoviov o-qpelov), and sometimes elliptically substantival. Grammatically, Xenophon confines himself to the latter use only, — still merely in the signification of a divine agency. Zeller notices that the interpretation of Socrates' daipoviov as a being remained peculiar to his accusers (Cicero translating it by divinum quiddam, Divin. I. 54, not by genius), until it was revived by Plutarch, the Neo-Platonists, and the Christian Fathers. What then were the nature and function of this daipoviov o-^peiov 1 Let us first consult Xenophon, in whom the chief passages are these : Mem. I. i. 2—5, dieTedpvXrjTO yap as (pair) 2(0KpaTr)s to daipoviov iaVTco o-qpaiveiv' o6ev 8r) icai pdXicrTa poi doKovcriv avrov aiTido-ao~6ai Kaiva daipovia elcrqbepeiv. 6 de ovdev KaivoTepov elcre(pepe tcov aXXav, oaoi pav- tikt)v vopt£ovres olcuvois Te xP^ VTaL KaL (prjpais Kal avp(S6Xois Kal Ovalais. ovtol re yap vTToXap(3dvovcriv ov tovs opviBas ovde tovs aTravTcoVTas eldevat to. avpcpepovra rols pavTevopevois, dXXd tovs Oeovs did. tovtcov avTa arjpai- veiv, KaKelvos de ovtcos evopi^ev. d\\' ol pev TrXetoroi (paalv vno re to>v opvidcov Kal Ta>v aTTavToovTcou cnvoTpe7V€(rdai Te Kal TrpoTpeTrecrBai' "ScoKpaTrjs de, &o~7rep eyiyveaaKev, ovtcos eXeye' to daipoviov yap e(pr) arrjpaiveiv. Kal noXXo'is tcov f-vvovTtoV 7rporjy6peve to. pev iroielv, to. de pr) Tvoielv, a>$ tov daipoviov npoo-rjpaivovTos. Kal Tols pev ireiBopevois aiV<5 avvecpepe, toIs de pr) TveiBopevois peTepeXe. IV. iii. 12-13, Sot 5', e(prj, Si ScoKpare?, eoUacnv eri (jiiXiKa)Tepov r) aXXois xp?70"#ai [ol Beoi], e'l ye prjde eTrepcoToopevoi vno aov 7rpoo~r]paivovo-i ~EvBvdrjpe, yvoocrt], av pr) avapevrjs ea>s av Tas popepas tcov Becov 'idrjs, aXX' e£apKrj aoi to, epya avTcov opcovTt. aefieaBai Kal Tipav tovs Beovs. IV. viii. I, (pdaKOVTOs avTov to daipoviov eavTco 7rpoar)paiveiv a Te deot Kal a pr) deoi Troielv viro tg>v diKao~TG>v Kareyvcoo-Br} BdvaTOS. IV. viii. 5-6, 'AXXa vr) tov Ata, (pdvai avTov, & 'Epp6yeves y rjdrj pov emxeipovvTos (ppovTiaai Tr)s npos tovs diKaards dnoXoyias ijvavTioiBrj to daipoviov. Kal avTos elirelv, QavpacTTa Xeyeis. tov de, Qavpd£eis, (pdvai, el T6> deep BoKel (SeXTiov elvai epe TeXeVTav tov (3iov fjdr) j IV. viii. IT, evo-efir)s ovtq>s catrre pr)bev avev Tr)s touv 6ea>v yvcaprjs noielv. Symp. viii. 5, TOTe pev to daipoviov rrpo(pao-i£6pevos ov diaXeyei poi Tore 6° aXXov tov eqjiepevos. To haijioviov. 103 To which must be added still from the Memorabilia, I. i. 19, IcoKpaT-qs fj-yelro jravra pev deovs clbevai, rd re Xeyopeva nai npaTTopeva Kai ra aiyfj fiovXevopeva, navraxov be napelvai Kai crrjpaiveiv toIs dvOpoiirois nepl tcov dvQpcoireicov navTcav. Thus we see that Xenophon tells us nothing as to the nature of Socrates' baipoviov, save that it was the instrument through which divine intimations reached him unsolicitedly. He adheres (unless we admit as his the 6eov pot cpcovr) cpaiverai in § 12 of the Xeno- phontean Apology) to the expression o-^paiveiv t6 baipoviov, meaning by this expression (as already said) that to daipoviov is but the instrument, while it is the gods who are the agents, whence in other passages we have as equivalent expressions [Oeol] 7rpoo-rjpaivovo-i (Mem. IV. iii. 12), t<5 deep boKel (ib. viii. 6), decov yvcoprj (ib. 11). Its intimations differ from those obtained by pavTiKr) in being given spontaneously. Socrates is represented as having thought himself singular, as a matter of fact, in possessing this gift. He did not urge others to seek for a similar sign. Although he believed (Mem. I. i. 19) iravra pev Oeovs elbevai .... navTaxov be napelvai Kai crrjpaiveiv rols dv6pco7rois nepl tcov dvOpcoireicov TrdvTcov, he seems either to have directed others to pavTiKr) (Mem. I. i. 6), or the oracle (Cic. de Divin. i. 54), or to have given them the benefit of his own divine intima- tions (Mem. I. i. 4). He however believed that if others had not this gift, it was by their own fault (Mem. IV. iii. 13). What its function was according to Xenophon, we gather from the identification of its province with that of fiavrucrj, which is defined in Mem. I. i. 6—9, dXXct pr)v iiroUi koi rdbe 71756s tovs en-iTijbeiovs' to. pev yap dvayKaia avvefiovXeve Kai irpdrreiv cos evopi£ev apicrr av trpayfir)- vaC nepl be r£>v dbrjXcov otvcos d-rro$r]0-oiTO pavTevaopevovs eirepirev el noi- rjrea' Kai tovs peXXovTas o'ikovs re Kai noXeis KaXeos oiKr)o~eiv pavTiKrjs ecprj npoabelcrdai' tcktovlkov pev yap rj ^aXKevTiKov rj yecopyiKov 77 dvBpcoircov dp^iKov rj tcov toiovtcov epycov e^eracrTiKov rj XoyiCTTiKov rj oiKOVopiKov rj o~Tpa- TijyiKov yeveo~6ai, ndvTa to. TOiavTa padrjpaTa Kai dvBpcoTrov yvcopr] alpera evopi^ev elvai' to. be peyicrTa tcov ev tovtois ecprj tovs deovs eavTols Kara- XeiTrecrdai, hv ovbev brjXov eivai toIs dudpconois . . . ecpr] be belv a pev paQov- Tas Tvoielv ebcoKav ol 6eoi, pavOdveiv, a be prj brjXa reus dvOpconois eo~Ti i neipdaBai bid. pavTiKrjs napd tcov Qecov nvvBdveadai ' tovs Beovs yap ois civ eoaiv iXeco crrjpaiveiv. This accords with Plato, Apol. 40 a, i) elcodvld poi pavTiKr) r) tov baipovlov. It was no such guide in the matter of right and wrong as conscience is ; nor yet an universal oracle to reveal truths of science or of futurity. Its function was on the one hand practical 104 To baifioviov. — to pronounce upon a proposed course of action, of which Socrates had cognisance, either as himself a party to it or in the interest of his friends — , on the other hand it pronounced not on the morality but on the expediency (in the Socratic sense of what was really for the best) of the proposed course. This would not exclude from its decision moral questions, where the obligation either was obscure or mainly depended on the consequences. It was not a mere pre- sentiment, a foreboding of chance misfortune or of chance success, the mere reflection of a man's own feelings of happiness or gloom while in spite of them he carries out his course of action. It stamped in Socrates' belief a definite character of expediency or inexpediency on the course intended, and he never disobeyed it. In Plato the notable passages are these : — Apol. 31 c-d, tovtov be diriov ecrTiv o vpels epov 7roXXaKis aKtjKoaTe TroXXa^ov XeyovTos, on pot 6elov ri Kai baipovtov yiyverai (poovr), 6 brj Kai ev Trj ypa(pfj e7TiKa>p(oba)v MeXrjros iypa^raro. epol be tovt ccttIv eK naibbs dp£dpevov, (pcovrj tis yiyvopevrj, rj otov yevrjTai del cmoTpenei pe tovto, 6 av peXXa> 7r paTTeiv, npoTpenei be ovirore. tovt eo~Tiv 6 pot evavTiovTai to. noXiTLKa. irpdrTeiv. 40 a— b, r) yap eloodvld poi pavriKr) f) tov baipoviov ev pev rcS rrpoaOev Xpovco TravTi rcdvv 7rvKvr) de\ rjv Kai ndvv eVt apiKpols evavTiovpevq, e'i tl peXXoipi prj dp6 ovbevl ovt ev Xo'ya) r}vavTi(OTai poi. — Euthyd. 2^2 e, Kara Bebv yap Tiva eTV%ov Kadrjpevos evTavda, ovnep av pe eibes, ev tg> a7robvTrjpi(o povos, Kai rjbr) ev v6bs arjpelov poi yiyveadai eyeveTO — del be pe eWcr^e* 6 av peXXoa irpaTTeiv — , Kai Tiva vr)v eboga avToQev aKovcrai, r) pe ovk ea airievai 7rpiv av aqboaiooo-copai, &s ti rjpapTrjKOTa els to 6elov, — Alcib. I. init. 103 a— b, tovtov be to diriov yeyovev ovk dv0pa>- neiov, dXXd tl baipoviov evavTicopa, ov crv ttjv bvvap.iv Kai varepov Trevaei. vvv S' etteibr] ovKeri evavTiovrai, ovtco npoo-eXrjXvda. eveX7Tis be elpi Kai to Xoittov prj evavTia>o-ecrdai avro. — Theset. 151a, evlois pev to yiyvopevov 3 Wiggers and Zeller have noticed Athenian people — is thrown on the this. Remark the contrast in the divine mission (28 e), the matter of Apology. The matter of duty — not judgment — to abstain from politics — to desert the post of preacher to the is attributed to the Saipdviov (31 d). To hat^oviov. 105 fxoi baip.6vi.ov dtroKcoXvei ^vvelvai eviois Se f'a. — Rep. 496 C, to 6' rjpeTepov ovk agiov Xeyeiv, to daipoviov o-qpeiov' 77 yap ttov tivi ciWco rj ovdevl tcov efiirpoo-Oev ylyove. The passages in the Theages consist in part of parrot-like repetitions of descriptions of the phenomenon culled from various dialogues, in part of inventions founded on these. The account in these passages exhibits some additions and varia- tions as compared with that of Xenophon. As to the nature of the phenomenon, it is explained to be a sign, which consists of articulate words, and the use of which corresponds to the pavTiKr} of other men. It is represented as a gift almost peculiar to Socrates, though by him possessed from his childhood upwards. Its function seems somewhat heterogeneous, compared with what we have found it in Xenophon. Besides giving warnings as to an intended course of action, it reminds of a duty unperformed (Phclr.); or an advantage accrues from obeying it, which has no rational connection whatever with the obedience (Euthyd.). The tales of the Theages dwell on the marvel exclusively; yet, while they leave the (pcovrj unconnected with any act of the judgment, they leave room for supplying such a connection. Plato further tells us that its function was a negative one — del dnoTpeTrei irpoTpenei he ov7tot€ (Apol.). The importance of this limitation shall be considered presently. From these data we may now seek to arrive at a conclusion for ourselves. According to both Xenophon and Plato the fact itself, which Socrates accounted for by the SaipovLov o~npfiov, was a sudden sense, immediately before carrying a purpose into effect, of the expediency of abandoning it, — or, Xenophon would add, of prose- cuting it. Meanwhile we are not bound to accept Socrates' account of the cause of this sudden feeling ; first, because he was no psy- chologist, and while in his own belief he was merely describing his own consciousness, — or, as Xenophon says, cbcnrep eyiyvooo-Kev ovtco ml i'Xeye, — he was really importing into his description an inference of his own ; secondly, because he rather diminishes the weight of his own testimony for us, not merely by his attention to dreams (Phsedo 60 e), but more by his absolute faith in pavTiKr) and its use in obtaining for others the same divine guidance which he obtained unasked through the o-rjpelov; and, thirdly, because while he believed himself to have detected divine agency here, he was perfectly un- conscious of it in its more ordinary province, as the author of " all holy desires, all good counsels, and all just works." If, then, p 106 To haijJLOVLov. declining Socrates' account, we are disposed to refer the pheno- menon to ordinary psychological causes, we can do so satisfactorily, provided we confine our attention to Xenophon's account alone. All Xenophon's notices of it encourage the view, that it was a quick exercise of a judgment informed by knowledge of the sub- ject, trained by experience, and inferring from cause to effect without consciousness of the process. In a mind so purified by temperance and self-knowledge, so single of purpose and unper- turbed by lower aims, endowed with such powerful natural faculties, especially those of observation and of causality, the ability to fore- cast and forejudge might become almost an immediate sense. But it must be confessed that some of the features in Plato's account are a little embarrassing to this view. The singularity ascribed by Plato (Rep. 496 c) to the gift need not rank among these diffi- culties, since Xenophon mentions it as a singular characteristic of Socrates (Mem. IV. viii. 11) that he was TTpaTTGiv 7rpoTp€7Tet de ovTroTe. One difficulty lies in the nature of the case. What kind of divine communication or what kind of judg- ment could that be which yielded only negative utterances '? Cer- tainly no act of judgment could be such : the same penetration which could discern the inexpediency of a course of action would serve for the discerning of the more expedient alternative. A divine communication might be imagined under any self-imposed restric- tion : still the restriction would, in proportion to its arbitrariness, discredit yet more this hypothesis, which we have already seen reason to abandon. Another difficulty lies in the conflict of testi- mony as to this peculiarity. Xenophon attributes to the sign an approving as well as disapproving force (Mem. IV. viii. i, cpdo-Kovros avTov to daLpovLOv eavrco 7rpocrrjp.aiveiv a re deoi kci\ a p.rj deoi Troieiv cf. I. i. 4, as quoted above). Cicero (De Divin. i. 54) simply echoes Plato. Plutarch (De Socr. Da?m. c. 1 1. p. 1015), agreeing with Xeno- phon, represents the sign as kcoXvov 77 KeXevov. These are the two difficulties which have to be met. No attempt has been made to meet the first : the second has been met by swallowing the first whole, and supposing Xenophon to be in error in not distinguishing the actual communication made by the sign, and the inference which Socrates made from it, and which might (as in Apol. 40 a) be positive. But we shall meet both difficulties by some such explanation as the following. As to the reconcilement of authorities, when Plato makes Socrates say del dTroTpeirei p.e, he 108 To hat}x6viov. describes it by its most perceptible act, for its coincidence with an existing purpose would be superfluous and little noticeable. It was only when the presentiment ran counter to his will that Socrates became distinctly conscious of it. An illustration of this oversight occurs in the statement of some moderns concerning conscience, that it has only a negative function, — as if there were no such thing as " an approving conscience." In this case also the origin of the misstatement is the same, the more acute and marked cha- racter of the negative function. Thus it is the statement of Plato which needs to be supplemented, while that of Xenophon, so far from needing qualification, is alone commensurate with the common sense of the case. As to the fact to which Plato's notice points, the words 7rporpeVei de ovnore would seem not to be an idle tautology, a reiteration of what we have seen to be a defective statement, but to mark another feature in the case. The Voice was no impulse ; it did not speak to the will, but had a critical or reflexive function ; it did not contribute to form a purpose, but pronounced judgment on a purpose already in being. Motives, on the other hand, impel the will always in some direction ; they cannot be negative. Thus the setting forth the first part of the statement on the negative side only is justified in a way by the antithesis. And the meaning of the two clauses together is, that the Voice is a reflexive judgment on purposed actions, but does not supply motives of action. The fact which to datfj.6viov represented was an unanalysed act of judgment, — not on a principle, but on a particular course of action already projected ; not on the morality of this, but on its expe- diency in the Socratic sense of the term. It was KpiriKr), not em- raKTiKrj. Whatever connection it might really have with the springs of the will, would certainly be left out of the statement by one who could identify virtue with knowledge. It was Socrates' substitute for navTiKr]. This implies that in the province where men are wont to supplement the failure of penetration by external preternatural aids, Socrates refused, for himself, such irrational expedients, and found, in many instances at least, a guide within himself. But to this guide, being (as we have seen) the outcome of an assemblage of unanalysed processes of thought and judgment, he in all good faith gave a religious name. His mental acts, so far as he could unravel them, were his own, were human ; beyond his ken they were divine ; and what really was of the nature of an immediate critical sense seemed to him an immediate inspiration. No Christian would be startled by a view which recognised every To batfjiovLov. 109 part of his mental processes as performed in dependence on God, — nor on the other hand would he be shocked to hear them spoken of as independently and properly his own. So long as each view reached the whole way, he would be satisfied with it, and would comprehend it. What Socrates did was to halve each of these views, and to speak of his mental processes as human up to the point where he could still follow them, — beyond that as divine. APPENDIX B. DIGEST OP IDIOMS. Idioms of Nouns : — Accusative Case, §§ i — 23. Idioms of Nouns : — Genitive Case, §§ 24 — 27. Idioms of Nouns : — Dative Case, §§ 28 — 29. Idioms of the Article, §§ 30 — 39. Idioms of Pronominal Words, §§ 40 — 55. Idioms of Verbs, §§ 56 — no. Idioms of Prepositions, §§ ill — 131. Idioms of Particles, §§ 132 — 162. Idioms of Comparison, §§ 163 — 178. Idioms of Sentences: — Attraction, §§ 179 — 203. Idioms of Sentences : — Binary Structure, §§ 204 — 230. Idioms of Sentences: — Abbreviated Construction, §§ 231 — 261. Idioms of Sentences : — Pleonasm of Construction, §§ 262 — 269. Idioms of Sentences : — Changed Construction, §§ 270 — 286. Idioms of Sentences : — Arrangement of Words and Clauses, §§ 287 — 31 Rhetorical Figures, §§ 312 — 326. § 1 . Idioms of Nouns : — Accusative Case. Besides the Accusatives governed by Verbs Transitive, as such, occur the following, of a more Adverbial character. A. Accusatives referable to the principle of the Cognate Accu- sative. a. Direct and regular instances of the Cognate Accusative. It will suffice, as a notice of these, to point out that they are of two kinds only, viz. — a. the Accusative of the Act or Effect signified by the Verb. /3. the Accusative of the Process indicated by the Verb. §§ i — 3O ACCUSATIVE CASE. Ill Virtual Cognate Accusatives, i. e. such as are cognate in sense only and not etymologically, are intended to be here included. The "Accusative of the General Force of the Sentence" is really an Accusative of Apposition. See below, F (§§ 10-12). § 2. b. Accusatives which must be analysed as Adjectives or Pronouns in agreement with an unexpressed Cognate Accusative. These are commonly neuter (not always; cf. Hdt. v. 72, Karedijaav rr\v inl 6a.va.TCd). Phsedo 75 b, opav kcu aKovetv /cat raAXa alcrddveaOai — 'perform the other acts of the senses.' lb. 85 b, Tj-yovfiaL ,.,ov x (i P ov fteLvcov rrjv fxavriKrjv e%eiv. Symp. 205 b, ra t)e aXXa aXXois Karaxp^p-^a ovofxaaiv, i.e. 'ill the other cases.' Stallbaum takes this of 'the other (et'Sq) species of things' which have to be named, 'quod ad cseteras attinet formas.' This might be; but the construction of the par- ticular verb xPV^ 01 leads us the other way; cf. Thuc. ii. 15, 7-77 Kprjvrj .... eyyvs ovcrrj ra 7r\etcrTOV ci£ia ixpcovro, Hdt. i. 1 3 2, Xparai [rois Kpeacriv] 6 tl puv \6yos aipiei. Phdr. 228 C, (A) "Q,s poi doKels tovt OVK6T av eyco £vvaKo\ov6r](raip! civ — ' this is one step further than I can go with you.' Exactly parallel are the Homeric rocf Udveis, rode xo>eo, &c. Crat. 425 C, et n xP r ] (TT ov ^dei avTa bieXecrOai. § 3. c. Adjectives as well as Verbs are followed by a Cognate Accusative, or by one referable to the same principle. Apol. 20 b, KaXco re Ka\ dyaOoi ttjv TrpoaijKOvaav dperr\v. lb. d, Kivdwevco \aocpiav\ ravrrjv eivai crocpos. Meno 93 b, Tavrrjv rfjv dpeTrjv, r)v avTo\ dyaBoi rjcrav. Hep. 349 e, ovkovv Kal airep cppovipov dyaBov \elvai X/yeiy] ; — ' good at those things in which he is wise.' lb. 579 d> dovXos tcis pey terras 6coireias Kal dovXeias: Laches 19IC, tovto tolvvv alriov eheyov on eyco airios. So Thucyd. i. 37? avrapKrj Secriv Keipevrj, v. 34, dripovs eiroirjaav art- plav roidvbe. (B, C, and D, which follow, are to be regarded as very near akin to each other.) 112 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 4—6. § 4. B. Accusatives of the part to which the action, or charac- teristic, is limited, as irepav noda, fipvxeiv odovras. (Lobeck). Ad- jectives as well as Verbs, of course, are followed by this Accu- sative. Charmid. 154 C, 6avp,aaTos to KaXKos. Cf. Soph. 0. T. 37 1, rv(p\6s rd t ei)Ta tov re vovv rd r o/xfiar el. § 5. C. Accusatives Quantitative (or, in all the instances follow- ing, Adjectives in agreement with such Accusatives), expressing how much of the subject is brought under the predication. Legg. 958 d, a be fj x^P a npbs tovt aiiTo \x,6vov (pvaiv e^et, . . . ravra eKnXrjpovv. lb. e, oaa Tpov eveKa, dXXd bi dpyiav. Phdr. 274 a, ov yap . . . 6p.obovXoi? del xapi£ea6ai p,eXeTav . . ., 6 tl p,r) irdpepyov. Tim. 42 e, apiara to BvrjTov biaicvftepvav £5)0v, o ti fir) kokcov avrb eavToi yiyvoiTo a'lriov. lb. 69 d, ae(36p.evoi fxialveiv to 6elov } o ti fir) naaa rjv dvdyKrj. lb. 90 e, did j3paxea>v enifivrjaTeov, b fir) tis dvdyKrj firjKvveiv. § 6. Hither are also to be referred the following instances, with the distinction that here the quantitative accusative is applied metajihorically, as the measure of the degree of the act or process. Legg. 679 a, ovoe ev Trpoaoeovrai aidrjpov. As we say, 'not one hit? Cf. ti del; ('what need 1 ?' not 'why is there need?') illustrated by Isseus, ii. 39, ti ebei avrovs ofivvvai . . . \ ovoe ev brjnov. Phsedo 9 1 d, acopd y del aTroXXvfievov ovbev naveTai — ' ceases not one bit.' To join it with aa>pa would ruin the sense. And cf. IOO b, direp .... ovbev neiravfiai Xeyoov, and Euthyphro 8 C, ovbev fiev ovv iravovrai ravT dpv eya> ovdev ovre peya ovre crpLKpbv nepi eVatca. lb. 21 b, eyca . . . ovre peya ovre o-ptKpbv ^vvoiba epavrco aocpbs &v. lb. 26 b, MeXrjTco tovtcov ovre peya afire o-piKpbv narroTe ep.eXrjarev — where, in accordance with the two last instances, ovre peya ovre o-p.iKp6v is not the Nona, to ip.eXr]o~ev, nor in regimen with tovtcov, but in agreement with the Ace. Cognate after epeX^aev. In Crat. 425 C, ovdev eldores tyjs dXrjdeias, and Legg. 887 e, 00-01 ml crpiKpbv vov KeKTrjvTcu, the case is different. Crito 46 C, TrXeico tcov napovTcov . . . f] pas poppoXvTTrjTai. Phileb. 23 e, noXXa. iaxio-pevov. Symp. 193 a, anavTa evo-efiziv nepl Beovs — 'in all his acts to act piously toward the gods.' Apol. 30 C, epe peifa fiXd^eTe. Gorg. 512 b, e'Xarrco bvvaTai o~a>£eLV. Cf. Homer's irdvra, as in Od. iv. 654, rw S' avT

v apx° m p.evoov. Rep. 416 b, tx]V peyiO-TTjv ttjs evXafielas Trapeo-KevacrpevoL — ' Oil a foot- ing of the greatest possible caution/ (ttjv peyio-Trjv ttjs evXafieias like tt]V ivkeio~Tr)V Trjs aTpaTias, TllUC. vii. 3, &C.) Cf. Ar. Pax 232, Ka\ yap e^ievai, yvcop-qv eprjv, peXXei. § 8. Refer to this the common phrase tov ai/Tov Tponov, &c. : and, probably, the " Accusative Absolute," — ' on such and such a footing.' Protag. 314 c, dogav f]plv Tavra, erropevopeOa. Critias 107 e, i< 8r] tov napaxprjpa vvv Xeyopeva, to npenov av prj bvvoopeOa ttcivtcos dirobovvai ovyyiyvcoo-Keiv xpeau/. Phileb. 13 b, tl ovv drj Tavrbv .... evbv, ndaas rjdovas dyadbv elvaL Q 114 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 9—12. npoo-ayopeveis ; Cf. Andoc. i. 92. p. 12, aKeyjraade rl avrols VTrdpxpv irepatv Kar-qyopovcn. § 9. E. Accusatives referable to the principle of the Accusative of Time or Space. To designate them thus is not an idle periphrasis ; it seems to include, together with the instances of an Accus. of Time or Space in the literal meaning, those in which the notions of Time or Space are applied metaphorically. Only the latter need be noticed here. Phileb. 59 e, to Brj peTa Tavra ap oh piyvvvai avras i7nx€Lpr)T€OV \ where * after' means in the order of discourse. Soph. 259 b, to ov . . . pvp'ia eVt pvpiois ovk eaTi — 'ten thousand times twice told' for ' in so many instances? Phdr. 241 d, ovK.iT av to irkpa aKovaais epov XeyovTos — 'saying any- thing further' for ' saying anything more ;' — a real metaphor, as discourse only metaphorically takes up space. As to the construction, to nepa is not governed, transitively, by aKovcrais, but follows XeyovTOS. Symp. 198 b, to §' €7r\ Tc\evTTJ$ tov KaWovs T(ov ovopaTtov kcu prjpd- tcov tls ovk av egeTrXdyr) cLkovcov j to iiv\ reA. is a metaphor from space, probably, rather than time. Either way, Stallb. is wrong in explaining the construction by his favourite ' quod attinet ad/ § 10. F. Accusatives in Apposition with, or standing for, sen- tences or parts of sentences. These Accusatives may be either (1) Noun-Phrases ; see a below : or (2) Pronouns Neuter, agreeing with Nouns understood, — viz, either Relative Pronouns ; see b below : or Demonstratives &c. ; see c below. The doctrine here advanced asserts two positions, which are worthy of notice ; viz. § 11. (i.) These Noun -Phrases and Neuter-Pronouns are Accu- satives. The prevalence of the Neuter Gender makes this difficult to prove ; but such instances as are decisive afford an analogy for the rest : — Theset. 153 C, eVt tovtois tov Ko\o(pcbva 9 dvayKa£a) Trpocrfiifidfav k.t.A. Cf. Soph. 0. T. 603, Kcu Tcovb'' eXeyxov . . . irtvOov, and the Adverbs dpxw, aKprjv, ttjv 7rpwTrjv } &C. § 12. (ii.) They represent, by Apposition or Substitution, the sentence itself. To say, that they are Cognate Accusatives, or in Apposition with the (unexpressed) Cognate Accus., would be inade- § I3-] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 115 quate to the facts. For (i) in most of the instances the sense points out that the Noun-Phrase or Pronoun stands over against the sentence, or portion of a sentence, as a whole ; (2) in many of them, not the internal force but merely the rhetorical or logical form of the sentence is in view. It might be said that they are Predicates, while the sentence itself is the Subject. § 13. a. Accusative of Noun-Phrases in Apposition — Iiegg. 736 a, tovtois, 6Y ev(pr]pias diraXXayrjV, ovopa cuttoikuiv Tide- pevos. Crat. 395 d, ozv Kat reXos, rj narpls dveTpdneTO, Crito 45 d, to o~6v pepos, o tl dv tvxv tovto elvai vocrrjpa. Politic. 293 a, ewopevov 8e tovtco, tt)v 6p6r)v dp)(j)v Set {jjTelv. The Accusatives in the instances which follow characterise the logical or rhetorical form — Symp. 205 d, to pev KecpdXaiov, ecrri ndo-a r) . , . emBvpia . . . epoos. So 223 d, Critias 108 e, Theast. 190 b. Cf. Ep. to Heb. viii. 1. Theaet. 153 C, eVi tovtois t6v mXo(pcova, dvaymfa Trpocrfiiftdfav k.t.X. Phaado 66 e, bvolv Qdrepov, r\ ovbapov eon KTrjcraaOai to elbevai, r) k.t.X. Similarly 68 c (plural), and Charm. 160 b. Illustrations from other writers begin with Homer : II. iv. 28, Aaov dyeipovo-rj, lipidpuo mm, 1 55, OdvaTov vv rot op pfy* 1 • • • dirb irvpyov, Xvypbv oXeOpov, Od. xxi. 35, *yX 0S ^awi', *Ap)(r)v £eivo- avvqs. ^Esch. Ag. 225, 6vTr)p yeveaOai OvyaTpos, yvvaimiroLvocv 7roXepcov dpcoydv, 1406, veKpbs . . . Trjade deltas X e P 0S "^py ov , Cho. 200, el%e o-vpnevBelv epo'i" AyaXpa Tvpfiov, k.t.X., 205, Kcu pr)v crrt/3ot ye, devTepov TeKprjpiov, IIoo\a>z> opoloi, toIs T ipolcriv epcpepels. Eur. Or. 1 1 05, 'EXevrjv KTavcopev, MeveXeco XvmjV 7TiKpdv. Ar. Acharn. 411, ovk ctos x 03 ^ ™ Troieis. (So Yirg. JEn. xi. 383, Proinde tona eloquio, solitum tibi.) Thucyd. iii. in, Trpocpaaiv em Xaxa- vio-pbv e£eX66vTes (and similarly v. 80) : cf. the Homeric prece- dent II. xix. 302, eVt be crTevdxovTO yvvcuKes, YlaTpoicXov Trpocpaaiv, acptiiv §' aiiTcov Kt]8e i emo-Tr] (not, as Jelf, Gr. Gr. § 580, Trpocpacnv in Apposition to TldTponXov). Ar. Vesp. 338, ToO S' ecpegiv, Z> pdTaie, TavTa Bpav ae fiovXeTai ', Antipho V. 63. p. 1 36, dXX\ avTO Q 2 116 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 14, 15. to ivavrlov, inelvos tovto 6a8o7roiov, ovS' ol yehoves o~(p68pa alcrddvovTai. Apol. 34 d, Kai yap, tovto qvto to tov 'O^x-qpov, ovff iya> aV6 Bpvos k.X. Phfedo 77^ SokcIs .... Seoiivai, to twv iraibtov, prj ws dXrjdas 6 aW- fios k.t.X. — where to tg>v it. is not connected with bebiivai, but refers to the sentence 6 avefios avrfv .... diao-Kedawvaiv that is, does not mean ' to fear, as children fear,' but ' to fear lest it be as children think it is, that the soul goes into the air.' § 15. b. Accusative of Relative Pronoun Neuter in Apposition, with a sentence following — Protag. 352 e, tovto to 7ra0o9, o cpaaiv vrrb t&v rjdovcov fjTTdadai — ' which is what men describe when they say they are,' &c. Soph. 217 C, oY epcoT-qo-ecov, oiov ttot€ Kai ILappevidrj xpea/zeva) Ka\ diegiovTi Xoyovs nayKaXovs 7rapeyev6p.rjv iya>. The illustration which Socrates means to impress on the stranger is not simply Parmenides' use of eparfjo-eis, but the whole scene, — the Xoyoi TrdyKaXoi in which the epcor^o-et? were interwoven, and his own presence on these occasions. Cf. Thucyd. ii. 40, 6 toIs aXXois dfiaBia p,kv Opdaos Xoyio-p.6s Be Skvov (pipef and vi. 55? 0V X ^ s d8eX(pos vea>Tepos &V r]7r6pr)aev iv is not = ev tovt(o iv tovtco o, i.e. i in a predicament which was that of his not having,' &c. And in the common expressions dvtf fav=dvT\ t&v, a, and ovveipaTa>v ivdpyeiav. Phaedo 64 d, rjbovas tcis Toidcrbe, olov o-ltloov re Ka\ ttotwv. lb. 7 3 C, (A) 7r£>s Xeyeis J (B) olov ra Toidhe. lb. 78 d, tcov ttoXXcov koXcdv olov av6pa>iTTa rj k.t.X. All these instances of olov shew that 1 it stands outside the con- struction of the sentence. But its being in a particular number and case still requires explanation, and the only explanation is, that it is in Apposition with the sentence or some portion of it. Note, that this olov has two shades of meaning, according as it introduces (a) a metaphor, when it means ' as it were ;' or (b) an instance, when it means ' for instance.' A different analysis is re- quired for olov dr), ola dr), ola, e. g. ill Critias II2C, ola Oepovs, KaTexp&VTO eVl ravra avTols. Symp. 203 b, eTreiBr) be edeinvTjO-av, 7rpoo-aiTr)crovo-a olov dr) eva>xi.as ovo-rjs acpiKeTO r) TLevla. Here the same principle so far appears, that the Neuter Ante- cedent to which the Relative refers is (not a Cognate Accus. but) the whole clause, — viz. in the former instance, Karexpcovro eVt ravra avTols, in the latter TTpoo-airrjo-ovo-a. The Relative sentence is ellip- tical ; cf. the use of Relatives generally with Si), and the fuller expression in Phsedo 60 a, ToiavT aTTa einev ola or) elcodaaiv at yvvaiKes. 1 The Zaov in '6 paKapie, ecrri, ku\ ravra ye rav dnopicov i) p,eyLCTTT) — where ravra is the pronominal substitute for en 5m. Legg. 630 e, dperrjs popiov, kcu ravra to (pavkorarov — where ravra is the substitute for popiov. Euthyd. 299 d, (A) xP V(r ^ 0V dyadbv 8oK€i vol eivai %X.€iv\ (B) rrdvv ye, Kai ravra ye irnkv — where ravra is the substitute for xpwioi/ Rep. 34I C, vvv yovv eVe^e/p^cas, ovbev &>v Ka\ ravra — where ravra = €7rexelpw as > which thus is brought close to ovdev a>v, with con- temptuous emphasis. Symp. 2IO b, Karaarrjvai Trdvrav rav naXwv ccopdrav epaarrjv, evbs de to crcpodpa rovro xa\do-ai — where rovro stands for Karaarrjvai epaarrrjv, and therefore becomes endued with the capacity of governing evos (for which cf. Legg. 723 d, ovde yap aaparos nav- ros Set to toiovtov dpav) . Phileb. 37 d, pa>v ovk 6p6r)v pev dogav epovpev av dpOorrjra 'iaxTI \ ravrbv he r)hovr)v j where ravrbv stands for pa>v ovk 6p6r)v epovpev av 6p66rr}ra 'ipa 'Aps e'lrj, — rovro pera rovro \ (' the next question/ — as Protag. 323 c). Theset. 189 e, \6yov ov avrr) trpbs avrrjv r) yjsvxr) bie^epx^rai . . . rovro yap pot IvBdXkerai . . ., ovk aXko ri rj diaXeyeadai. Tim. 27 c, (A) crbv ovv epyov Xeyeiv . . ., KaXeaavra Kara vopov deovs. (B) 'AAA', g> SeoKpares, rovro ye 8rj, ndvres . . . eVi navrbs oppfj . . . TTpdyparos 6ebv del irov Kakovo'iv. (In the two last instances we have the Neut. Pron. rovro, which stands for the previous sentence, connected with a sentence suc- ceeding, in which the Pronoun is virtually restated at large. Thus, as to meaning, rovro is placed between the two sentences as a § 1 8.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 119 symbol of equivalence : but as to grammar, its relations to each are different ; it stands for the sentence preceding, and is in appo- sition with the sentence following. So in the instances which are subjoined) — Politic. 262 e, (A) ndWiov 8e ttov tear e?$r) ko\ Si^a diaipoir av, el k.t.X. (B) 'Opdorara' dX\a yap tovto avro, ncos av tis yevos /cat p,epos . . . yvoirj ' Meno 90 d, ovkovv nai orepi av\rjo~ea>s . . . to. avra ravra, ttoWt) avoid icrri k.t.X. So Symp. 178 e. Symp. 204 a, ov(? av ol dpLaOels . . . ernQvpovcri cro(po\ yevia-Qai' avro yap tovto, eoTi xa\eTvbv apadla, to prj ovTa .... doKelv avTcp elvai — where avTo tovto, standing for the sentence preceding, is in Apposition with t6 p,fj ovTa . . . elvai, which is also, as to mean- ing, the virtual re-statement of the Pronoun. As to the construction of this sentence, rd pr) ovra — elvai evidently contains the reason for iarl x a ^ e7rov apa6la' only that it is expressed not in the regular causal form, 6Vt tis ovk a>v . . . done! ovtcZ elvai, or Trapa to (ir) . . . 8o TavTa ™s T dx av -Tarrjp . . . oiktov otfcruftur' eneidrj niTvel dopos SUas. Sjoph. 0. T. IOO4, (A) Kai prjv X--P' v 7 av dgiav \dj3ois epov. (B) Kat prjv pd- Aiara tovt dcpiKoprjv, ottcos 2ov rrpos dopovs e\66vTOS ev rrpd^aipi ti. 120 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 19, 20. Eur. Androm. 209, 2v 8' fjv ti KVKrOrjs, . . . MeveXeas Be a-oi Mct'fow 'A^iXXea)?' ravrd to'l § 19. y. For a sentence expressed immediately after — Pksedo 105 a, opa Br) el ovtcos opi£ei, fir] /xovov to IvavTiov to evavTiov /lit) 8e^o~8ai, dXXd Kai eKelvo, — 6 av eivicjieprj ti ivavTiov .... evav- TioTrjTa p.r)Se7TOT6 Bef-aaOai. Protag. 326 a, oi t av KidapicrTai, erepa ToiavTa, aoxppoo-vvrjs eVt/te- XovvTat. Hep. 334 b, tovto fievTOC efxoiye BoKel '(ti, bXpeXelv p.ev tovs (piXovs r) BiKaiocrvvrj k.t.X. Hip. Ma. 283 d, aXX' eKelvo, — p.S>v fxr) k.t.X. Cf. Demosth. Cor. 123. p. 268, KaiToi Kai tovto, in Leoch. 55. p. IO97, eVet KaKelvo, Lys. xiii. 79. p. 137, aXX' hepov. Soph. 248 d, to Be, cos to yiyvooo-Keiv e'lirep etrrae noietv ti, to yiyvca- o~Kop,evov dvaymlov av avpfiaivei 7rdax €LV - Legg. 630 d, to Be, — 7ra>s XP*I v W<* s Xeyeiv ; lb. 803 d, to B\ — rjv ev 7roXe/ia) p,ev apa ovt ovv iraiBid ire(pvK.via ovt av TraiBeia. Apol. 23 a, to Be, — KivBvvevei . . . rv — koX&v is suspended in a loose con- struction, which the second interrogation supersedes.) Phileb. 27 e, tl §e 6 cros \fiios], . . ; — iv t'lvl yeveL av XeyoLTO j So probably Phaedo 64 d, (A) (paiveTai aoi (pLXoaocpov dvdpos elvai io-irovhaKevaL irep\ rot? rjdovas KaXovpevas Tas TOidcrde k.t.X. j (B) "Hkl- (Ttcl. (A) Ti be Tas twv dcppobLaicov ] (B) Ovbapas. (A) Ti be Tas aXXas Tas ire pi to cra>p.a Beparteias j — boKel ctol ivripovs r)yeiaBai 6 tolovtos ; See more instances under Binary Structure (§ 207). Legg. 630 C, ovk aXXo rj 7rp6s Trjv peyi.o~Tr)V dpeTrjV pdXLO~Ta (SXejrcov 2 Add rt /j.4\\ei ; as in Hipp. Mi. invariable, though attracted some- 373 d, Rep. 349 d. (Ue'AAe: can be times into ij.4Wofj.ev. R 122 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§ 2 z. del 6t](T€i tovs vofiovs. Here ciXXo denotes in outline a whole clause, the form of which is revealed to us by the contrasted clause Trpos — fiXeTTcov. Rep. 372 d, tl av auras ciXXo r) ravra exoprafcs ; where tl ciXXo represents a sentence parallel to the contrasted sentence airas av ravra exopra£es. Illustrations of this construction abound in Thucydides, e. g. iii. 85, oVws dnoyvoia § rod aXXo ri r) Kpareiv rrjs yrjs, ii. 1 6, ovt)ev ciXXo rj ttoXlv rr)v avrov aTTokemw e/caoro?, 49, pr)r aXXo tl rj yvpvol dve- XeaOai, iv. 1 4, ciXXo ovdev rj £k yrjs Zvavpax'wv, V. 98, t'l aXXo rj rovs . . . rroXepiovs peyaXvvere * vii. 75> ov $* v «XXo r) TioXeL etcTreTroXiopurjuevr] ecoKe- crav, Vlll. 5? dpcporepav . . . ovrcov ovbev aXXo i) locnrep dpxopevcov. (Notice the two last, which prove the invariableness of the ovSev aXXo.) § 22. The Adverbial Interrogatives aXXo n rj and ciXXo tl are instances of the same principle ; and may conveniently be discussed here once for all. They have the following points in common : (1) as to their use, they both expect an affirmative answer: (2) as to their construction, the liXXo in both (as in the instances heretofore given) is used pro- leptically ; and (as we have said) both are instances of the Neuter Pronoun Accusative standing for a sentence, or portion of a sen- tence, unexpressed. But from this point we must investigate them separately. "AXXo Tt }) challenges an affirmation with respect to some special portion of the sentence. It may be that it sometimes affects the whole ; but (unlike liXXo ri) it can, and in most instances does, affect a particular portion of the sentence. And the interrogation is, in strictness, limited to the part affected. Apol. 24 C, aXXo tl r) nepl noXXov iroiel, ottws gos ^Xtllttol 01 vearepoi ecrovrai • The interrogation is made as to irepl ttoXXov TroteT. Rep. 372 a, ciXXo tl r) crlrov re noiovvres kol vnocyrjpaTa ; The inter- rogation is made as to crlrov re n. k. vnobrjixaTa, to the exclusion of the Verb hiairr)o~ovrai. Ale. I. 129 b, r<3 diaXeyei crv vvv ; ciXXo tl r) epoi ) The phrase gets its meaning thus ; the speaker, about to name a certain fact or thing, gives it emphasis by first asking whether any other ought to be named instead of it. Some doubt might be felt whether r) is 'than' or ' or.' Certain phrases would point to ' or,' such as § 22.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 123 Gorg. 459 b, tovto a-vpfiaivei rj aXXo tl ; PolltlC. 266 b, (A) pOiV ClXXcOS 7TC0S 7T€(pVK€V, rj KClddnep K.T.X. j (B) OuK aXXats. Legg. 683 e, (SaaiXeia 8e KaTaXveTai rj Kai tls apX'l n dm ore KaTeXvOtj pa>v vtto tlvcov a^Xcov rj acpcov avroovj Protag. 330 C, tlv av ^ri)ov 6e1o * Tr)v avTrjv epol r) ciXXrjv ' But more decisive for 'than' are Protag. 357 e, dia to o'Uadai aXXo ti r) dpaOiav elvai, and the vari- ations, Soph. 2 20 C, to. TOiavra pa>v ciXXo tl rrXrjv ep Ka\ nep\ irdvToiv. Phsedo 79 h, (A) e'pe Sr), aXXo tl fjpcov avTcov to pev acopd eo~Ti to de ij/vxr) ', (B) Ovdev aXXo. Symp. 201 a, aXXo tl 6 epcos KaXXovs av e'lrj epcos, a'icrx nvs & °v j (In Euthyd. 286 c, aXXo tl f) ^evdrj k.t.X., the interrogation goes through several clauses : but here two MSS. omit rj.) Thus aXXo ti affects the whole of the sentence, like the French n'est ce pas que. The interrogation it makes is not restricted to any particular portion of the sentence. But how does it come to have its meaning'? For there is no colour for supposing that it stands for aXXo ti rj. It represents an unexpressed sentence (according to the use of the Neuter Pronoun at present before us) ; — namely, ' any different' proposition from that about to be enunciated. The speaker, by aXXo tl, 'puts the question' about this shadow of a proposition, but anticipates the judgment by offering simultaneously for acceptance his own view. Thus the interrogation strictly speaking belongs to r 2 124 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 23—25. the ci\Xo ti alone, though it spreads from it to the whole sentence beyond. § 23. The last use to be mentioned of the Neuter Accusative of akXos as standing for a sentence, or portion of a sentence, unex- pressed, is in winding up an enumeration. Symp. 176 a, aaavTas tov 6ebv kcu raXXa to. vopi£6ueva. Theoet. 159 b, kcu KadevbovTa bi) kcu iravra a vvv bir)X6onev. (I class this passage under the present head, because by the sense irdvra must Stand for TaXXa ttuvtu. Cf. § 249.) In neither of these passages can the Accusative be said to be Cognate, as if it were subjoined by kcu to the unexpressed Cognate Accusatives of aaavras and KciBevdopra' for it is really other participles that are added, co-ordinate with aa-avras in the one case and KaOev- bovra in the other. Theset. 145 a, rj kcu do~Tpovopik6s teal Xoyio-TiKos re kcu povaiKos kcu ocra natdeias e\erai \ Phdr. 227c, 7T€vrjTi fiaXXov r) 7rXovo~[a> kcu TTpecrftvTepo} r) vecoTtpa kcu ocra ciXXa epo\ 7rp6o~ecrTi. lb. 246 e, to 8e Qtiov koXov aocpbv dyaObv Ka\ nav o ti toiovtou. § 24. Idioms of Nouns -.—Genitive Case, A. Genitive of Epexegesis. Apol. 29 b, duaOla . . . avTrj r) eVoi/eicWrof, r) tov o'UcrBai clbevcti a ovk oibev. Ph&3do *]& b, tovto to ttciBos . . ., tov diao~Ke8dvvvcrdai. [So Oxon. and one other MS.] lb. 96 b, o tcis alo-6r)o~6is irapzyaiV tov clkovciv kcu opav kcu alo-0dvecr6ai. lb. 97 a ? ctvrr] apa cut'io. axiTols iyevsTO t)vo yeveo~0ai } r) £vvot)os tov nXrjaiov dXXr)Xa>v TeBrjvai. § 25. B. Genitive of a Substantive with &>$•, loosely, denoting the agent to whom a particular effect is to be referred. Symp. 2 I 2 C, kcu €^nt(pvrjs tt)v avXaov Ovpav Kpovopevrjv noXvi/ yj/6(fiov Trapaaxelv cos KwpacrToav — where cos KoopaaTcou does not closely follow \j/6cpov, but characterises the general effect produced. 3 [Under these three examples is written in the MS. " Proof to be subjoined that these are Accusatives."! § 26.] GENITIVE CASE. 125 Cf. Arist. Eth. I. xiii. 1 8, ovtco Br) Ka\ tov narpas . . . . (fiapev ex eLV \6yov, Kal ov% axnrep to>u paQrjpaTtKwv — (' not in the sense in which mathematicians use the expression.') iEsch. Eum. 628, Qavfiv Togois €Kr][36\oiaiv, coctt 'Apa£6vos, Cho. 990, "^X ei yap alax VVT yp°s> ">* vojxov, dUrjv (the law being personified into an agent, as frequently elsewhere). Soph. Aj. 998, 'o£eia yap crov (Bd^LS, cos 6eov tlvos, AtrJX^' 'Axaiovs ('like a 6cia (prjpr], 7 that is.) Trach. 768, Trpoo~7rTvo~creTai YlXevpalcriv dpTLKoWos, coare TeKTovos ('like carver's work.') lb. II2, noWa yap aW dudpavTOs r) votov rj /3opea ns Kvpara . . . tdoi — which points again to the Homeric tov §' ovnors Kvpara Xelnei UavToicov dvipcov, II. ii. 396. § 26. C. Genitive of a Noun with a Participle, after Verbs of knowing, seeing, shewing. Apol. 2^ a, dpa yvcoaerai "2coKpdrrjs 6 crocfios 8r) ipov x a P UVTl C°l Ji * V0V ) lb. 37 b, oov ev Ot'S' OTI KaKCOV OVTCOV. Crat. 412 a, prjvvei cos (pepopevots toIs irpdypauiv enopevrjs rrjs ^1^77?. Rep. 55^ a > *l °^ 7I " tt) ct8es . . . avTcov pevovTcov j Cf. Horn. II. iv. 357, 'Qs yv5> xcoopevoio. iEsch. P. V. 760, 'Qs ovrcov Tcovde troi paOelv Tidpa. Soph. Aj. 28 1, '&s a>8' ixdvTcov inicTTao-dai ere xpr)' Eur. Med. 13II, '&£ ovk4t ovtcov crcov tIkvcov (ppdvrife hi). Probably of the use of these Verbs with a Genitive unaccom- panied by a Participle there is no clear instance in Plato. In Charm. 154 e, ideao-dp.eOa . ... tov e'tdovs, the Genitive is very possibly Partitive, as also in Pep. 485 b, paOrjpaTos . . . b av avTois §77X01 eneivr/s ttjs ovcrtas. In Legg. 646 d, kol ttjs 7rep\ tov olvov apa diaTpiftrjs cocravTcos 81a- vorjT€ov, the Genitive has tacit reference to nepl in the question previously put, ovkovv xph KaL T & p ohXo>V eTriTrjfievpdTcov nepi 81a- voc-lcrBai tov avrov Tpojtov ' } In Pep. 375 ^? oicrBa yap nov tcov yevvalcov kvvcov, oti tovto (fiver* 1 avTcov to rj3os, kvvcov is governed by rjdos. D. Genitive of a Noun, without any Participle, after 4 Verbs of mentioning. Meno 96 a, e^et? ovv elireiv aXkov otovovv npdypaTOS, ov k.t.X. * — Why 4 The passage, Rep. 439 b, tov to£6- tov is governed by x e ' l P' See under tov ov itaXws e%6i \4yeiv oti k.t.X., is Binary Structure (§ 225). to be construed otherwise ; tov to£6- tolvvv Tcovb 126 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 27, 28. this is not to be explained on the principle of Attraction of Antecedent to Relative, see under Attraction (§ 191.) Leg'g. 804 e, Kal ovdev (poftrjOels e'moip av tovtov tov Xoyov ovre imriKrjs ovre yvpvaariKrjs, cos avhpdcri pev npenov av etrj } yvvai^l de ovk av npenov. Cf. Soph. Aj. 1236, Tlolov Keicpayas dv8pbs a>§' xmepcppova) and ib. 1257, O. C. 355, *A rovS* £xpr)(r6r) o-oifiaros, Trach. 1 122, Trj? prj- rpos fjKG) ttjs eprjs cppdaoiv. In Homer, Verbs of knowing &c. also thus govern a Genitive of a Noun without a Participle. II. xii. 229, Eldeirj repdav, Od. xxi. 36, Tvwttjv dXXrjXwv, and SO xxiii. 109, Tv(oa6pe8 > dXXrjXcov. II. xiv. 37, dyjfelovTes dvrrjs, xvi. 8ll, dibavKopevos noXepoio, § 27. E. Genitive of a Noun placed at the beginning of a con- struction, for the sake of premising mention of it, without any grammatical justification of the genitive. Phasdo 78 d, tl fie ra>v ttoXX&v koXcov . . . * apa Kara ravrd e'x", V K - T ^- > Gorg. 509 d, rt be brj rov dbiKe'iv; norepov ... 77 Kal k.t.X.; Legg. 75 * b, drjXov . . . on . . . rov noXiv ev trapecrKevaa'pevrjv dp%as dve7TLTT]8eiovs eiridTrjcrai rols ev Keipevois vdpois, . . . ovbev TrXeov ev redevTGiv [earl]. Rep. 57^ d, aXX' evbatpovias re av Kal ddXiorrjTos, coaavroos rj aXXcos Kp'iveis ; Cf. iEsch. Ag. 950, Tovrcov pev ovras' and Eum. 211, Tt yap yvvai- kos fjris civbpa voarcplo-j] ; also Arist. Pol. I. iv. I, manep Be ev rats apio-pevais re^vais avayKalov av e'irj vTrdp^eiv ra oiKela opyava, el peXXei drroTeXeo-drjcreadai to epyov, ovtco Kal tS>v olKOVopiKoav. The principle seems to be that the intended mention of the thing is regarded from the side of the genitive as limited and occasioned by it. Near this use stands also Legg. 969 C, ttjv ttoXlv eareov rrjs KaToiKto-ecos. § 28. Idioms of Nouns : — Dative Case. Certain intensified uses of the ' Dative of Reference' are notice- able, a. Where the Dative is only justified by making the notion of Reference concentrated enough to include Possession. a. Dative of Nouns. Apol. 40 C, pera^oXr) tis Tvy\dvei ovcra Kal peToUrjais tjj yjsvxf}, Phsedo 62 b, rj/xas rovs dvBpoMTOVS ev tcov KTrjpdrcov reus deois elvai. §§29,3°0 DATIVE CASE. THE ARTICLE. 127 Pllileb. 58 C, rfj peV €K€LVOV VTrdp^eLV T€y(VT} 8l8oVS TTpOS XP (iaV T0 ^ av8ponTTOLS Kparelv. Legg. *]6o e, rco tottch e/cacrrco ttjv impeXeiav eivai roidvbe tlvci. lb. 820 e, aarpcav . . . ttjv pdOrjcriv rots veois. /3. Dative of Pronouns. Charm. 157 e ? V narpaa vplv oIkio.. Legg. 624 b, rais noXeaiv vplv Qevros rovs vopovs. Theset. 2IO b, fj paievTiicf) fjp.lv re)(vr]. Phsedo 60 C, Oeos . . . tjvvrj^ev els tclvtov avrols rds KOpvcpds. lb. 72 e, ^ 7rov f]plv fj \jsvxv [Oxon.], and ibid, fjplv fj pdOrjais. Cf. TllUC. i. 6, 01 7rp€(r(3vT€poi avrols tgov evdaipovav. Isseus vi. 6. p. 56, to) p,ev ovv ddeXcpco avrcp . . . iriKevrrjaaT-qv. § 29. b. Where the Dative is justified by making the notion of Reference include that of the Object. a. In the case of the latter of two Substantives. Symp. 194 d, impikrjdrjvai tov iyiccopiov tS"Epcoti. Rep. 607 a, vpvovs deals kol iyKcopia rots dyadols. Legg. 653 d, ras T&tv eoprcov dpoifids rols Beols. lb. 950 G, dycovatv tovtois rols Seols. /3. In the case of the remote Object after a Verb. This usage is partly owing to the force of Attraction, and the instances are given under that head (§ 183). § 30. Idioms of the Article. a. As a Demonstrative Pronoun Antecedent. These t. 204 d, ev ye rols oo~a if- apiOpov eort. So Protag. 320 d, Phileb. 21 c. Soph. 24 T e, Teyy&v tcov oo~ai rrepl ravra elai, Phdr. 239 b, tjj? S6ev dv k.t.X. (referring to avvovo-ia.) lb. 247 e, iv T(5 O i(TTLV OV OVTCdS. Phileb. 37 cl, to a to fj86pepov fjderai. Tim. 39 e, tg> o eari £a>ov. Critias 115 b, t6v oo-os §v\ivos (referring to Kapnos.) Legg. 761 e, irepl rovs hv empeXovvrai. •lb. 905 b, ixeivcov rap ovs k.t."\. 128 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 31—33. Phsed.0 75 a > * Ke i v0V opeyerai tov 6 iariv Xcrov. lb. 1 02 C, too OTi $>ai.du>v 6 Qaidccv iariv. Jelf, G. G. § 444, notices that " this idiom is peculiarly Platonic," adding however one or two instances from the Orators. § 31. b. Prefixed to Personal Pronouns, laughingly. Theset. 166 a, yeXcoTa 8rj tov epe iv rots Xoyois aniSei^e. Soph. 239 b, tov pev tolvvv ipe ye k.t.X. Phileb. 20 b, deivov npoaboKav ovbev del tov ipe. lb. 59 b, tov pev 8r) are kcu e/xe ml Topyiav Ka\ <&i.Xr)(3ov xph °"^X V ^ Xaipeiv eav. Lysis 203 b, irapa rivas tovs vpds ; Phdr. 258 a, kcu 69 eine, tov ai)Tov 8f] Xeycov, k.t.X. Jelf, G. G. § 452, says "this construction seems to be confined to the Accusative." § 32. c. When the Substantive has a plurality of Adjectives quali- fying it, the order is disturbed, with a view of relieving the heavi- ness of the term, in various ways. a. By postponing the Substantive, when one of the Adjectives ought to have followed it. Crat. 398 b, iv Tjj dpxaia Tjj rjpeTepa cpcovfj. lb. d, ttjv 'Attiktjv ttjv TraXaiav (pcovrjv. Symp. 213c, ttjv tovtov TavTi]v\ tt)V 6avp,aaTr]V KecpaXrjv. Legg. 732 e, TO OvrjTOV TTOLV £o>OV. Phsedo 100 a, tg>v aXXav anavTcov ovtcov [so Oxon. and seven other MSS.] — i. e. tS>v ciXXcov ovtcov dndvTcov. j8. By bringing in the Substantive before its time. Phileb. 43 a, tov Xoyov imcpepopevov tovtov. JjBgg. 659 d, tov vtto tov vopov Xoyov opOov elprjpevov. lb. 79° c > T ^> v Tepi to. (70)/xara pvdoov Xe)(6evTcov. lb. 793 h, o vvv drj Xoyos rjplv inixvOeis. § 33. Upon these principles are to be explained the seeming anomalies which occur, in the Tragic Poets especially, in the collo- cation of Substantives with a plurality of epithets preceded by the Article. a. iEschyl. Cho. 496, (plXTorov to aov Kapa (for (p. mpa to oSv), Suppl. 9, alToyevr) tov (pvijdvopa ydpov (for ydpov tov Aip.6s £vvolkos (where Xipos is anticipated), Eum. 653, to fnjrpbs alp 6p.aip.ov (perhaps, for the alp! op.aip.ov might otherwise be regarded as virtually a single word, as in ^Eschill. iii. 78. p. 64, 6 yap puo-oTeKVOs, koi rraTrjp novrjpos, ovk av nore yivoiro Srjpaycoyos xpTjOTos, where Trarrjp TTOvqpos is for the purpose of the sentence a single word), Suppl. 349, rav Ik4tiv , ib. II99, rav yap.\lso3- vvxa Tvapdevov xp r }°~l l( i>§ ' v > Pind. 01. Y. 4, tclv aav ttoXlv . . . XaoTpocpov. Thuc. i. 96, 6 npcoTos (popos raxOeis, v. II, Trpo ttjs vvv dyopds ovo-rjs (these two from Jelf). The anomalies which remain unexplained are those in which a Possessive Pronoun is concerned, — in all the instances ip.6s. iEsch. Agam. I226, tw p.o\6vTi becnroTr] 'Ejlku. Soph. Aj, 57 2 > ° Xvp.ea>v epos, O. T. 1462, Talv §' dBXiaiv olnrprnv re rvapOevotv ipalv. Eur. Hipp. 683, Zevs 6 yewrjTap ip.6s. All that can be said in explanation of the exceptional form of these passages, is that they are exceptional in meaning. Generally, where there is a Possessive Pronoun attached to the Substantive, it is that which makes it definite ; here the Substantive is perfectly denned in its application inde- pendently of the Possessive Pronoun. § 34. d. Omitted with the former of two Substantives in regimen. Observe, that a different shade of meaning results from this devi- ation from the common form ; a shade of meaning which would be rendered equivalently by attaching the second Noun more loosely to the former. Rep. 395 c, Brjpiovpyovs iXevOepias ttjs rroXecos — 'artificers of freedom for the city.' Symp. 182 C, crvp. arona avrcp KGTa(paiveTai ttjs o-piKpoXoyias — 'a marvel in the way of minuteness.' 130 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 35—38. Crat. 391 b, 0p60Ta.Tr) rijs o-Ktyea>s — 'truest manner of viewing' — r) 6p6oTaTr) would have been ' the truest part of the view.' Hip. Ma. 282 a, v TrepiTex^rjcrei Ka\ tcov Tipcopicov aTOTviq, vi. 76, eVi tov Mr)8ov Tipcopia. Hdt. ii. 1 9, tov Trorapov Se (pvaios Trepi (cpvaios being a topic of enquiry). Different are addresses, as Legg. 662 c, do apio-Toi tcov dvBpcov, 817 a, do apio-TOL tcov gevcov, 820 b, co /3e\rtcrrot tcov 'eWtjvoov, where the Voca- tive supersedes the Article. § 35. e. Omitted with the latter of two Substantives in regimen. The meaning indicated by this peculiarity is the close union of the notions represented by the two Nouns. Symp. 187 C, iv avTrj TJ} cruoTacm app.ovl.as re fcai pvOpov. Cf. TllUC. iv. 92, to eo~)(aTOV dycovos. Hdt. i. 2 2, to eo~x aTOV «aKOv. § 36. Different is the case where the latter Substantive is the name of a country or of the inhabitants of a country or city ; for before such Nouns the Article is habitually omitted. This is worth observing, for the sake of precluding misapprehension of the con- struction, where there is a concurrence of Genitives. Phsedo 57 a ? °^ Te "Y^P T *° v "n'^tTcov 3>AiacriW ovdels imxcopid^ei to. vvv 'A6r)va£e — 'for neither of the Phliasians does any citizen,' &c. That is, <&\iao-la)v is governed by ovbeh tS>v ttoXltcov. Legg. 625 C, tt)v ty)s x^P as Trao-j;? KprjTrjs cpvaiv — where KprjTrjs is governed by x^P as pev vco ovbev Xpcopevov, Cf. ^Eschin. ii. 57- P- 35> o~Ke^racr6e $r) deivrjv dvaio~xwTiav dvdpcoTrov' also iii. 99. p. 67, kcu yap tovto av6pa>7ros 'idiov Kal ov koivov 7rotet, and 125- P- 7 J 5 lireibrj e< tov (pavepov rrjv TroXiv avBpcoiros ovk rjdvvaro a^Xac. § 39. h. (from J elf, Gr. Gr. § 459) "Tat-roV, Sdrepov, sometimes take the Article, as, their original Article being lost in the Crasis, they are regarded as simple words : Tim. 37 b, nepl to ravrov. Ibid. 6 tov Oaripov kvkXos. lb. 44 b, to re Odrepov koi to TavTOv" § 40. Idioms or Pronominal Words, Dialogue gives great occasion for the use of Pronouns, and Plato has imparted to his use of them a great appearance of freedom and variety. It is like a skilful chess-player's use of his pawns. A. Use of Neuter Pronoun to represent a sentence, or portion of a sentence. This has been treated of at length under the Accu- sative Case (§§ 15-23). § 41. B. Use of Plural Neuter Pronoun to express a singular fact. This usage contributes to the enrichment of the style ; firstly, by varying it ; and secondly, by representing the fact as a complex phenomenon, an aggregate of many parts, the sum of many con- stituents, the meeting-point of many relations. Tavra is so constantly thus used, that it is only remarkable in particular juxtapositions : — Protag. 323C, OTi pev ovv .... dirodexovTai k.t.X., TavTa Xeyco' otl 8e k.t.A., tovto croi peTa. tovto neipdcropai dnobel^ai. Symp. 173 C, el ovv del Kal vplv dirjyrjcracrdat, TavTa XPV iroietv. lb. I98 b, ovx oios t eaopai ovcf iyyvs tovtcov — where tovtcov = tov olos t eivai. lb. 204 b, "Epcora . . . peTa^v elvat crocpov Kal dpaOovs. alria §' avrco Kal tovtcov f) yevecrts. Phaxlo 62 d, Tax av olrjQetr) ratira, cpevKTeov eivai an 6 tov decrnoTov. S 2 132 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 42—44. Phsedo 105 d, ro p,r) de^opevov . . . tl vvv 8r) ravra [so OxOll. and Veil. II] chvopd£opev \ 'Avdpnov, evrai ttoXls e'ire Idicoral rives. Cf. AlltipllO vi. I. p. I41, rfiiarov . . . pr) yevecrBai K.r.X., Ka\ ev\6pevos av ris ravra ev^airo. .ZEscliin. ii. 1 66. p. 50, ravr' ecrrlv 6 npo- 86rr)s Ka\ ra rovrois opoia. And primarily Horn. II. viii. 362, Ovde rt rcov pepvrjrai, o oi p,dXa noXXdias vlbv Teipop,evov crcoevKov. § 42. Alrd. Phsedo 60 C, el evevorjcrev avra A'Ictcottos. Tot erepa, dp.o~7}.} Critias 109 b, ro pdWov aXkois TrpocrjKov, rovro erepovs avrois KraoSai, Ellthyphro 2 b, (A) ov yap eKelvo ye Karayvacropai, cos cry erepov [ye- ypa\j/aij. (B) Ov yap ovv. (A) 'AXXa o~e aXXos ; (B) Udvv ye. Phileb. 6 1 d, rjdovrj . . . erepas aXkr] . . . a.Kpt(3eo~repa. Politic. 262 a, ratv p.ev dvdpanrcov erepa tls eivat, rcov be av 8rjpla>v aX\r) rpov Kal rtov ciXXiov dp^cov Kal i-vvcopoaicov Kal araaeuyv. 134 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 47, 48. § 47. E. Uses of avros. a. Avro. The Neuter Singular of avrbs is used peculiarly in Apposition to express the essential nature of a thing, sometimes in the Platonic and sometimes in a more popular sense. Rep. 363 a, ovk avro biKaioavvrjv erraivovvra. So 472 C. Phsedo 65 d, (papev ri elvai bimiov avro fj ovdev; Protag. 360 e, ri ttot ear\v avro 17 apery. Crat. 411 d, avro rj vorjcris. In the more popular sense, but not in the Platonic, avrbs in Con- cord, and avro rovro in Apposition, are used also. E. g. Phileb. 62 a, avrrjs rrepl 8iKaioo~vvr)s. Symp. 199 d, avro rovro narepa. Phsedo 93 b, avro rovro . . . ^rvx^v. The remaining uses of avrbs are not exclusively Platonic. /3. avrbs in the sense of syjonte. The most noteworthy instances are with Semi-Impersonal Verbs, and will be found below (§ 99). y. avrbs in the sense of solus. Symp. 179 a, ovbels ovrco KaKos ovriva ovk av avrbs 6 "Epcos evBeov TTOLTjo-ete npbs dperfjv. lb. 187 C, ev pev ye avrfj rfj crvcrrdaei appovias re nal pvOpov ovbev XaXenov ra epcoriKa bcaytyvcoaKeiv. lb. 198 d, ra\r)6rj \eyeiv . . . , e£ avrav be rovroov ra KaWiara e/cXe- yopevovs cos evvpeireo-rara ridevai. Apol. 2 1 d, apiKpa riv\ avra rovrca o~op.ev Avrov evl Tpoirj yepa neaaepev, 332, AAA aye, p,i,p,vere ndvres, evKvrjuldes 'A^aioj, Avtov, etaoKev aarv fxeya Ylpid/JLoio eXcojxev. TllUC. iii. 8 1, ol 8e noXXol rcov iKercov 8ie(pdeipav avrov ev r<5 lepco dXXrjXovs, viii. 28, kol is rrjv MiXrjrov avrov <£t- Xlttttov KaOiardai. § 49. F. Use of eKe7vos. Instances occur frequently in Plato, in which the same object is designated successively, in the same sentence or contiguous sen- tences, by ovros or the oblique Cases of avros, &c, and eKelvos. This mobility of language serves as an index of the onward movement of the thought, and helps and incites the hearer (or us the readers) to keep pace with it. As new objects are brought into the centre of the field of observation, the objects which were just now full in front drop behind. (Two or three of the following instances are quoted by Stallbaum.) Phsedo 60 d, Xeye roivvv avra . . . 6Vt ovk eKeivcp (3ovX6p.evos . . . dvr'i- rexvos elvai eTTOLtjcra ravra. Here eKelvto is identical with avrco. lb. 68 e, CpufiovfxevGi erepcov rjdoveov o~Tepy)6r\vai, kcu emdvp-ovvres eKel- vcov, aXXcov dne'xovTai vrr aXXcov Kparovjxevoi. The eKelvai are identically the erepai. lb. 7 3 C, idv ris ri nporepov rj I8cbv rj aKovaas . . . , (if) fxovov eKelvo yvw, dXXd kcu erepov evvor)o~rj. lb. IOO b, el p.01 8l8a>s re Ka\ ^vyxtopels etvai ravra .... ^Konei 8r) ra egrjs i/teivois. Cebes' answer has intervened, and Socrates refers in eneivois to the same things which he had just called ravra. lb. 106 b, apnov p.ev to 7repi.rr6v pr) ylyvecrdni ernovros tov apnov, &cnrep a>p.oX6yr]rai, drroXopevov 8e avrov dvr eKelvov apnov yeyovevai. The avrov and eKelvov both refer identically to rb irepirrov, avrov becoming eKelvov as apnov is brought forward. lb. 1 1 1 b, rds 8e topas avrols Kpdaiv e^etw roiavrrjv, wore eKeivovs dvoaovs elvai Kai XP^ov £fjv 7roXv nXelco ra>v ev6dbe — where avrols fades into eKelvovs as mention ra>v evBdbe approaches. Crat. 430 e, £ei|ai avrcp, dp p,ev rvxi}, eKelvov elKova. Laches 186 b, e'i ris r)p£)V . . . e^ei . . . enidelgai rives 'A6r)vala>v . . . 81 eKelvov 6p,oXoyovp.evs dyadol yeyovaaiv. Politic. 277 G, rcov OTot^eiW eKaarov ev rals ftpaxvrdrais Kai pdcrrais ra>v crvXXa(Sa>v Ikovcos diaiaddvovrai, Ka\ rdXrjdr) (ppd^eiv irepi eKeiva 8waro\ ylyvovrai .... ravra de ye ravra ev aXXais dp.(piyvoovvres 136 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 50—52. k.t.X. The €Ke7va gives notice that our attention is to be pre- sently turned to ravra ravra ev aWais. Cf. Ar. Eth. IX. i. 4, hv yap beopevos Tvyxdvei, tovtois Kai 7rpoo~ex €t * KciKeivov ye x^P lv tuvtcl dmaei — where ckclvov is identical in refer- ence with the preceding tovtois, — and more capriciously, X. ix. 1 6, eVi to KaOokov jSaStcrreoy elvai do^etev av, ko.ko.vo yveopicrTeov cos ivbe)(€Tai, etprjTai yap otl nep\ TodO' at eVtcrT^/xai — where first eKewo and then tovto refer to to Ka&okov. § 50. G. Uses of tis (indefinite). In the sense of ' a particular this or that,' tis is made to contri- bute to give liveliness and variety to the language. Thus a. In illustrations tis gives the force of ' for instance/ or rather the French l par exemple.' Symp. 199 d, el [epcos] prjrpos twos rj 7raTp6s ecrTi. Phsedo 66 C, civ Twes vocroi 7rpoarTrecr(do~w. Phdr. 230 d, OaXkov rj Tiva mpnov npoaeiovTes. Hip. Ma. 292 a, deo-7r6TT]s tis o~ov 6 avdpcoiTos io-Ti l § 51. (3. Or it draws the attention away from the particular illustration given to the kind of notion intended by it, — thus soften- ing the effect of it. Phdr. 2 6 1 C, el pr) Yopylav Neo~Topd Tiva KoracrKevd^eis, rj Tiva Qpaav- paxov T€ Kal Qe68copov 'oSucrtre'a. Phileb. 16 C, Bid tivos TlpoprjOews. Cf. .ZEsch. Agam. 55? vwaros 6° atoov rj tis 'A7r6XKcov rj TLav k.t.\. Ar. Kan. 912, 'A^tAXea tlv r) Niofirjv k.t.X. § 52. y. In enumerations it has the force of ( this or that :' but, specially, added (capriciously, as one might say) to one member of the enumeration, it serves the purpose of creating variety, which in enumerations Plato specially affects for the purpose of keeping the attention alert. Symp. 203 a, 6 . . . 7repl Te%vas rj xtipovpylas Tivas [o-o0oy] {3dvavo~os. Phsedo 65 C, pr)Te aKor) pryre o^ns prjre dXyrjbcbv prjbe tis r)bovr), [So Hermann from Oxon.] Apol. 27 d, el oi balpoves Oecov 7raldes elai v66oi Tives r) eK vvpcbcov rj %k twcqv aWcov. Phdr. 235 C, rj nov 2a7T liXavdraL Kal TapdrTeTai k.t.X., axe tolovtcov icpaTTTopevt] — where tolovtcov is a Substitute for liXavcopevcov Kal TapaTTopevcov. Symp. 208 d, vnep dpeTrjs ddavaTov Kal ToiavTrjs do^rjs. Legg. 7 2 3d, ovde yap acrfxaTOs 7ravTos del to tolovtov dpav — where ao-paTos is actually governed by t6 tolovto 8pav, because this is the substitute for npoTLdevai irpooipLov in the foregoing sentence : cf. Symp. 210 b, quoted above (§ 17). § 55. This Idiom extends to other kindred Pronouns. Rep. 507 b, TToXXd KaXd Kal 7roXXd dyaOd Kal exaora ovtcos — where ovtcos personates noXXd. Legg. 853 b, vopodeTelv ndvTa oTrocra vvv peXXopev tovto 8pav — where tovto dpav represents els 8Lmo-Tas ayeiv or the like, implied from Tjv Set Xapfidveiv avTO Tipcoplav Kal t'lvcov 7tot€ SiKacTTcov Tvyxdveiv preceding. 138 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ s 6, 57. Cf. Hdt. ill. 82, dvbpbs yap evbs tov dpicrrov ovdev apeivov av (paveir)' yvonprj yap roiavrr] xpeco/zei/09 — i.e. dpl(TTrj. Ar. Eth. I. X. II, vndp^ei hr) to ^Tovpevov tg> ev&aipovi Kal eaTai 81a. /3iou toiovtos — i.e. evBalpcov, and VIII. iv. I, 6poia>s §e Kal r) diet to xpWipov' Kal yap toiovtol dXXrjXois oi dyadol — i. e. XPW^ 01 - Add IX. vii. 6, T)bio-Tov de to /caret ttjv evepyeiav, Ka\ (piXrjTov opotcos. Thuc. ii. 49, Kai 7roXXol tovto Kal ebpacrav els (ppiaTa — i. e. eppi^av crCpas ovtovs, and iv. 64, Kal tovs aXXovs BiKaiS) raiiTo pot iroirjo-ai, Ifi vpa>v al)Ta>v Kal pr) vrrb to>v noXepicov tovto -naQelv — i. e. r)cradcr6ai. Ar. Eth. IV. i. II, CptXovvTai 8e 01 eXevOepioi' (bcpeXipoi, yap, tovto §' iv Tjj 86o~ei — where tovto stands for wcpeXipoi elo-i, V. vi. 5, Bib ovk ecbpev apxeiv avOpanrov, otl eavT

dooperrat, rj oTibr)TTOTe aXXo. § 56. Idioms of Verbs. A. Mood. a. Indicative Constructions. a. The meaning assigned to Indicative Imperfects, Aorists, or Pluperfects, with el, depending on a similar Apodosis with av, holds equally (1) when they depend on a simple Infinitive. Crito 5 2 C, igqv aoi v ae "A 16 " Xrjaai. Phsedo I08 d, el Kal rymo~Tdpr]v, 6 ftios pot doKel . . . ovk e^apKelv. Soph. 246 d, [SoKel helv\ pdXio~Ta pep, e'l 7177 BvvaTov f)v, epyco fieXTiovs TroieXv. Legg. 79° C, oIkcIv \£vp(pepei\, el 8vvaTov rjv, olov del nXeovTas. § 57. (2) In clauses connected by a Relative Adverb or Pronoun with an Indicative of unfulfilled past contingency. — The prin- ciple of Sequence here illustrated has not been observed except in the case of Indicatives following Relative Adverbs : whereas (besides the other outlying instances which come before us here) the principle applies equally to the Optative (see below, § 72). Euthyd. 304 e, a^iov y rjv aKOvcrai k.t.X., tva rjKovvas k.t.X. Crito 44 d, el yap a>ica k.t.X. Charm. 1 7 1 e, roOro 8' rjv av, ov iTno-r^p^v elyov — ' this would have been that of which they had knowledge.' In the next instance Iva heads a second clause in a different meaning. Meno 89 b, ovs . . . dv icpvXdrropev, Iva pr)8e\$ avrovs 8ie(p6eipev, aXX' eVeiS?) dcpLKoivTO els ttjv rjkudav xprjcripoi ylyvoivro. In the next, onus loses its power over the second of two clauses, and the meaning is supplied by av. Legg. 959 C, ££>vti edei (3orj6elv, divas 6 tl diKaioraros a>v Ka\ oa-iaraTos e{j) re £a>v ko\ reXevTrjcras dripLcap-qros av iylyvero. Instances need not be multiplied : as an illustration, we may notice in conclusion the virtually but not formally identical con- struction in Soph. El. I02 2, Ei#' axpeXes k.t.X. irdvra yap tcaTeipydcra) — where consequently we need not suppose an ellipse of av. The usage begins with Homer : cf. II. vi. 348, *Ev0a ue ypa(pT)pa,o~iv 77 roOro, .... enl be toIs ovopaariv ov. The Indicative is also used with ottos fir). Meno 77 a ? 07T( °s h-V °^X ol ° s t ' ^o~op.at. Phsedo 77 k, evearrjKev o vvv dr) Kefir/s e'Xeye . . . . , onas pr) . . . . 81a- o-KeddvvvTai r) tyvxq. § 60. With ov p.i). Passing by the common use (Aorist), we have the Present with ov fxr) in Rep. 341 C, ov pr) olos t rjs. Phileb. 48 d, ov p,r) BvvaTos to. Cf. Isseus viii. 24. p. 71, ov pr) ela-iys. [So Bekker's edition: the Zurich editors give elo-ei els from Bekker's conjecture]. Xen. Cyrop. VIII. i. 5, ov p,r) bvvrjTai. Soph. O. C. 1024 (some MSS.) ov pr) Trore . . . eTTevx^VTai. The following is only a variation of the use with ov p.r), ttoXXov del standing as a mere Adverb for ov. Gorg. 5!7 a > TfoWov ye del prjTTOTe tls roiavTa epydarjTai. § 61. c. Conjunctive Subjunctive Constructions. The following alone need be mentioned. a. After o-Koirelv, 6pav, and the like, with p,r). (This is as it were the Oratio Obliqua of b. a.) Phdr. 260 a, o-KOirelv p,r) tl Xe'ycocri. Gorg. 512 d, opa pr) aXXo ti to yevvaiov kcll to dyaBbv r). § 62. This use is frequent in the Indicative : e. g. La. 179 b, opoapev prj NiKt'as cu'erai ti Xeyeiv. §§ 63—65.] VERBS. 141 Soph. 235 a, r)io m Td£opev en pr) Tvyxdvei k.t.\. Ly. 2l6 C, aKe\j/d>pe6a fir) . . . \av6dvei k.t.\. lb. 2l8 d 3 (pofiovpai . . . fir) . . . 4vTeTVxr) is therefore chosen for the sake of expressing more perfect courtesy, in contexts such as those just given, which relate to the conduct of the dialogue. § 65. 8. With os av. The different shades of meaning presented by 6? with the Indica- tive and os av with the Conjunctive are parallel with those just pointed out in the case of el and idv after o-Koiteiv. The meaning of hs dv bears upon a doubtful reading in Phsedo 96 a, presently to be mentioned. Ly. 217c, olov av § to napov, TOiavTa earl — where olov dv 17 leaves it quite undetermined of what kind to napbv is. Phsedo 98 e, kpo\ j3i\Tiov BedoKTai iv6dt)e Ka6r)a6ai, Kai biKaiorepov irapapivovTa virix ieLV T l v StiHyp r)v dv neXevcrcoo-i, Here it is not that r)v dv KeAeuo-wo-t has any future force, for the penalty had 142 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 66, 67. been awarded : but it gives the meaning * that it is right to stay and abide the penalty, whatever it be, which they have awarded.' Phsedo 96 a, av t'l croi xpfjaifiov (fyalvrjTai &V av Xey&>, Tvpbs ttjv 7T€t6a> nepl hv av \eyrjs xPW eL (taking for granted here 6 the reading 5>v av \eygs) — 'you can apply it to satisfying yourself with respect to your objections, whatever they be.' It is true that the objections had preceded ; but this only makes the instance parallel to the last : and what a>v av intimates is, that Socrates does not wish to bind Cebes to the precise case he has stated. As just before he had said igemTr)&es noXXaKis dvaXapfidvco, tva fir] ti Siacpvyy fjpds, ci re n (HovXei 7rpoo~6jjs fj d napovTi ovt dcpeXelv ovre irpoaBeivai beofxai, — he now, by giving a general turn to the sentence, leaves a loophole open for future qualification. § 66. d. Optative Potential Constructions. a. Without av, expressing simple possibility. I je 8S* 777 c > Kpos a tis airavTa fiXeyjsas 8ca7roprj(reie. Euthyd. 298 e, (A) Ovkovv tov aravTov irarepa TV7TT€is ; (B) IIoXv p.evTot biKaioTepov tov vperepov irarepa TV7TTOip,i. Gorg. 492 b, tl rfj akrjBelq a'lcrx iov Kai mniov evq ; Phsedo 88 C, prj ovdevos a£ioi eipev Kpirai, rj Ka\ tcl 7rpay/xara avra amo-Ta jj — where the Optative, as distinguished from the Con- junctive, denotes a transitory as opposed to a permanent contingency. § 67- /3. Without av, this being understood from a preceding coordinate sentence. Rep. 360 b, ovdels av ykvovro, as 86£eiev, ovtods ddapavrivos. Cf. Thucyd. vi. 89, drjpoKpariav .... ovbevos av \€ipov [yiyva>o~Koip.i], ocrca Ka\ \oidoprjo~aip.i. Symp. 196 C, KparolvT av virb epa>TOs, 6 be Kparoi. Phsedo 99 a, « . . . Xeyot, . . . dXrjOrj av Xeyoi' a>s p.ivroi . . . ttoiG), . . . 7roXXr) Ka\ p.aKpa pa6vp.la eirj tov Xoyov. [So Oxon. and three other MSSJ Charm. 174 e, (A) . . . aqbeXol av rjpds. (B) H Kai vyialveiv noiol ; 6 It is the reading of Oxon. and to be preferred. So Hermann and one other good MS. But perhaps the Zurich editors, the other reading — &v \{yu$— ought §§ 68-70.] VERBS. 143 Rep. 382 d, (A) noTepov 8ia to p.rj elbevai ra 7ra\cua dcpopoicov dv yjsevdoiTO ; (B) . . . (A) 'AXXa debicos tovs e'xdpovs -^evdoiro ; § 68. y. With dv in clauses where the dv adheres closely to the Verb, and not to the Relative Pronoun or Particle by which the clause is introduced. Symp. 187 d, as dv Koo~pia>Tepoi yiyvoivTO ...» Set xapi&aOai. lb. 190 C, hoizco pioi e\ew pj]xavr]v, cos dv eXev k.t.A. Plldr. 230 b, aKprjv e^et rrjs av6rjs, cos av evcodecrrarov napex 01 tov T07T0V. Gorg. 453 C, tva ovtco Trpotrj, cos paXicrr av rjplv Karacpaves ttolol. Hip. Ma. 283 e, o&x olos t rjo~6a TreWeiv, cos . . . av . . . eVtSiSotei/. Phgedo 82 e, 81 eTTidvplas £cttiv, cos av /xaXiora avros 6 8e8epevos av\- Xrj7rra)p eir;. Protag. 318 e, ev(3ov\ta . . . okcos av apiara Bioacot. Ly. 207 e, TvpoQvpovvraL ottcos av evBaipovoirjs. Crat. 395 a, Kivdvvevet toiovtos tis elvai 6 ' ' Kyapepvcov olos a av 86£eiev ovtqZ diaTrovelo-dai. lb. 398 e, ouS' el tl olos t av elr\v evpelv, ov avvTeivco. Legg. 700 e > rjSovr) 8e rjj tov x aL P 0VT0 $> e "" e fiekriav e'lre x iE ' l P aiV av e'lrj tis, KplvoiTo opBoTaTa. Cf. Alltipho i. 17. p. H3, ifiovkeveTo 77 avdpcoTros ottcos av avTols to (pdppaKov boLT], noTepa rrpb beiirvov rj curb 8e'nrvov. It may be noted, that these clauses are not Subjunctive, and that this difference marks off these instances from such as Rep. 412 d, (pikoi, . . . otov oIolto K.r.A., Legg. 66 1 C, eXaTTOv [io~Ti K.anbv\ av cos dXlyicTTov 6 toiovtos xp^ uov ^ 7rt C4 r l) which must be separately accounted for. § 69. 8. With av, equivalently for the Future. (S 1 ) Following a Future in the Protasis. Phsedo 107 C, 6 klv8vvos vuv 8rj (peXipoi avdpes av elev, . . . e'vrrep elev. Rep. 54 J a ? as av yzvoiro, e'inep wore yiyvoiro, doKels ev elprjKevai. Politic. 295 C, etrrapev . . . larpov piXXovra . . . dneaeadai . . . av^vov, as o'loiro, xpovov, av edeXeiv K.r.X. ; Cf. Horn. II. V. 214, an epelo mprj rdpoi dXXorptos (pas, El pr) eya rdhe ro£a (paeiva iv rrvpl deirfv, Od. xii. 1 06, pr) av ye KelQi ri>x ois > ore poij3dr)aeiev, ib. 1 1 4, Tr)v de k dpvvaiprjv ore pot aivoiro y eraipovs, XXI. 1 1 4, Ov k4 poi dxvvpeva rdde bapara irorvia prjrrjp Aewrot ap aXXco lova or eya KaroinaOe Xiirolprjv. § 74. j3. Under principal Indicative sentence, when the dependent Verb is intended to belong to all time — the Subjunctive sentence being (0 1 ) Relative. Legg. 759 D ? °' s M Ka6earr]K0i mraarareov \ear\v\ lepeas. §§ 75—77-1 VERBS. 145 Cf. Hom. II. V. 407, ov drjvaios, os ddavaToicri pdxoLTO, 0(1. vi. 286, ¥Lai S' dXXr] vepecrco, rjris roiavrd ye pe£oi, iii. 3 1 9, 'Ek tcov dvdpconcov, oBev ova eXnoiTo ye 6vp.co. Andoc. iii. I. p. 23, toIs epyois d(p' fav r) elprjvrj yevono evavriovvrai. § 75. (/3 2 ) Adverbial. Rep. 410 C, ov% ov eveizd Tives o'iovtcil Ka6iardcriv, Iva . . . OeparrevoivTo. Euthyd. 296 e, oi>x i'x® vp.1v ncos dp.(pL0-(3rjT0Lrjv . . . ottcos ov ndvra €7TicrTap.ai. Gorg. 448 e, ovde\s epcoTa, iroia tls e'lr) r) Topyiov Te'xvrj. [So most if not all of the MSS.] Ale. I. 135 a, Tvpavvovvri Be, cos prjbe iirnikrjTTOi tls ai/Tco, tl to avp,- (3r)o~6p.evov ; Cf. Horn. Od. xiv. 374, 'EXOepev OTpvvrjo-LV, or dyyeXirj iro6ev eXdoL, xvii. 250, ^A^co rrjX y l6dpr)o~cop.ev k.t.X. Phsedo 9ia, ov yap oncos . . . 86£-ei dXrjSrj eivai 7Tpo6vprj6r)crop.ai, el p.r] e'lr) ndpepyov. Cf. the same phrase, but under an Infinitive sentence, Rep. 411 e; and Ar. Eth. Nic. V. iv. 5, XeyeTai cos dnXcos elirelv eVt toIs tolovtols, kov el p.r) tlctlv oIkcIov ovop.a e'lr], to Kepdos. Cf. Horn. Od. vii. £I, OapcraXeos yap dvr)p iv ndcnv dpe[vcov Jf Epyoio-iv TeXeOei, el nai no6ev aXXodev eXOoi. Ar. Eth. Nic. I. iv. 7, el tovto (fialvoiTO dpKovvTcos, ovdev 7rpocr8er)(rei tov Blotl. Lysias XXxiv. 6, tl tco TrXr)6ei 7repiyevr)o~eTaL, el 7roir)o~aip,ev k.t.X. ; § 77- y- Under an Infinitive sentence — which necessarily leaves the time of the Dependent Verb, as under the last head, undefined. Charm. 164 a, el doKel tls co(peXip.a Ka\ eavTco iroielv Kai eKelvcp ov Icoto. Lysis 212 d, el 6 eTepos (piXol, (plXco eivai ap.(pco. Theset. 164 a, del ye p,evTOL [tovto (pdvat], el o~cocToip.ev tov 7rpoa6e Xoyov. U 146 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 78, 79. Phsedo 95 d, 7rpoo~r)Keiv (j>rjs (po^elaOai, el pf) dvorjTOS e'lrj, tg> pf) elboTi. Protag. 316 c, o'Urai tovto yeveadai, el o~o\ gvyyevoiTO. Legg. 927 C, top vovv, m ml fipaxvs eveir}, npoaexovra evepyeTelv. Phsedo 85 d, KLvbvvevovra btanXevo-ai top fi'iov, el pfj ns bvvaiTo ds exovra . . . , as ovk eivai k.t.X. Symp. 213 a, 7rapax<»>prio~ai top ~2a>KpaTi] cos eKelvov KaBl£eiv. Euthyd. 306 e, Kai pot boKel . . . oXXokotos etvai, &s ye npos ve TaXrjBes elprjadai. Apol. 29 c, dcplepev o~e, e(f>' are prjKeri (piXocrocpelv. Phdr. 269 d, to bvvavBai ao-re dycoviaTrjv TeXeov yeveo~Bai. Protag. 338 C, dbvvaTOV vp.lv wore UpcoTayopov Tovbe aoTepov Tiva eXeadai. Politic. 295 a, imvos yevovr av ... cncne eKao-Tco ■npoo'TaTTeiv to 7rpoo m - tJkov. Pll8edo 103 e, eo-fiv apa irepl evia tSuv toiovtcov, cao-re prj povov avro to elbos dgiovcrBat k.t.X. Cf. Thuc. i. 2, vepopevoc to, aWcov e/cacrrot, 6o~ov dnogfjv. And likewise §§ 8o— 82.] VERBS. 147 Soph. Ant. 303, XpbVw ttot egeirpat-ap cos dovvai dUrjp, Aj. 378? Ov yap yevoir dp ravO* ottcos ov\ &0 ^X elv i 9 2 4> *® s KaL 7ra P > fX^poTs agios Opfjvcov rvx^lv. § 80. g. Infinitive Uses. a. Future following otos Te, Swards, &C. Phaedo 7 3 a ? 0VK ov oloi r i)aav tovto Troiijo-eiP. Phdr. 2*77 d, ov rrpoTepop 8vvar6v rexyrj eaeo-Qai. Cf. Lysias xxvii. 2. p. 178, drrore av doKcocriP aiVioi elpai ^/T}(pte7cr3ai vpds. Isocr. xiii. 2. p. 291, i)pup ivdel£eo~6ai fiovXopepos. [The Zurich editors give epdelgaarOai.] § 81. j3. Aorist equivalent in meaning to Future. Symp. 193 d, eXTridas 7rapex €Tat \r}pds\ evbalpopas noiTJarai. Euthyd. 278 C, eqbaTrjp ernbeigacrOai rrjv TrpoTpeTTTiKTjv <$r)p\ TeXevrrjdrjpai arrapTa, iv. 2 53> *Q,poo~a pi) p.ep rrplp . . . dvaqjrjvai, ix. 496, cpdpep avToO' okecrOai. Thuc. i. 26, TTpoeirrov . . . as 7roXep,iois xph ~ a0 ~Q a h 8l } cIkos 'Adrj- vaiovs . . . p.r]Te ttj yij bovXevaai (so with ovk cIkos iii. IO, iv. 85, viii. 46), iii. 46, Tiva o'leaBe fjvTiva ovk apewop 7rapao~Kevdo~aardai \ V. 22, ol be . . . ovk. eqbao-av 6V£ao*#ai, ii. 3, epopiaap eT?iBep.ePOi pad las KpaTtjaai, iv. 63, to eXXnres . . . iKavoos vop.lo~avTes elpxBrjpai, i. 126, tg> KvXcovi . . . dvelXev 6 Beds, KaTaXaftelv tt)v aKpdiroXiv. JEsch. Pers. 173, tcrBi . . . pi) ae 8ls (ppdaai, Agam. 1262, eirev- X^Tai ... dvTiTio-ao-dai (not 'prays' but 'boasts'). Soph. Phil. 1329, rravkap 'IcrBi Trjade pi] ttot evrux^lv Ndcov, Aj. 1082, Tavrrjv vopi^e tt)v ttoXip XP° V{ ? noT* 'E£ ovplodv dpap.ovaau els fivBbp rreo-elv (not aor. of custom, as Herm. and Linw.). Eur. Andr. 311, 2e pep yap ^u^eis deds fipeTas o-£>o~ai roSe. Hdt. i. 53> rrpoXe- yovaai . . . p,eydXr]V dpxi)v piv KaraXvaai, VI. 62, tcl dXXa e(pt] KaTaiveo-ai. Lysias xiii. 15. p. 131, ovk ecpaaav eTnTpeyjsai, ib. 32. p. 132, ov yap olpal ae egapvop yevevBai, XXxiii. 2, rjyrjo-aTO top ivOdbe o-vXXoyov dpxr)v yevevBai. [So Bekker : the Zurich editors have yevi)o-ecr6ai.~\ Ar. Nub. 35, evexvpdo~ao-6a'i (pao-tp. § 82. y. Present equivalent in meaning to Future. Crito 52 C, a>poX6yeis KaO' i)pds 7roXi.Teveardai. Gorg. 520 e, pi) (pdpai avpsftovXevetP, eav pi) tis avrco dpyvpiop 8i8a>. U 2 148 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§ 83. Politic. 264 e, 77 ovk o'Ut Kal tov d(ppov€0~Tarov . . . boi-a£(iv ovrcos ', Cf. Thuc. iv. 24, r}\iri£ov . . . xetpaxra 7rpoo~eKeivTO, vofxiaavres (pevyeiv re avTov Kal KaraXafiovTes fiiacpdelpeiv, 2*J, otl . . . avrovs iv6[ii£ov ovk£ti Antipho ii. A. a. 5. p. 115, rbv p,*i£ova €7rl8ogov ovra iraaxeiv. Isseus ii. 32, wpoaapev ev iroiiiv dXXrjXovs. Isocr. vi. 69. p. 130, prj yap o'Uad 1 avrovs peveiv. [So Bekker's edition : the Zurich editors give peviiv from Bekker's conjecture.] § 83. 8. Infinitives following certain Verbs (of saying, thinking, &c.) sometimes contain a Dictative force. They are in fact Infini- tives Oblique of the Deliberative Potential. In consequence of this force of the Infinitive in these cases, the governing Verb gets a different and a stronger meaning: to ' say' becomes to 'recom- mend' or to 'pray:' to 'think' becomes to 'think fit/ or to 'give counsel.' But it is through the Infinitive, as being an Infinitive of the Potential, that the meaning of the governing Verb is strengthened; and not vice versa. Protag. 346 b, 'Sip.eovidrjs rjyqa-aro Kal avros . . . rvpavvov . . . e7rai- veo-ai — 'thought fit' — lit. 'thought it-was-incumbent-on-him- self-to-praise.' Crat. 399 d, ^n>XV p ^yeis iirio-Keyjsao-Oai. Hip. Ma. 291 a, e/101 boKel . . . rjpas paWov (pdvai k.t.X. — not 'that we say' but ' that we should say.' Phsedo 83 e, 01 diKaicos (piXopLaBeTs Koo-pwi r elarl Kal dvdpeloi ovx %>v ol 7to\XoI eveKa cfracri. Here the meaning is not ' for the reason which the world attributes to them/ but ' for the reason for which the world says people ought to be [temperate].' That is, (pao-l is followed by Koap,lovs elvai understood, and this etvai contains the Dictative force. lb. 104 e, 6 Tolvw ekeyov opiaacrBai — 'what I proposed that we should define.' Cf. Horn. II. iii. 98, (ppoveca 8e diaKpivOfjpevai rjbr) 'KpyeLovs Kal Tpmas ('I think good'). Thucyd. iii. 44, voplfa nepl tov fieWovros Tjpds (3ov\evea0ai, iv. 86, ovde do~a(prj rrjv e\ev6epiav vopl£a> eVt- cpepeiv, vii. 42, voptaas, ovx °^° v Te clvai . . . , ovde nadelu oirep NiKias enaOev (where the Dictative force is possessed by the second Infinitive only), ii. 42, to dfivveo-Bat ko.1 iradeiv pdKkov rjyrja-dpevoi tj to k.t.A., V. 40, rjyovpevoi, oirrj av ^vyxtopy, rjo-vxlav §§ 84, 85.] VERBS. 149 eyeiv, l. 40, dvTeiiropev, tovs npoo-fjKOVTas £vppdxovs avrov riva KoXd£eiv, V. 46, Xeyoav . . . top noXepov dva(BdXXeo~6ai, iv. 99, dire- KplvavTo . . . d-n-cxpepecrOai ra acperepa (' answered, Carry off your dead'), vi. 13, \f/r]Tovs £vpQbepeo~6ai. ./Esch. Clioepll. 143, Ae-ya) ('I pray') (pavfjvai o~ov, 7rdrep, Tipdopov. Soph. Trach 543? 'Eycb de 6vpova6ai pev ovk eiricFTapai (' do not know that one ought to be angry'). § 84. e. Infinitive as a Noun Substantive, without the Article. Symp. I94 d, ovbev dioiaei, oirrjovv otiovv yiyveadai. So Rep. 523 e. In Apposition. Apol. 23 a, ovopa 8e tovto Xeyecrdai, croqbos eivai. Protag. 323 b, 6 eKel o-a>7ra. The to dpa k.t.X. (taking for granted the reading here) is the justification of the expression as Oavpaaias. [to is the reading of Oxon. and one other MS.] 7 If an opinion must be hazarded as to the force of this Accusative, it must be that it is Causal. See § 18 above. 150 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 86, 87. Cf. Antipho i. 28. p. 114, 6avp,d£v rrjs 7rpoaipecrea>s eveicev, to TTpoeXto-Qai. Here the Infinitives justify the warmth of the expressions Bavpdfa and agiov Io-tiv. Symp. 204 a, avTo yap tovto, eori ^aXe7roi' dpadla, to prj ovtcl KaXbv KayaObv prjde (ppovipov hoKeiv avr<5 etvai iicavov. Here to pr] k.t.X. contains the reason for iarl xaXenbv dpadia : but, put as it is not in the common Causal form, but under this apologetic form, it also justifies the tone of impatience in which dpaBia has been mentioned. § 86. 77. The Accusative of the Infinitive, expressing the result, in negative clauses, is common. Apol. 36 a, to pev \ir] dyavaKTciv . . . aXXa re pot noXXa. £vfi(3d\- Xerai k.t.X. Phsedo 74 d, n evftei tl ckcivov to p.rj toiovtov clvai) [So Hermann without MS. authority.] This use would seem to be confined to negative clauses. Lach. 190 e, iyto a'lTios . . . to o~e a7roKpivao-Bai p,r) tovto o biavoov- fievos rjpofirjv dXX* eTepov, is no exception, since the negative is but postponed. The Genitive of the Infinitive expresses the cause or purpose primarily, rather than the result, in both affirmative and negative clauses. § 87. B. Voice. a. " Third sense of Middle Voice." The ascription to the Middle Voice of this meaning, — 'to get a thing done by another,' — is proved to be erroneous, and that in its favourite exemplification (bibdo-Keo-Oai), by some passages in the Meno. Meno 93 d, fj ovk aKrjKoas oTt Qepio-TOKXrjs KXeocpavTov tov vlbv iTTitka pAv ididdgaTO dya66v ; and, just after, inaihevo-aTO — where the whole point of the passage lies in the education of the son by the father himself distinctively. On the other hand, we have Meno 94 c, QovKvbibrjs av bvo vWis e0pe\jfe . . ., Kai tovtovs iiraidevae ra re aXXa ev Kai inaXaiaav KaXXio~Ta ^Adrjvaicov' tov p,ev yap SavBia i'duKe tov be Evdwpco — where the Active iiraidevo-e is as distinc- tively used of the father's getting his sons taught by others. Similarly ib. b, d, ididage. § 88.] VERBS. 151 As the favourite example, Sibdo-iceo-Qai, thus 8 falls to the ground, so do the rest. Aaveifco-Oai, for instance, is l to take a haveiovj as bavel^iv is ' to give a bavelov ' that is, the general meaning of the Verb being * to deal in davela,' the Middle means ' to deal in them for oneself.' So it is with other Verbs expressing transactions to which there must be two parties : XP9- V ano ^ XPW^ 1 express the active and passive side of ' dealing in oracles/ So, rather differently, * bringing a man to justice' becomes, on the disinterested side, the office of the judge, Kpiveiv, and, on the interested side, the office of the prosecutor, KpiveaQm. The fact is, that the Active Voice is quite as susceptible as the Middle of the meaning ' to get a thing done by another ; ' neither Voice, however, by any proper inherent force, but in virtue solely of the common principle that " qui facit per alium facit per se." Examples of the Active Verb having this meaning may be found in iEsch. Ag. 594, "Qpa>s & %6vov, — where Clytsemnestra attributes to herself the same action which was in v. 87 described by the words TrepiTrefnrTa OvocrKivels, — in Hdt. iii. 80, [dvrjp rvpavvos\ KreiVei anpL- tovs, &C § 88. b. There is a genuine inherent sense of Verbs, which deserves more distinct notice than it has received. It stands half- way between the Middle and the Passive. ' To allow oneself to be/ ' to expose oneself to be,' ' to get oneself,' — subjected to this or that, may be designated the Semi- Middle sense. The following are examples. Crito 48 d, egdyovres Kai egayopevoi — ' allowing ourselves to be carried across the border/ Phsedo 67 a, dvampTrkapeOa — 'allow ourselves to be infected.' And so Hip. Ma. 291 a. Soph. 253 b, [v aet, C. Dionys. 14. p. 1287? fjyovpevoi delv iXarrovadat tl Kai (rvyxcopelv. Add (rrecpavovcrOai, so common in Pindar (e. g. 01. vii. 15, Nem. vi. 19) for ' winning a crown.' Hence also the double sense of Verbals in -tos, as yvcovTos, from yiyvaaiceiv, 'known:' yvaaros, from yiyvaaKeaBai, 'capable of being known' (lit. 'allowing itself to be known'). And in privatives — aXvros, from Xveiv, ' unbroken ;' oKvtos, from Xveo-dat, * that does not allow itself to be broken,' ' unbreakable.' The same sense extends into Latin. Livy iii. 42, Natura loci ac vallo, non virtute aut armis, tutabantur, lit., 'let themselves be protected by the strength of their position' — i. e. 'were fain to let their natural and artificial defences protect them.' So Juv. xv. 157, defendier isdem Turribus, Virg. iEn. ii. 707, cervici imponere nostrse. So juris consultus is ' one who lets himself be consulted in matters of law.' § 89. C. Tense. A Dependent sentence following a Main Past Construction is not affected (in Tense or Mood) by the Tense of the Main Construc- tion in the following cases. a. When a fact contemplated in the Dependent clause as already extant continues so at the time of its being alluded to by the speaker. Phsedo 98 b, ditb drj 6avp,ao-TT]s iXnidos avSpa t<5 pev vS ovbev xp&pevov k.t.X. The fact of which Socrates had become aware was one which, with its consequence of disappointed hopes, still remained in full force at the time at which he was speaking. lb. 99 d, edoge Toivvv pot pera ravra, ineibr] dnelprjKa to, ovto. (Tkott&v, § 90-] VERBS. 158 k.t.X. The pursuit then already renounced had never since been resumed. Apol. 21 b, rjTropovv tL wore Xeyei. The judgment of the Oracle once uttered is regarded as remaining on record for all time. Phsedo 88 C, edoKovv . . . els dirtdTiav Kara{3aXelv . . . , fir) ovbevos agiot elpev Kptrai, rj Kai ret rrpdypara avra amarTa y. There are here two Dependent clauses : the former, expressing a transitory contingency, is affected by the Main Construction and thrown into Oratio Obliqua ; the second, expressing a hypothetical fact which if verified must be permanent, is not affected. Tim. 32 C, ^vvearrjo-ev 6 gvvitTTas . . . rdbe biavorjdeis, Trpcbrov pev Iva . . . reXeov . . . e«7, . , . en de Iva dyrjpcov ko.\ avocrov fj. Cf. Lysias i. 6. p. 92, eireibrj . . . yvvalita rjyayoprjv . . . efpvXaTTov .... e7T€idr) be poi naibiov yiyverai k.t.X, § 90. |8. When the event contemplated as future in the Dependent clause is still in the future at the moment of its being alluded to by the speaker. Apol. 17 a, eXeyov, cos XPV V v^ds evXafteiadat prj vn epov e^a7raTrjdj]Te — because the deception threatened was to be looked for in the speech which was now but begun. Symp. 193 e, 7rdvv av e(po{3ovpr]v, prj aTroprjacoai XoycoV . . . vvv be Spas 0app5>. At the moment at which this is said, the point of time when the contingency of dnoprjo-ai will be decided is still future. Apol. 29 C, ecprj . . . Xeycov npos vpds cos, el bia(pev£-oipr]V, fjbr/ av vpcov oi vlels bia(p6apr)crovTai. The reason why bia(pev{-oipr)v is affected by the Oratio Obliqua, though equally future with 8ia (TT€pai. X 154 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 91—93. § 91. The use of this construction is in Plato so carefully re- stricted to the cases just specified, that it would be unjustifiable to confound it with the simple irregular recurrence to the Oratio Recta, which is so common in other writers. Symp. 190 C, eftovXevoPTo o ri XPV avrovs 7roir}o~ai would be an exception to the rule, if xpv were an ordinary Verb. The rule seems to hold in Homer, II. v. 127, Od. iii. 15, and v. 23, and viii. 44, and xiii. 417, &c. Nitzsch (on Od. iii. 76) denies that the principle here pointed out is the true one. He points out two passages, II. v. 567 and xv. 596, as refuting it. But in both these (1) the reading varies between Optative and Conjunctive, and (2) in both two purposes are mentioned, so that if the Conjunctive is the right reading it may well have been adopted for the purpose of distinguishing the nearer and the remoter purpose. § 92. b. Imperfect Tense used for the Oratio Obliqua of the 'Prophetic Present.' Symp. 190 C, ovre yap 0770)9 diroKTeipaiep elx ov . . . 3 al Tipal yap avroTs Ka\ Upa ra irapa to>p dvOpdmrcov rjcpavifcro — where, just as ovk eixov is the Oblique Narration of the thought ovk exopep, 'they could not, they thought,' so r) dXovs pep yap ttjp ypafprjv rrjs pep ovcrlas jfdew eKarrjcropevos, rrjs de noKeoas Koi tov acoparos ovk eore- povprjp — ' I felt I could not be.' Andoc. i. 58-60. p. 8, cpopevs ovy avrcop iyipoprjp k.t.X. ravra de txdvra aKoncop evpio-Kop k.t.X. — where the o-Kon&p shews that *yw6\u\v means ' I felt I was on the way to become.' § 93. c. Aorist. a. Its meaning strongly exhibited by force of the construction in which it stands. Phdr. 249 a, al de aXXai, otop . . . TeXevTrjO-eao-i, Kpio~e P ,a eiraydyr], Tore eyepoPTO . . . XevKai. The Subjunctive construction with ap, not admissible with a past §§ 94—970 VERBS. 155 Tense, constrains us to see in the Aorist the expression of an action instantaneously complete, rather than of an action necessarily past. § 94. 0. Its meaning strongly exhibited by force of the context. Phsedo 88 d, irfj 6 2aKpa.Tr]? p.errj\6e top \6yov ', lit. ' overtook' (same metaphor as 89 e, « , . . . pe biacpevyoi [Hermann from first hand of Oxon.] 6 \6yos). Cf. Pind. 01. vi. 62, ^rdWaaiv re p.iv. Antipho ii. A. a. 3. p. 115, eW av diiox^fj, 'until he is caught.' lb. 108 C, [37 [lev] (pcpzrai els tt)v avrfj rrpenovo-av o'Urjcriv' r) 8e . . . . (pKrjae rbv avrfj eKacrrr] tottov TrpocrrjKovra — the good SOU.1, without a moment of suspense, or sensible lapse of time, ' at once finds a home in' &c. Symp. 172 a, ovros, ov 7repip,eveis ', Kay on emo-rcis irepiipeiva — not 1 waited for him to come up with me,' but ' let him come up with me.' lb. 173 b, tl ovv ov dirjyrjaa) poi • Same phrase Protag. 310 a,' why not at once relate it to me ?' So Phsedo 86 d, Soph. 251c, &c. Cf. Arist. Vesp. 213, Tt ov< a77eKOLprj6r]p.ev; Symp. 209 a, a \jfvxfj Trpoo-rjKti Ka\ Kvrjo-ai kcu Kvelv. Kvr)o~ai is the first moment of the state Kveiv. Hence Apol. 21c, 22 d, edoge, ebo^av, 'I came to think.' § 95. D. Impersonal Verbs. Impersonal Verbs in the same rigid form as in Latin do not exist in Greek. Even those which express the processes of inani- mate nature, as vet, vlcpei, eo-eio-e (Thuc. iv. 52), are only impersonal in that particular use, and not always so even then. We find, however, in addition to these, § 96. a. Passive Impersonals (the nearest approach in Greek to strict Impersonals). Phdr. 232 a, ovk aX\(os avrols 7re7r6vr)Tai. lb. 261 b, Xiyerai re 6evT(ov (Genitive Absolute). § 97. b. Quasi-Impersonals (as we may call them), where a vague Nominative, such as ' the circumstances,' ' the event, ' the course of events,' is understood. The common words ivdexerm, nape'xei (Thuc. iv. 85 &c), the phrase ovrcos e^et, &c, are such cases. We do not know always whether the vague understood Nominative is Plural or Singular, except where the Verb is represented by a periphrasis x 2 156 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 98, 99. (as Horn. II. iv. 345, (fiiX [rjv], xiv. 98, Tpcovl p.ev evKTa yeurjrai, xvi. 128, ovKeri (pVKTa. TreXavTcii, xxi. 533> °"° ^ofy 4 ' eVecr&u, Od. ii. 203, tora ecro-erai, viii. 384, 'H§' ap' eToiua tctvkto, xi. 455> °^ K6 ' rt 7riOTa ■yu- vai^iv, TllllC. ii. 3, eVet eroipa rjv, i. 102, tovtov eVSea i(f)aiv6TO, i. 7, 7rXco'i(ia>T€pcov ovtcov, Hdt. vi. 52, SJ^Xa o-0t eaeaOai, the common aSwi/ara eWt, &c), or where (as in several of the following) an Ad- jective stands in agreement with the vague understood Nomi- native. Rep. 580 d, Several, a>? ifxol doze?, Kal irepav dnodeit-iv — ' the Case will admit.' lb. 452 d, nai tovto iveBetgaro — 'the result made this plain also.' Phsedo 73 h, idv tis inl Ta Biaypa.np.aTa ayy ivravOa o-acfyearara Karrj- yopel on tovto ovtqos e^e 1 — ' what ensues is proof positive,' &c. Apol. 28 b, ouSeV Seivov prj iv epo\ (tttj — lit. ' lest the course of events should come to a stand-still.' ' There is no danger of the rule breaking down in my case.' Cf. Ar. Eth. VI. viii. 9, aei. §§ ioo— 103.] VERBS. 157 Hip. Ma. 288 b, otl p.ev irnxeiprjcret ev otda' el S' enix^iprjcras ecrrat KarayeXao-Tos avrb delgei — ' we shall see by the event.' Protag. 324 a, avro ere diddgei. lb. 329 b, licavbs fiev paKpovs Xoyovs Kai KaXovs elnelv, cos avra §77X01. § 100. Cf. Hdt. V. 78, §77X01 de ov Kar ev povvov, dXXa Travraxq, fj larj-yoptr) cos icrn XPW a wrrovdaiov, vi. 86, ovre pepvqpai to rrpijypa, ovre fie irepicpepei ovdev eldevai TOVTecov tcov vpels Xeyere. ^Esch. Choeph. 993, <&l\ov rem, vvv §' ixOpbv, cos governing an Accusative of part of the Subject we have, e. g. Horn. Od. xix. 38, doves vv/z-oV exovres — ' holding,' pro- perly not themselves, but their heads, or, vaguely, parts of them- selves, aloft. So Hdt. i. l8l, dvdftacris is avTOvs e^codev kvkXco nep\ ndvTas tovs nvpyovs e^ovcra neTrolrjrai — where e^ot/cra has for its Object each part of the dvdpacns in succession. From exeiv governing an Accusative of that which comes to be regarded as part of the Subject, we have e.g. Od. iii. 182, avrdp eycoye UvXovb'' exov — 'held my ship on her course for Pylos;' — the 158 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 104, 105. ship, as following the will of her captain, is, when we are speaking of his movements, virtually part of him; — whence simply ' I held on for Pylos.' On the other hand, in the following passage Kar^x^v has for its Object that which is literally a part of the Subject. Phsedo 117c, olol t fjcrav Karex^tv to prj daKpveiv — ' to keep them- selves,' — but properly those parts of themselves which had to do with the particular affection in question. So again the common e^e §77 (Crat. 439 a, Gorg. 490 b, Lach. 198 b, Legg. 639 d) is 'hold,' scil. your foot from advancing — your tongue from speaking — your thoughts from running on — (as the case may be). Gorg. 475 d, tS Xoya) &o-7T€p larpa 7rapex wv — ' offering,' not strictly oneself, but the particular limb or part needing treatment. § 104. Other examples in Plato are Pep. 388 e, otov ris e(pifj laxvpm yeXcori. So 563 a, $vym6uvai. lb. 422 C, dvaarpecpeiv. So Lach. 191 e. lb. 467 b, avdkaf&caf. lb. 473 b, peTafiaXelv. lb. 540 a, 591 e, napaKivelv. So 573 c > viroKiveiv. Phaedo 65 a, eyyvs rt reivew rov redvdvcu. lb. 98 d, xaAcoira kcu gwreivovTa ra vevpa. Phdr. 228 e, nave. Jelf instances this also in Horn. Od. i. 340, iv. 659. [In Od. i. 340 the reading seems doubtful.] Politic. 258 a, QeaiTrjTcp , . . gvvefii£;a. Phsedo 7 2 b, el to KaraBapdaveiv p,ev ei'17, to §' dveyeipeo-Qai prj dvra- TroBiSoir) — lit. (as we might say) ' put in an appearance on the other side.' § 105. This Intransitive use of these Verbs becomes so natural, that, after it is established, when in particular cases it is convenient that the Object should be expressed, it is expressed in the Dative. E. g. II. xxiii. 686, dvacrxofievco x € P a>L o-Tifiapjjcri. The language had become accustomed to dvaaxea-dai Intransitive for holding up the hands ; so that when, in order to characterise the hands, the poet desires to express the Object, it falls more naturally into the Dative. So Od. ix. 489, 'Ep,(3a\eeiv Kamys — ififtakelv being used alone, e.g. in Aristoph. Ran. 206, for 'dashing in the oars.' (An erroneous interpretation of this last passage arises from neglect of the prin- ciple we are noticing.) So Od. X. 140, vtji KCiTrjyayopeo-Ba. §§ 106—109.] VERBS. 159 § 106. b. When the Accusative of the Object, not being in any- way referable to the Agent, is nevertheless so natural a sequence to the Verb, that the Verb itself will suggest it if omitted. Symp. 196 d, ireipareov fit] eXXefoeiv — 'to fall short' — lit. ' to leave a deficiency of so much in a given quantity.' Phdr. 23 7 d, Bepevot, opov, els tovto diTo(3Xe7rovTes Kai dvacpepovres rrjv cTKeyJHv iToicoptQa. avacpepovres, ( referring,' scil. our assertions and reasonings. Gorg. 512 e, imTpfyavTa nep\ tovtcov t<5 6em — ' entrusting,' scil. the decision. § 1 07. Some uses of e'xeiv illustrate this process also. We find, Thuc. iii. 89, rcov o-eiapcov Karexovrw — there is no need to express what they pervaded or occupied, since o-eurpol (so used) must be o-eicrpol rrjs yrjs. Or when ex^iv is used of an army occupy- ing a position, the Verb alone suffices to express this. And (as we have seen in the parallel case) so fixed may this use become, that when the position occupied needs to be expressed, another con- struction is found for it ; cf. Thuc. iii. 34, iv diareixio-paTi elxov so viii. 28. Similarly a general moving his army is said ayeiv, without any Object expressed : whence the next step is that the whole army, which strictly ayerai, is said ayeiv cf. Thuc. v. 54, 'Apyeloi $' ayovres rrjv fjfiepav ravrrjv iravTa rbv xpovov, io-e(3aXov. [So Arnold : ecre- PaXkov Poppo and Goller]. § 108. This is the account of a variation, which might else be taken merely for one of government : — Phsedo 58 e— 59 a, ovre yap cos Bavdrco napovTa p.e dv8pos emTTjbeLov eXeos eltrfjei . . . .* dia drj ravra ovdev ndvv poi iXeeivov elarjei. An emotion may be said either to enter the person himself (as in eXeos p.e elcryet), or to enter his soul; but in this case if the reference to the person be made clear the mention of the soul may be spared ; that is, the Verb becomes Intransitive, and is followed by a Dative of the person (as in the latter sentence of the passage quoted). § 109. F. Uses of the Participle. a. Periphrastically, with Auxiliary Verb Substantive. Politic. 273 b, 7roXXrjs rjv perexov draglas. lb. 274 e, ehai yeyovos. 289 a, rjv av re&iv. 308 e, eorc reivovra. Tim. 38 c, ivriv ov. 68 d, r)yvorjKG>s av etrj, 77 e, e'lt] diabidop-evov. 160 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§110—112. Soph. 244 C, to anobexeo-dai . . . [eori] \6yov ovk av e'x ov ' Legg. 860 e ? et drj ravra ovtcos e'xovTa ccttiv. § 110. j3. Peculiar Intransitive use of '4x<*v with Verbs. Euthyd. 295 C, excov (fiXvapels. Phdr. 236 e, t'l drJTa excov crrpefai ' y § 111. Idioms of Prepositions. 'Avd. In Composition. Phsedo 87 a, dvaTiBepai. Of withdrawing any deed or word. Not a metaphor from draughts particularly, though capable of being so applied — as in Hipparch. 229 e, cocrTrep neTTevcov edeXco crot iv rois \6yois dvadecrBai 6 ti jQovXet tcov elprjpevcov. Cf. Soph. Aj. 476, WpotrOeicra Kava6elcra tov ye KarOavew, and Lobeck's note upon it. 'A7TO. Of the use of the bodily members. Rep. 613 b, dpcocriv 07rep oi 8pop.rjs ocrot av Becocriv ev dirb tcov Karoo airb 8e tcov avco prj — ' who run fairly with their legs, but with the upper part of their bodies (head, neck, arms) in bad form.' (Even supposing that kutco could refer to the starting point and avco to the turning point, which can scarcely be supported by instances, the absolute use of to. kcitco and to, avco in this meaning is inconceivable.) Legg. 795 fy ° rikecos irayKpcLTiov fjcrKrjKcos .... ovk dn6 ji€V tcov dpi- crTepcov ddvvaTos eVrt pdxecrOai K.r.X. Cf. Aristoph. Vesp. 656, Xoyicrai v aTOfxarcov povov (fiOeyyoLvro. lb. 580 b, 6 81a ndvTcov Kpirrjs cnvo^aiverai — 'the paramount judge decides absolutely.' An ordinary sense of §ia ndvTOiv, beginning with Homer. Meno 74 a ) T V V P-' iav , V Sta 7rdvT airexei BakaTT-qs e'is Tivas 6y8orj ovk &v tpfiTjv TVOTe evrvxeiv els (ppov7]V. Euthyd. 305 d, to, viKr)Tr}pia els Sogav o'iaeo~6ai (ro(pias Trepi. Cf. Hoill. II. iii. 158, Alvcos dBavdrr\o'i defjs els aira eoiKev. Also Andoc. ii. 23. p. 2 2, TvoXiTeiav hibovras re, Kai els xPW aTa P e yd- Xas dcopeds. Lysias xxvi. 21. p. I77> ""^P* e P°^ °v$ev ovtos elnelv eijei els piaodrjpiav. § 116. 'E*. a. Euthyd. 282 a, e* iravros rpoTTov napao-Ktvd£eo~dai. b. Apol. 23 a, £k tovtcov kcu MeXrjTos poi eneQeTO — ' hereupon :' the notion is of sequence of time rather than consequence. Cf. iEsch. Eum. 2, e* 8e tt)s Qepi.iv, Choeph. 1055, TLoraiviov yap alpd vol x e P 0lv * Tl ' '& K Tcovde tol rapayp,6s es (ppevas mrvei, § 117. 'Ev. a. ' In the point of.' Rep. 402 d, ev raj ei'Sti 6po\oyovvra — ' agreeing in their aspect.' Symp. 213 c, viKcovra ev Xoyois ndvras avQpcanovs. Theast. 206 a, to. a-roixela ev rfj o-^rei 8iayiyvooo~Keiv ireipd>p.evos. b. Adverbially compounded. Gorg. 457 a, ep.(Spaxv. Cf. the form KaOels in St. John viii. 9, e&p- Xovro els icadels. § 118. 'Eth. a. With Dative; — 'in connection with' — signifying a more material connection than it signifies with the Genitive. Rep. 376 e, eari be ttov f) pev eirl crdipacn yvpvao~TiKr], rj d' eVi ^rvxii povaiKr]. lb. 408 b, ovS' earx tovtois rrjv rexvrjv helv eivai. lb. 53 2 C, en ddvvapia (SXeTreiv. Symp. 186 a, [ v Epna>v* lb. 184 e, em TOVToa Ka\ e^aTraT-qBrjvai ovhev alcrxpdv. lb. 186 b, aXXos pev 6 eVi tw vyieivSei. lb. 2IO a, TO KaXXoS TO 67TI OTCOOVV CTCO/IOTt. Ibid, b, to eV e'ldei KaXov. Soph. 247 d, to eni Te tovtois apa Ka\ eir etteivois $-vp(pves yeyovos. Politic. 3IO a, eVi tovtois hrj tovt eivai Te"x v T\ t&v (pevyovrcov iiri to7s pvar-qpiois. § 119. b. Adverbially compounded. Legg. 697 C, eVi eTL x*ipovs. Cf. Hom. Od. viii. 245, e£ en naTpwv. § 120. c. In Composition. Crito 43 c, eTTiXverai — 'exempts.' Perhaps the meaning of «ri is 1 with a further result' or ' condition,' and so im\veo-6aL would be to obtain a man's release, under the condition of a ransom to be paid. Similarly would enayyeWeaBai be ' to announce so as to bind oneself in time to come,' and so 'to offer,' 'promise.' Symp. 172 a, emo-rds 7repiep€tva. iirKTTrjvai is to stop in the course of progress from one point to another, QeaiTTjTe, v7reXaj3es — ' VOU have caught at once the train of the thought.' This is of course a pregnant use of the Preposition, implying Kara 7roSa enopevos. b. With Genitive, in Attributive sense. Meno 7 4 l>, piav dperrju \a(3elv Kara ndvTcov. lb. 76 a, Kara 7Tcivt6s axVI JiaT0S t °vto Xeyco. lb. 77 a 5 KaT Q- okov eliroiv dperrjs Kept. Phsedo 70 d, prj to'lvvv kclt dvSpdnrcou cr/conei povov tovto — ' consider this not as an attribute of mankind only.' The Kara, in a preg- nant use, stands for as Kar dvdpcoTrcov Xeyopevov. Phdr. 260 b, avvTiOels \6you enaivov Kara rod ovov. § 122. c. In Composition. a. Syrup. 219 c, KaraSapddveiv — ' to earn by sleeping.' /3. Of doing a thing without regard to other considerations. Y 2 164 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 123-125. Apol. 33 e, ovk av inelvos ye avrov KaraBerjOeir] — implying the request to be unprincipled or arbitrary. Legg. 86l b, dovs 8e ovbeva \6yov cos 6p6a>s etprjKC, Karavop.o6eTrjo~€i. Cf. LysiaS vi. 3. p. 103, rj KareXerjaai r) Kara^aptcrao"^ai 'AvdoKidr]. Isseus vii. 38. p. 67, tovs e^ovras dnodovvai ra our avTa Kara- vaymo-avres — ' peremptorily compelling.' This Kara often, but not always or necessarily (see the last in- stance), gives an unfavourable meaning to the word. § 123. Me'xpi. Adverbially compounded. Gorg. 487 c, ^XP 1 on ° l - § 124. Uapd. a. With Accusative. a. Soph. 242 a, napa noda perafiaXcov ipavrov. Cf. Pind. Pyth. x. 62, nap nodos, and Soph. Phil. 838, napa. noda. /3. Apol. 36 a, ovroa irap oXiyov — literally, ' up to so little * dif- ference from the other quantity compared, i. e. so near it. 7. In Comparison ; signifying not ' beyond' but ' contrasted with' (lit. 'put coordinate with'). Phdr. 276 e, nayndXrjV Xeyeis napa (pavXrjv naibidv. Theffit. 144 a, dvdpelov Trap ovtivovv. For other instances see Idioms of Comparison, § 174. Cf. Thuc. v. 90, ineibr) napa to dinaiov to i-vpcpipov Xeyeiv vne6ecr8e. b. With Dative. Rep. 366 b, Ka\ napa 6eols nal nap' dv6pa>nois npd£op.ev Kara, vovv — 1 our dealings both with gods and with men will be what we desire.' Symp. 188 d, 6 nep\ rayaBd perci o~a>(fcpoo~vvr]s .... dnoreXovpevos Koi nap rjpiv Ka\ napa Beoh ["Epcos] — 'temperance exercised in deal- ings between ourselves (men) and with the gods.' § 125. c. With Genitive ; — 'obtained from' or 'proceeding from,' —of a sentiment or opinion. Legg. 733 a ? tovto napa tov Xoyov XPV Xapftdvovra (TKoneiv. Soph. 226 d, Xeyerai napa ndvroov nadappos tls. Legg. 692 b, ro Se nap" rjpmv ytyvoao-Keadai ravra . . . ovdiv aocpov — ' that these things should receive recognition from us.' Crat. 412 e, napa noXXwv SuoXoydrat. §§126,127.] PREPOSITIONS. 165 Politic. 296 a, Xoyov rbv Trapa rcov ttoXXcov Xeyopevov. Critias 107 b ; ra Trapa rravrccv rjpoav pjjdevra. Protag. 312 b, 77 Trapa Tlpcorayopov pdOrjcris. Symp. 182 dj tj TrapaiciXevcris ra> epcovri Trapa. rravrcov Oavpaart). (Trapa rravrcov follows TrapaKeXevo-is.) Cf. Andoc. i. 140. p. 18, napa Trdvrcov SpoXoyovpevcos ravff vpiv vrrdpxei. § 126. In the remaining instances the Preposition has a pregnant force : that is, the fact that an opinion or sentiment is referred to is left to be understood from the rrapd. Rep. 362 C, Trapa. decov v *H- €t Tipas pel^oai pev 7rpos dperrjv ad pei£ovs k.t.X. Phsedo 69 a, f) 6p6rj npos dpeTrjv dXKayrj — lit. 'right in regard of fitness for making men good.' Rep. 581 e, dpCpicrftrjTovvTai iicpdv TG>v aXKcov rrpoakafirj — 'apprehends in addition its difference from other things.' So 209 d, irpoo- 8o£dcrai. Apol. 20 a, (rcpiai (-vvelvai xphf xaTCl ^ihovra^, kcu X<*P lv irpoo-etdevai. rhsedo 74 a > rode 7rpoo-7rdcrxeiv, ivvoelv. Gorg. frl6 d, QepioroKkea ravra ravra eTroirjaav Ka\ (pvyrj npoof^rj- fxlaxrav. § 130. 'Ynep. 1 With a view to.' Phagdo 10*7 C, empeXeias Seirat ov\ vnep tov XP° V0V tovtov povov iv a> naXovpev TO trjV. Protag. 318 d, elite tg> veavlaKcp Kai epol vnep tovtov epa>Ta>vn. Cf. Lysias xii. 78. p. 127, ov\ vrrep vpcov dnodavovTos Qrjpapevovs, dXX* vnep rrjs avrov Trovqpias. § 131. 'Ytto. a. Adverbially compounded. Phdr. 242 d, vno tl do-elSr) [Xoyov] — 'somewhat impious.' Gorg. 493 C, VTTO Tl CLTOTTa. b. In Composition. a. v7ro\oyi£ecrdai. Apol. 28 d, Crito 48 d, Phdr. 231 b. Similarly, Protag. 349 C, eycoye ovdev o~oi vrroXoyov riBepai. Lach. 189 b, Xey ovv p-qbev ttjv fjpeTepav rjXiKiav vnoXoyov Troiovpcvos. Note, that wroXoytCeo-Qcu, is not restricted to an unfavourable sense j cf. Lysias XXX. 1 6. p. 184, ovbev ehos aitTco tovto vnoXoyov ycveaGai [so Bekker ; ovdeva . . . tovtov Zurich editors] — where avT<5 means 'in his favour,' and xxviii. 13. p. 180, ov8e dBUas tovtoi* (prjpl av elvai vnoXoyov ttjv ine'tym* cpvyrjv, — not, as Taylor, ' honestam excusationem in suo exsilio habere/ but ' non injuria iis laudi imputandum.' The word does not mean ' to subtract,' according to our notion of the operation ; but ' to reckon against,' 'per contra' : — the same meaning of virb which we get in vnavTav, vnoopoala (' an affidavit to stop' proceedings), vnoTipdo-Oai (equivalent to dvTiTipdo-Qai). @. vnoniveiv. P e P- 37 2 d, perplas vtrpirLvopTes. 168 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§ 132. § 132. Idioms of Particles. A. Km expletive, — preceding and indicating the emphatic word. a. In Eelative Interrogative or Conditional sentences. Here kol may generally 11 be rendered ' at all.' Phsedo 7 7 k, Trplv Kal els dvdpa>7reiov crania d(piKeo-0ai — ' before it came at all.' lb. 88 a, 7rp\u Kal yeveadai fjpds — ' before we came into being at all.' lb. 1 10 a, ottov av Kal yfj rj — ' exists at all.' Apol. 2 2 a, tva poi Kal dveXeyKTos rj pavreia yiyvoiTO. Here Kal fastens itself to the latter portion of the compound dveXeyKTos — ' not to be called in question at all.' Phsedo 66 d, edv tis rfplv Kal (tyoAj) yevrjTai. lb. 108 d, el Kal T]7n(TTdixr]v — 'if I even had had the knowledge/ lb. nob, d Set Kal fivSov Xeyeiv koXov — 'if it is allowable to narrate a fiction at all.' Cf. Thuc. i. 15, o6ev tis Kal dvvapis TrapeyeveTO. This Kal frequently enters into a set phrase with the Adjective apiKpos. Apol. 28 b, orov tl Kal apiKpbv o(peX6s iariv. Soph. 247 C, el ti Kal apiKpbv eOeXovo-L crvyxa>pe7v. lb. 261 b, dappelv xpr) tov Kal o-piKpov tl bvvdpevov. Phileb. 58 a, ^vpnavTas oaois vov Kal crpiKpov 7rpoar)pTT]Tai. . Politic. 278 d, 7rS>s . . . hvvair av tis dpxopevos dub do£r)S yjsevdovs eiri tl ttjs dXr]0eias Kal piKpbv pepos d(piKopevos KTrjaaa-Bai (ppovrjaiv ; The remaining passages shew the Kal entering into Interrogative phrases. Euthyphro 3 a, ri Kal rroiovvTa ere (prjerc bias Kai, trov Kal, &c, where the kcu affirms the implied Proposition : iEsch. Choeph. 528, not Kai reXevra . . . Xoyos ; l what was the issue V — implying expectation of one. [Dindorf with the MSS. reads Kai Trot. Cf. however Eurip. Phoen. 1354, lias ko.1 iriirpaKTat bnrrvx^v Traldcov (f)6vos ;] 3. In Affirmative Independent sentences. Here the force of is Kal eLTre rots ov6pao~i. Rep. 328 C, did xpovov yap Kal ecopaKetv avTOV. lb. 395 e, ttoXXov Kal derjo-opev. This phrase often recurs. Symp. 1 77 a > ro.] Phsedo 107 C, 6 kIvSvvos Kal do^siev av deivos etVat. Phileb. 25 b, pi]o~ev ivravBa Kal pdXa poyis. Symp. 189 a, ecprj elrrelv rbv \pi(TToqbdvr] otl Kal pdX* ijvavcraTo. lb. 194 a, ev Kal pdX y av qbojSolo. Phsedo 117b, Kai pdXa IXtcos. Ibid. C, Kai pdXa evxepoos. Protag. 315 d, crTpoapacn ko.1 pdXa 7roXXo7s. Legg. 832 a, Kai pdX* iviore ovk dcpvels ovras. Phsedo 61 e, Kai yap 'lacos Kal pdXicrra Trpirrei peXXovra eKelo-e dnobr]- pfiv diao-Koirelv k.t.X. Rep. 404 b, dnXrj Trov Kal eTTieiKrjS yvpvaariKrj Kal paXiarra rj nepl tov noXepov. 170 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 134, 135. Legg. 773 c > ^ V*l $ov\6pe$a gvfxfialveiv r)piv, Kai paXiara gvpfialvei tols 7rXe«rrais 7rdXevros de Set, Eum. 373? $6£jai r dvbpa>v Kai pd\* vn aldepi arepval k.t.'K, Soph. El. 1455? ndpeort br)ra Kai pdX a^rfkos dea. § 134. Kai is subject to Hyperbaton in this use as in others. In the foregoing examples the Kai indicates the stress laid on the word next following it : but when the word to be emphasized begins the clause the Kai is sometimes postponed. Phsedo 63 C, e'lirep ti aXXo ra>v roiovrav, duo-xvpio-alprjv av Kai rovro — where the Kai emphasizes Suo-xvpuraLpr]v. Ib. 68 C, r) <^poavvr]V — where the stress of Kai includes ijv. Gorg. 620 b, povois 8' eycoye Kai aprjv rols drjprjyopois Kai aocfuo-rals ovk iyx&pelv pep6opdv pr) bexoiro. The mean- ing is not ' of all things that exist scarce anything could be, in such a case, exempt from corruption,' but ' there could hardly exist anything not admitting corruption.' The exist- ence of the whole class ' incorruptible' becomes questionable. Hip. Ma. 297 e, 6 av ^cupetp r)pds Troifj, pr) rt Trdo~as ras rjftovds, aXX" 6 av dia. rrjs dKor)s— ( suppose we say, not,' §§ 136—139.] PARTICLES. 171 Hip. Ma. 299 d, dp' ovv tj8v fjSeos . . . diacpepei tg> f)$v elvat \ /lit) yap el p.ei£a>v tis fjdovrj t) ekdrratv. Politic. 292 e, ireTTevTaX roarovroi ovk av yevoivTo nore, p.r\ ti St) ftaaiXels ye — ' let alone kings.' Comparing this with the last instance but one, we see how the force of jut) n is enhanced by- its following the clause with which it is contrasted. Tim. 26 C, Xeyeiv elfii eroifios, /*?) \16vov ev KecpaXaiois d\\a k.t.X. Politic. 295 e, /at) egeo-Tto Br) napa ravra ere pa irpoaTOTTeiv j (' is he to be forbidden V) Cf. iEschin. iii. 21. p. 56, on ypt-a, p.rj d7roBr)p.f}o-co ; fam I not to' &c. 1) The fir] in the Brachylogical combination /lit) oti comes under this head; for instances see below, § 154. § 136. /3. In the Deprecatory form of contradiction. Euthyd. 294 C, (A) ovk e^apKei croi aKOvcrat k.t.X. j (B) MTiSa/ioV ak\a k.t.X. lb. 300 a, (A) ri be ; (B) Mttoo>. Protag. 318 b, tovto fiev ovdev 6avp.aaTov Xeyeis' dWa. /lit) ovtcos. Meno 75 a > (A-) ^"P® eMreu>. (B) Mt), dXXci ev elne. Cf. Aristoph. Vesp. 854, (A) Ovtos o~v, ttoI 6els ; em Kadio-Kovs ; (B) MrjdafMSis. § 137- y. In the sense of ' whether.' — For instances see above, §61. § 138. 8. In the sense of ' perhaps' — from which the sense of 'whether' just mentioned flows. See above, § 59. Euthyd. 298 C, /zt) yap, & Ev6vdr]p,e, to \eyop.evov, ov \lvov XiVo) crvva7rrei,s ; — 'are you perhaps not joining' &c. ? i.e. 'perhaps you are not joining.' Protag. 312 a, dXX' apa ^7) ovx viroXafxfidveis — 'perhaps, then, you on the contrary do not suppose.' § 139. Ov irdw. The universal meaning of ov irdw is ' hardly,' ' scarcely.' Theaet. 149 d, ov irdw tovto oida. lb. 172 b, ovk b\v irdw ToXfxtjO-eie (prjo-at. Symp. 180 c, ov rrdvv diep.vrjp.ovevev. lb. 204 d, otj irdw e(prjv en exeiv eyo) 7r/Do^e/pcoy divoKpivacrOat. Z 2 172 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [■§§ 140, 141. Phsedo 63 a, ov irdvv cvdecos edeXei ircidecrQai. Ibid. C, ovk av irdvv 8uo-xvpio~aipr}v. lb. 85 d, ov irdvv (paiverai tKavcos slpfjcrdai. lb. IOO a, ov irdvv gvyxcopco. Theset. 145 a, ov irdvv agiov rbv vovv irpoaexeiv. lb. 176 b, ov irdvv padiov ir rival. Phsedo 59 a ? ov ^ v irdvv pot iXeeivbv elarjei. Apol. 41 d, K.a\ eycoye rols Kara^rjCpio-apevois pov Kai rols Karrjyopois ov irdvv x^Xeiraiva). The following three instances are decisive for the meaning 1 scarcely.' Euthyphro 2 b, ovb' avrbs irdvv ri yiyvcocTKco, co Evdv(])pov, rbv avdpa. Protag. 331 e, ov irdvv ovrcos, ov pevroi ovhk av cos uv p,oi doKels o'UcrOai. Phileb. 41a, ax^bv yap rco -fycvdei pev ov irdvv irovrjpas av ris Xviras re Kai fjbovas Oelrj, peyaXrj 8e a\\rj Kai iroXXfj avpiriirrovcras irovrjpiq. The following three are to be interpreted on the principle of Litotes. Symp. 195 e, Kpavicov, a iaTLv ov irdvv paXa/cd — 'skulls, which can hardly be said to be soft things.' Apol. 19 a, oipai 8e avrb xaXe7r6i> eivai, Kai ov irdvv pe XavOdvei oiov eo-riv — ' I can hardly say I do not know.' lb. 41 d, Kai eycoye rols Kara^-qcpicrapivois pov . . . ov irdvv ^a\f7raii/6> — ' I can scarcely say I am displeased' — ' I have no sufficient cause to be displeased.' Cf. Ar. Eth. Nic. II. vii. 3, eXXelirovres irep\ ras rjdovas ov irdvv yiyvovrai, IV. i. 30, ra pev ovv rrjs dcrcorias ov irdvv trvvbvd^erai. § 140. Different is Laches 183 C, ov irdvv oXiyois eyco rovrcov irapa- yiyova — where irdvv goes closely with oXiyois. Quite different also are irdvv ov, iravrdiracnv ov, &C. § 141. Ovoi. The use of ovbe for Kai ov in the sense not of 'and not' but of ' also not' is worth pointing out in cases where the ov8e qualifies specially not a Substantive (the common case) but some other Part of Speech. Phileb. 23 b, crxeBbv de ovbe paftiov — for crx^bv Be Ka\ ov padiov. §§ T43, I43-] PARTICLES. 173 Legg. 73° d, T l V to? /^^ $1 Kf " ° prjbev aBiKtov' 6 8e prjb* eTTiTpeirwv rols adiKovcrw dbtKelv ivXeov r) binXaaias Tiprjs a£ios eiceivov — ' but he who beyond this does not allow' &c. Euthyphro 15 b, pepvrjo-ai yap 7rov oti k.t.X. r) ovbe pepvrjaat ' } — for rj Ka\ ov fjLefivrjaai • ' or on the contrary,' lit. ' or, which is also an alternative.' Phcedo 72 a, Ibe rolvvv ovtcds otl ou6' ddiKcos apoXoyrjKapev — i. e. IBe TOIVVV KCU OVTdS OTL OVK dBlKCOS (Op. Crito 44 b, &>? epoi, eav av cvno6avr\y, ' since moreover the event of your death is to me not one misfortune, but' &c. lb. 45 a, kol yap ovbe ttoXv rdpyvpiov icrri — for Ka\ yap Ka\ k.t.X. lb. 45 C, eri be ovbe bUaiov — for eVt be Ka\ ov bUaiov. Cf. Isocr. xviii. 65. p. 383, 6V ovb y ovtco pabiov rjv — ' when, besides, it was not easy.' Ar. Eth. V. viii. 10, en be oi/be — for ert be Ka\ ov. § 142. 'AXXa. a. Introducing a supposed objection. Rep. 365 c-d, we have seriatim dXXa yap dXXa. br). Apol. 37 b-c, we have the series noTepov dXXa dXXa. br). /3. Introducing an instance. Symp. 196 d— 197 a, we have the series Trp&Tov pev Ka\ pev bfj . . . ye ctXXa. § 143. Ei>9vs, vvVj avTLKa, noXXaKis, &C. a. evOvs 'from first to last/ Phdr. 259 c /3. vvv * as the case now stands/ Crito 54 b, Apol. 38 b. y. avTUa 'for instance,' Theset.i 66 b, Protag. 359 e, Phdr. 235 e, Legg. 727 a, Gorg. 483 a, &anep avTLKa, Laches 195 b, iirel avTiKa. b. iroXXaKLs 'perchance' after pi), Protag. 361 c: after el apa, Phsedo 60 e, Laches 179 b, 194 a, Politic. 264 b, el tivcov noXXaKis apa diaKrjKoas, Phdr. 238 d, eav apa ttoXXcikis vvp(f)6Xrj7rTOs yevcopai. And perhaps Phsedo 73 d, wcmep ye Ka\ 2ippiav tis lba>v noXXaKis KeftrjTOs dvepvr)crdr). e. ore 'whereas.' "Or ovv hrj equivalent to eVetS^ ovv, Soph. 254 b, Tim. 69 a. So 67rdre, Euthyd. 297 d, Laches 169 d. 174 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 144—147. § 144. The remaining heads treat of Particles in combination. B. In order to understand and to interpret certain combinations of Particles, regard must be had to the fact, that they enter simul- taneously into the sentence, as it were speaking at once rather than in succession. a. A familiar instance is the combination mi — he, e. g. Rep. 573 fy €cos av KaOrjprj o-a>(ppoo~vvT]s, Kal p.avlas he 7r\r)pa)ar} eVafc- tov. The he and the Kal enter into the meaning abreast of one another. § 145. b. Kal fievTot only differs from Kal — he in that the uevroi is stronger than the he, and that the two Particles are not neces- sarily separated by the intervention of other words. Symp. 2 1 4 e, Kal pevroi ovrcocrl 7roiijaov. lb. 222 a, Kal ukvroi ovk epe povov ravra irenoirjKev, ak\a kcu Xap- uthrjv k.t.X. Apol. 17 c, Kal pevrot kcu irdvv rovro vpcov heouai. lb. 26 e, amaTos y el, kcu ravra pevroi aavra. lb. 31b, koi el pevroi n dno rovrcov d-ireXavov k.t.X. Euthyd. 289 e, Kal pevroi ovhev Bavpao-rov. Ale. I. 113 C, Kal pevroi Kal ev Xeyeis. § 146. c. Such a combination again is Kal ovv Kal. Protag. 309 b, Kal yap iroXXa virep epov cine, f3or)0a>v epoi, Kal ovv Kal apri aV eKeivov epxopai. d. Such again is 8' dXXd. Soph. 235 d, av & dXX* elrre 7rpS)Tov. e. And again he — pevroi. Phdr. 267 C, Upcorayopeia he ovk tjv pevroi roiavr arra j § 147. f. 'AXXa yap. Here we must observe that there is no Ellipse, such as is in- volved in the supposition that, whereas the yap refers to the clause immediately subjoined to it, the dXXa. belongs either to a clause understood or to a clause following at a greater distance. The sense forbids such a supposition : for the dXXa sits much closer to the clause immediately subjoined than the yap does. 'AXXa yap has two meanings : one when it introduces an objection, and is there- fore ironical; the other, which alone needs illustration, when it has the force of ' but be that as it may,' or ' but the truth is.' § 148.] PARTICLES. 175 Symp. 1 80 a, A'lcrxvXos Se (pXvapei K.T.X.' dXXa yap rw ovtl k.t.\. Phdr. 228 a, ei iya> Qaibpov dyvoco, /cat ip.aVTOv emXeXrjo-pAU' dXXa. yap ovderepa earn tovtcov. Phsedo 87 d, fierpi av poi (paivoiTo Xeyeiv, a>s r) pev tyvxr) 7roXvxpovi6v icm, to 8e crcopa daBeveo-repov m\ oXiyoxpovuoTepov. dXXa. yap av (pair] iKaaTrjv rav yjfvx&v rroXXa o'copara Kararpifteiv . . . dvayKaiov fitvT av elrj k.t.X. — ' but, he might say, be that as it may,' &c. lb. 95 C— d, prjvveiv .... otl iroXvxpoviov i(TTL tyvx*) K ' T >^' dXXa. yap ovdev ti paXXov rjv dOdvarov. Meno 94 e, dXXa yap, u> iratpe, pr) ovk r) didaKTov dpcTr) — ' but the truth is.' Apol. 19 c, Ka\ ovx &>$• dripagcov Xeya k.t.X. dXXa yap euoi tovtcov, to avdpes 'ABrjvaloi, ovdev peTeari. So Ibid, d, lb. 25 C, &C. Cf. Horn. II. vii. 237—242, AvTap iycbv ev olda pdxas k.t.X.' 'AXX' ov yap a eBeXco fiaXeeiv k.t.X., Od. X. 201, KXatov de Xiyecos k.t.X.' 'aXX' ov yap tis nprj^is iyiyvtTO pvpopevoiaiv. § 148. g. 'AXX' rj, ttXtjv rj. The joint meaning is ' except.' By the dXXa the exception to the negative which has preceded is stated flatly : the r) allows the negative statement to revive, subject to this exception alone. Symp. 189 e, vvv 8' ovk eaTiv [dvBpoyvvov] dXX' r) iv oveidei ovopa K€ip,€VOV. Phsedo 82 b, pr) crre prjdev aXXo doKelv elvai dXrjBes dXX* rj to accpaToeibes. lb. 97 d, ovftev aXXo o~K07relv ivpoo-f]Keiv dvBpcoTrco . . . dXX* rj to apicrTOv. Protag. 329 d, ovdev diacpepei dXX* rj peyeBei km crpiKpoTrjTi. Ik* 334 c > M XPW^ aL ^ at V? °^' rj o ti o-p-iKpoTaTcp. lb. 354 b, r) e^ere ti aXXo re'Xoy Xeyeiv, . . . dXX' rj fjbovds re Ka\ Xvnas ; — The interrogative is equivalent to a negative ; so that the rule stands good that dXX' 37 occurs only after a negative in the main construction. The aXXo is anticipatory of the exception, and this is also pleonastic. Apol. 42 a, aSrjXov navTl 7rXr)v rj r<5 Beep — again a virtually nega- tive sentence, the afyXov navrl being equivalent to drjXov ovdevi. The analogy of dXX' rj perfectly justifies, so far as Syntax is concerned, the disputed reading 7rXr)v 7. The nXr)v and the rj enter the meaning simultaneously, introducing the exception 176 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§ 149. each in its own way : 7rXr)v implies ' it is known to none — saving that [in contradiction to this] it is known to God 3' 77, less harshly, ' it is known to none, or however [only] to God.' Cf. Time. V. 60, ov fiera ra>v TrXeiovcov fiovXevo-dpevos, dXX' r) ev\ dvbpl Koivaaas, 80, e^rj. Charm. 1 7 5 a— b, ov yap av ttov . . . dvatffieXes e yap deop.ai avaT7avo~ao~6ai. § 150. i. The cases of ov p.rj and p,rj ov, when they make one negative, must be explained upon this principle of simultaneity of force. The resulting negation, though single, is both subjective and objective. Of ov p.!) a single instance may suffice. Laches 19*7 d, Ka\ yap p.01 donets ovde p.r) fjcrOrjcrOai on k.t.X. Of the uses of m ov Mr. Campbell, Thesetetus, Appendix B, has given a happy analysis and explanation. But it may be noticed that in a peculiar instance his restriction of p.rj ov to a Dependent clause, with the Infinitive or Participle, does not apply. Phlleb. 12 e, 7ra>s yap fjbovr) ye rjbovfj p.rj ovx bp.oioTarov av e'lr] j — which however is virtually equivalent to na>s yap av evb€x 0lT0 > rjbovrjv rjbovfj fir) ov\ 6p,oi6raTov eivai j § 151. C. Many combinations of Particles are Elliptical. Such are those of a Negative with on or cm-cos which follow. a. Ov fiovov on — ' I was not only going to say' (parenthetically). Symp. 179 b, edeXovcriv, ov \xovov on avbpes, dXXa. Kal k.t.X. Legg. 75 J k> ov \16vov ovbev TvXeov ev redevTav, ovS' on yeXcos av 7rdfnroXvs £vix(3alvoi } ax^bov be k.t.X. Cf. Thuc. iv. 85, ko\ yap ov [idvov on avTo\ dv0icrTao-6e, dXXa Kal ols av eVt'co, f)o~aov ns efio\ irpoaeio'i. § 152. b. Ovx onas has a similar meaning in Negative sentences. Whence moreover ovx oiraiS * s sa id to be equivalent to ovx ^ ncos ov ' which means that the Negative which follows extends its meaning backwards over the ovx ^ 7r(0S clause. Meno 96 a, ol (pdo~KOVTes bibdaKaXoi eivai ovx 07ra>s aXXav bibdo~KaXoi 6p.o\oyovvTai, dXX' ovde avrol enicrTao'Oai. Cf. Thucyd. i. 35? ovx O7rco? KcoXvTal . . . yevTjo-ecrOe, dXXa Ka\ . . . TTepLo^a-Be (where the Negative is borrowed by kcoXvto). yevr\- creo-Be from Trepio^ecrde, which being its opposite is a virtual Negative), iii. 42, ovx O7rcos grjpiovv dXXa firjo^ aTtfxd£eiv. § 153. c. Ovx o™ — ' n ot but that ;' lit. ' I was not going to deny a a 178 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 154, 155. that' (parenthetically). Occurring in sentences of Negative form, it borrows their Negative. It is quite different from ov povov on. Theset. 157 D , wore e£ airavTav tovtgw, oirep ig dpxrjs eXeyopev, ovbev eivai ev avTO Kaff clvto . . . . , to S' elvai iravTaxdOev egaipeTeov, ovx oti rjpeU . . . r)vayKao-pe6a . . . xPW^ ai civtco. Protag. 336 d, 2o>Kpar?; eyyva>pai pr) emXrjcrecrOai, ovx ° rt ^> a ^C €L — 'for all it be true that' &c. Gorg. 450 e, ovbepiav oipai o~e (3ovXeo~6ai prjTopiKrjv KaXelv, ovx OTl T< ** pi) pari ovr cos elrres. Lysis 219 e, Tmcra r) ToiavTrj anovbr) ovk eVl tovtols €0~t\v eo-Trovbao-pevrj . . . ov^ on noXXaKis Xeyopev k.t.X. § 154. d. Mr) otl — 'nedum,' 'much less' or 'much more,' accord- ing as the sentence is Negative or Affirmative : ' not to say,' i. e. not supposing us to say. Symp. 207 e, pr) oti . . . dXXd ml. So 208 a. Apol. 40 d, pr) oti . . . , dXXd. Protag. 319 d, pr) Toivw oti . . . dXXd. Legg. 799 c j n^s nov veos, pr) oti 7rpeo-j3vTrjs. Crat. 427 e, otiovv npaypa, pr) oti too-ovtov. Phileb. 60 d, m\ otiovv eivai r) yiyveadai, pr) oti br) ye r)bovr)v. Phdr. 240 e, a ml Xoyco dmveiv ovk eiriTepives, pr) oti br) k.t.X. Gorg. 512 b, os ovtc o-TpaTrjyov, pr) oti KvficpvrjTov, ovTe aXXov ovbevos eXaTTCO eviore bvvarai o~oi£eiv. § 155. D. Elliptical also, but in a still greater degree, are the combinations which now follow. a. Ov pevToi dXXd — 'yet, so far from the contrary.' After ov pcevToi is to be understood a proposition the contrary of that which follows the dXXd. Symp. 199 a, x aL P* Ta> &*!' °v 7^P * Tl ^yKcopid^a) TOVTOV TOP TpOTVOV' ov p,4vT0i dXXa Ta ye dXr)$r) .... e6eXa> elirelv — 'yet not SO that I am unwilling, — on the contrary I am willing, — to utter the truth.' Meno 86 C, (A) (3ovXei ovv k.t.X. ; (B) Haw pev ovv, ov p.evToi, ye eKeivo av rjbiaTa o-Ke\j/aiprjv — ' yet not SO that it would not, — on the contrary it would, — be most to my taste to' &c. Crat. 436 d, eKeivr}s be egeTao-deio-rjs imvios, to. Xoind (f)alvea6ai eKeivrj erropeva. ov pevToi dXXd Oavpd^oip av el ml to. ovopaTa o~vpvei amd avToh — 'yet I do not mean by this, that I should not wonder,— on the contrary I should wonder, — if ' &c. §§ 156—160.] PARTICLES. 179 Cf. ThllC. V. 43, ov pevroi dXXa kui (ppovrjpaTi (ptXoveiKcov rjvavTiovTo. So viii. 56, evravOa dr) ovKeri dXX' anopa vopioavres k.t.X. § 156. b. Of ov yap dXXd the same explanation holds; — 'for not the contrary, but,' i. e. ' for, so far from the contrary.' Euthyd. 305 e, ti ovv \ hoKovoi ooi ti Xeyeiv \ ov yap rot dXX' o ye \6yos ex ei Tlv °- ewrpeneiav — ' for I must say/ &c. : more literally, 1 for, do you know, so far from the contrary/ &c. lb. 286 b, 7ra>s Aeyeis j ov yap rot dXXd tovtov ye tov Xoyov .... del Bavpdfa — ' for, do you know, I must say I ' v oi iroXXol eveKa (paoiv . . . . ov yap dXX' ovtco XoyioaiT av y^v\rj dv8p6s ras, ko\ el moral vplv eloiv, Specs eTnoKeur eai. The full construction is ov povov ye ravra ev Xeyeis, dXka ravrd re ev Xe- yeis ical k.t.X. — ' not only is what you say true, but a further observation in the same direction is true/ namely ras liroBe- oeis K.T.X. § 158. What is to be noticed as to all the three expressions, ov p,e'vroi dXXd, ov yap dXXd, and ov povov y dXXd, is, that the ov is not retrospective but proleptic, referring to a proposition which is not expressed but is indicated by its contrary expressed in the dXXd. clause. § 159. E. Other noticeable combinations of Particles are such as follow. a. MeV ye answered by be, in working out a contrast between two characters. Symp. 180 d, 7rci>s §' ov 8vo rob Bed] fj pev ye k.t.X. f) be k.t.X. lb. 215 b, 7roXv ye Qavpaoiarepos eKelvov' 6 pev ye k.t.X. ov be k.t.X. Cf. Thuc. i. 70, 01 pev ye vecareponoiol. Dem. de Cor. 93. p. 257, 6 p.ev ye ovpp.axos a>v. [So Bekker : 6 pev yap Zurich ed.] iEschin. iii. 63. p. 62, 6 pev ye ttjv egovoiav bebcoKe. b. Kal prjv ovbe ... ye. Legg. 728 d— e, ripiov elvat oa>pa ov to KaXbv ovbe lo\vp6v k.t.X., kol p.rjv ovbe to. TovToav y evavrla, tcl §' ev rw peoa. § 160. The following are various 'combinations with brj, to which ye is often subjoined. 180 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 161,162. c. Kai fiev bf), with and without ye subjoined. Rep. 409 a, bio bf) Kai evr)6ei<; .... (fxxivovrai k.t.X. Kai pev bf), £$*)) crcpobpa ye avrb Trao-)(ovari,v. Symp. 196 e, £ bf) irpeirei fjpas papTvpicp xpwdai, 0Tl ^oir)Tf)s j ... TTaaav TroirjaLV ttjv Kara povcriKfjV . . . Ka\ pev bf) rr\v ye ra>v ^axov 7roir)criv tis evavriaaerai k.t.X. ) Soph. 217b, Kai pev bf) Kara rv\rjv ye, §> 2a>Kpare?, Xoycov irreXdftov 7rapa7r\7](TL(av k.t.X. Phdr. 231 d, Kai pev bf) el pev k.t.X. el be k.t.X. So 232 b, 233 a. d. 'AXXa pev bf), without or with ye. Crat. 428 b, dXXa. pev bf) — 'well, no doubt.' Crito 48 a, dXXd pev bf) . . . ye — ' well, but then' (in the mouth of an objector). Phsedo 75 a, Euthyphro 10 d, Gorg. 492 e, 506 d, dXXa. pev bf) . . . ye — 'but further' — in a consecutive proof. e. 'Arap ovv bf) . . . ye. Politic. 269 d. f. 'AXX' ovv bf) opcos ye. Rep. 602 b. g. Oti yap df) . . . ye. Phsedo 92 b. h. c i2s bf) toi — 'how true is it that.' Rep. 366 c, Tim. 26 b. i. 'Qs bf) crv — ironical. Gorg. 468 e, 499 b. j. Kat dfj Kai — 'then, I suppose/ ironically. Apol. 26 d. § 161. F. Correlative Particles. a. It is worth observing that in the Laws of Plato ov has more frequently be contrasted with it than dXXa. b. Instead of the common aXXcos re Ka\ we find sometimes Kai oXXco? Kai, as Laches 181 a, 187 c. c. Irregular Correlatives. Tim. 20 d, pdXa pev oYoVou, TravTaTraarCye pfjv dXr)6ovs. Legg. 927 b, dgv pev aKovovo-i, ftXe7rovo~i re o£v. Symp. 205 d, to pev KecpdXaiov, k.t.X. aXX' ol pev . . . 01 be k.t.X. lb. I77h, Kai tovto pev t)ttov Kai BavpaaTov, dXXa. k.t.X. Apol. 38 d, aTrop'iq pAv eakatKa, ov pevroi X6ya>v. §' 162. Note, that pevToi is used, and not be, (1) when particular emphasis has to be given to the opposition ; (2) where, as in the instance here quoted, be could not be conveniently used ; (3) in expressing opposition to a clause which is itself introduced by be. §§ 163—165.] COMPARISON. 181 § 163. Idioms op Comparison. A. Syntax of words of the Comparative Degree. B. „ „ words of the Superlative Degree. C. „ „ other Comparative words and formulae. A. Comparatives, a. Ordinary form. The only case needing remark under this head is that of a clause compared by fj, while its pronominal pre-statement (see above, §19) is compared in the Genitive. Phoedo 89 d, ovk av tls pe7£ov tovtov kolkov ira6oi, r) Xoyovs pLO~r)cras. Crito 44 C, tls av ato-^uoz/ e'lr) ravTTjs §o£a, 37 So/ceti/ k.t.X. \ So Lysias XXV. 23. p. 17 3? ovhev yap av e'lrj avTols xa\e7ro)repoz> tov- Tf&v, 77 iTvvddveaOau We trace the Idiom back to Homer, Od. vi. 182, ov /lev yap Tovye Kpelcrcrov Ka\ apeiov, H od' SpocppoveovTe vor)pao~LV oTkov e'xrjTOv 'Avrjp rjde yvvrj. So Hdt. i. 79? & s 0l napa. S6£av ecrx* to 7rpr)ypaTa } rj cos avrbs mredoKee. § 164. b. Rarer forms. a. 'Qs as the Conjunction of Comparison. Rep. 5 2 6 C, a ye pel^co irovov 7rapex €L °^ K av f> a $ L &s ovbe noXXct av evpoLs cos TOVTO. Apol. 36 d, ovk io-6' 6 tl pdXXov TvpeneL ovtcos cos . . . ariTflaOai. Cf. Horn. II. iv. 277, [vecpos] peXdvTepov rjvre 7TiWa. So Lysias vii. 12. p. 109, r)yovpevos pdXXov XeyecrdaL cos pot rrpoo-rJKe, ib. 31, p. Ill, irpoOvpoTepov TTe7Toir)Ka cos . . . r)vayKa£6pr]V. § 165. ]3. Comparative followed by Prepositions. Uapd. Note, that the napd in this construction is not * beyond/ but ' contrasted with' (lit. ' put co-ordinate with.') Cf. Phdr. 276 c, TrayicdXrjv Xeyeis irapa (pavXrjV jraididv. And Thucyd. V. 90, eneibr] irapa to Bikcuov to £vp(pepov Xeyeiv vireOecrOe. Politic. 296 a, el tls ytyvcocTKGi irapa tovs tcov epirpocrdev fieXTLOvs vopovs. Legg. 729 e, ecrri to. tcov £evcov Ka\ els tovs £-evovs dpaprrjpaTa irapa to. tcov ttoXltcov els 6ebv dvrjprrjpeva Tipcopbv paXXov. Upo. Phsedo 99 a, BtKaLOTepov . . . elvai irpb tov (pevyeiv . . . vne\eiv . . . dUr/v, Crito 54 b, pr]Te iraldas irepl ttXclovos ttolov prjTe to (rjv prjTe ciXXo prjbev irpb tov BiKaiov. Cf. Hdt. i. 62, oiai T} Tvpavvis irpb eXevOepirjs rjv dcmao'TOTepov. 182 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 166—168. 'AvtL Rep. 619 c, alnaaBai tcov KaKcov Tidvra pdXXov dvff iavrov. 'Ev. Euthyd. 303 C, 7roXXa pev ovv Kai aX\a oi Xoyoi vpa>v KaXd e^ovaiv, iv Be toIs ml tovto peyaXoTrpeTTearepov. Kara after fj. Phsedo 94 e, ttoXv Beiorepov twos irpdyparos r) Kad* dppoviav. § 166. c. Irregularities. a. Pleonastic form. Crat. 433 d, exeis tlvcl KaXXica rpoirov . . . aXXov, rj k.t.X. ; Gorg. 482 b, olpai rfjv Xvpav pot Kpeirrov eluai dpappoo-reiv . . . pdXXov rj ipe efiavrtp dvvptywvov eivai. Charm. 159 e, Politic. 286 a, Tim. 87 c, Legg. 729 e, 854c ; — all instances of a Comparative Adjective or Adverb with pdXXov or TJTTOP. § 167. £. Comparative in regimen twice over. Protag. 350 b, 6appa\ea>TepoL elcriv avrol eavrcov, €7reibdv pdOcoo-iv, rj np\v paOelv. Symp. 2 20 e, irpoBvporepos iyevov tcov o-Tparrjycop epe Xa&elv rj o-eavrov. A compendious way of saying two things ; one, that Socrates was anxious that Alcibiades should be chosen rather than himself ; the other, that, though the generals too were anxious for this, Socrates was more anxious than they. This con- struction is illustrated by the other simpler instance. Exactly parallel is Thuc. vii. 66, to y vnoXpnrov rrjs dogrjs do-6eveo~T€- pov avrb iavrov io~r\v rj el prjd* drjdrjo-av. § 168. y. Case after rj assimilated to the Case before it, by Attrac- tion. Phsedo HOC, €K [xpoapdrcov] Xap7rporepcov Kai Ka6apa>repa>v r) rovrav. Meno 83 C, dirb p,ei£ovos rj TOO-avTr/s ypapprjs. This does not appear to be the regular construction. Compare the constructions with axnrtp, §§ 175, 176, below. The Homeric use with 77 varies : on the one hand we have, II. i. 260, ml dpeloo-iv rjinep vplv 'Avdpdo-iv cbplXr/o-a' on the other hand, II. X. 557? dpeivovas, rje 7T€p o?8e,"l7nrovs dcoprjo-air, Od. xvii. 4 1 7? °"« XPI Bopevai Kai Xwiov r/i nep aXXoi, II. xxiv. 486, Mi^o-ai narpos aelo . . . TrjXUov iocnrep iyoav. In Demosth. also there are both constructions with f e. g. F. L. 27. p. 349, ovbey iXdrrovos rj rovrov' but De Cor. 162. p. 28 1, rcbv nporepov §§ 169—172.] COMPARISON. 183 77 eya> doKifxaaavrcov, ib. 1 78. p. 287? qp&P afieivov r) 'nelvoi npoopca- fievaov. § 169. & Omission of 7. Legg. 956 a, txpjyi/ 8e //?) irXiov %pyov yvvaiKos fiias enfirjvov. Ib. 958 e, vyjrrfkoTcpov nevre dv8p °^ ^P* ro ^ " J ' ou • • • ^SXXdv rt kcu 7repi avrov rov KaXov. [Oxon. alone omits rj here. The other MSS. and the edd. have rj Kai.] § 170. e. Omission of p.dXXov. Rep. 370 a, dXX' urcos ovtco pdbiov rj y Kelvv aXXcov dnavrcov. j8. Pleonastic. Symp. 218 d, rov cos 6 ti fieXrio-rov ip.e yeviadai. Legg. 731b, irpdov cos o rt /mXiora. Ib. 908 a, cos o tl fidXiara dypiaTaros. 184 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 173—175. l^gg' 758 a, COS 6 Tl fiakuTT 6\iyto-T0is. Cf. Horn. Od. viii. 582, juaXicrra K-qburroi. § 173. C. Other Comparative words and formulae, a. With fj. Kep. 330 C, ol be KTria-dixevoi 8*77X77 fj ol aXXoi awnd^ovTai avrd. I". 534 a > lva M W& s iroXkcurkcurlav Xoycov ip.7rXfjarrj fj oaaiv ol wape- \t]\v66t€s. Ik. 455 c > ^a(pep6vT /3ioi»y eVeXevra. Phdr. 228 d, bia(pepeiv ra tov iptovTos fj ra tov pfj. Crat. 435 a, dno tov dvopoiov ye fj 6 biavoovpevos (pOiyyopai. Phileb. 35 a, iniBvpei t£>v ivavriav fj 7rao-^et. So Phdr. 275 a. Gorg. 481 C, dXXd ns f)p.G>v 'ibiov tl %irao-x€ rrddos fj ol aXXoi. Crito 53 e, tI noieov fj eveoxovpevos iv ©errcrXi'a ; § 174. k. With Trapa. Rep. 337 d, erepav dnoKpta-iv Trapa Trdo~as tcivtcis nep\ biKaioo-vvrjs, /3eXrtco tovtcov. Phaedo 105 k, Trap" fjv to 7rpa>T0v eXeyov aXXrjv. Laches 178 b, aXXa Xiyovai Trapa ttjv avrcov bogav. lb. 181 d, iav §' e^co tl aXXo Trapa. to. Xeyopeva. Legg. 927 e, rroiKiXXovTes iTriTrjbevpacriv Ibiois tov t£>v opcpav&v filov Trapa tov to>v pf\. And, with Trapa simply, Theset. 144 a, dvbpeiov nap ovtlvovv. § 175. c. With axnrep and the like Adverbs ; and with correlative Adjectives of likeness. Phsedo 86 a, e'i tls bnax v P'-£ olTO t<» avr<3 Xoya aaTrep o~v. lb. IOO C, iav aol gvvboKrj coanep ipol. Gorg. 464 d, iv avbpdaiv ourcay dvof)TOis ctairep ol rralbes. Apol. 17 b, KeKaXXL€7rr)pevovs Xoyovs doo-Trep ol tovtcov. Politic. 274 d, ebei tt]v impeXeiav avrovs avrcov e'xeiv Kaddnep oXos 6 Koo-pos. With Adjectives. Gorg. 458 a, ovbev olpai too-ovtov KaKov, oaov boga yjsevbf}?. Tim. 78 b, irXiypa ig depos kol Trvpbs olov ol nvpTOi gvvvcpyvdpevos. Protag. 327 d, aypiol Tives, oloiTrep ovs rrepvcri ^epfKpdrrjs ibibagev eVi Ar)vaia>. So Crat. 432 e. Cf. Hom. Od. XX. 281, Uap §' ap 'Obvao-rj'i polpav Oeaav . . . ."larjv a>s ai>Toi rrep iXdyxavov. §§ 17^ 177-] COMPARISON. 185 § 176. Note, that where the Noun brought into comparison by v p,€i£6va>v aTTopprjTa. [So Bekker : avrovs Zurich ed.] Jelf (Gr. Gr. § 869) notices, as rare instances of Attraction, Thuc. Vi. 68, OVK CLTroXtKTOVS GKTTTtp Kal Tjpds, Soph. 0. C. 869, dolr) j3lOV Toiovtov olov Kape yrjpavai nore, Lys. 492. 72, [i. e. xiii. 72. p. 1 36] ovdapov yap eanu 'Ayoparov 'AOrjvaiov eivcu axnrep QpaavfiovXov. We may add, however, from Plato, the instance in Apol. 17 c, ov yap av irpertoL rfjde rfj rfXtKia axnrep petpaalco tvXclttovtl Xoyovs els vpas do-ieuat, — where peipaKia is affected by Attraction to 7t\o.ttovti. § 177. d. Comparison of one Sentence as a whole with another. Symp. 179 e, 3ta Tavra dUrjv avTco eireBecrav, .... 011% oocnrep 'A^iXXe'a iriprjo-av. lb. 189 C, boKOvcri .... Ovalas av noulv . . . . , ov% coaivep vvv tovtcov ovdev ylyverai. lb. 213 b, iXXox&v av pe evravda KareKeicro, oocnrep elcodrjs ££al(pvr)s avacpalveaOai. lb. 2 1 6 d, ipcoTiKcos Sta/cetrat . . . , KaX av . . . ovBev oiftev, cos to cr^pa avrov tovto ov 2ei\i]va>8es ; This sentence becomes an instance under the present head by the removal of the stop after tovto. The liveliness of the passage gains by this, as much as it suffers by the common punctuation. The conversion of a categorical sentence at its close into an interrogative one is natural and common. [The Zurich editors have the common punctuation.] Theset. 187 b, XPV> ® QeaiTrjTe, Xeyeiv irpoBvpoos paXXov rj cos to npco- tov coKveis dnoKplveo-Oai. Apol. 39 C, Tipcoplav vplv fjgeiv .... xaXenooTtpav vrj At* r) olav ipe dneKTovaTe. Cf., perhaps, Thuc. i. 19, iyevero avTols is rovbe tov noXepov r) Ibia napao-KevT] pel£cov rj cos to. KpaTLord tvotc pera dupaKpvovs tt)s £vppaxlas fjv6rjo-av — taking cos to be not 'when' but 'how;' but b b 186 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 178, 179. primarily Horn. Od. xxiv. 195-199, cos ev pepvrjT 'odvo-rjos .... Oux cos Tvvdapeov Kovp-q nana. prjcraTo epya. § 178. We may notice the graceful use of the vague Comparative expressing a modified degree. Symp. 176 C, tjttov av e'irjv drjbrjs. Politic. 286 b, €cr^€ prjicos irkeov. Phsedo 115 b, dvrep del \eyco, ovdev Kcuvorepov. Charm. 174 c, tjttov ti, Euthyd. 293 c, tjttov ovv ti, in Interrogative sentences, are a soft ovk and ovkovv. Cf. the Latin si minus. § 179. Idioms of Sentences :— Attraction. A full scheme of all the varieties of Attraction may be con- structed upon the instances found in Plato. The varieties which are treated of here include all but some of the most common. A. Attraction of Dependent sentences. a. Infinitival sentences. a. The ordinary form of Attraction here is that to be seen in Ar. Eth. III. V. 3, i

uvoyicq rjpuv avrrjv elkrjcpevai. Hip. Ma. 289 e, to opBcos Xeyopevov avaynr) avrco dTVobexeo~8ai. lb. 294 b, dudyKrj avrols fxeyaXois elvai. Charm. 164 b, yiyvcocrKeiv dvdyKi] tco larpco. Meno 88 C, el apa dperr) tcov iv rfj yjsvxfj ri icrri koi dvayKaiov avrco cocpeXip-cp eivai. Laches 196 e, dvayKaiov oTp,ai tco Tavra Xeyovri /irjdcvos Orjpiov dnobe- Xeo~6ai dvbpiav. Menex. 241 a, oidv re dp.vvecrBai oXlyois noXXovs. Phaedo 106 b, dftvvarov yjrvxfj dnoXXvcrOai. Phdr. 242 b, a'lrios yeyevrjcrOai Xoyco nw prjOrjvai. Phileb. 33 a, tco rbv tov (ppovetv eXop.evco (Siov olcrd' cos tovtov tov Tponov ovdev dnoKcoXvei {jjv. Crat. 392 a, opQorepov eori KaXeicrOai xoXkis KVfiivdiBos tco avrco opveco. Phsedo 92 C, irpeirei gvvcodcp elvai Koi tco 7rep\ tt]s app.ovias [Xdyco]. Soph. 231 e, %6ep.ev avrco crvyxcoprjcravTes bogcov ep.irobLcov fia6rjp,acn irep\ i\rvx*) v ircov. [So Oxon. See note on the text, p. 82, above.] Cf. PhilolaUS ap. Stob. p. 458, oi>x oXov r r}$ ov6ev\ tcov eovrcov ko\ yiyvcocrKOfievcov v(f> dfxcov yvcocr6rjp,ev, and again ib., dhvvarov rjs av koi avTais KocrpLrjOrj^ev. [Quoted by Boeckh in his Philolaos, p. 62.] Andoc. i. I40. p. 18, Tube vjxiv cigiov ev6vp.r}6fjvai. On the other hand we have, unusually, Gorg. 458 d, alo~xpov dr] to Xonrbv yiyverai epe ye p.rj edeXeiv. § 184. b. Attraction of Participial clause attached to the Infini- tival sentence. Here the unattracted form would be e. g. Crito 5 1 d, 7rpoayopevop.ev 'ABrjvaicov tco (3ovXopevcp . . . e£elvai Xa- f36vTa to. avToii dnievai. Cf. Hdt. ix. 78, Ka\ to\ Beos napehcoKe pvadpievov rrjv 'EXXuSa kXcos KaraBeaBai, and Horn. II. X. 187, tcov vnvos oXcoXei Nvkto (pvXacr- crop.evoiCTL. §§ 185—187.] ATTRACTION. 189 Instances of the attracted form are Apol. 17 c, ov8e yap av irpiitoi TJ}8e rfj rjXtKiq . . . nXaTTovTi Xoyovs els vpds elcrievai — where tvKcittovti is attracted into correspond- ence with fjXiKiq- though the Gender follows the thought, as in Legg. 933 a, reus •fyv)(aL$ tS)v dvOpoonoov 8vo~(07rovp.evais npbs dXXrfkovs. Cf. Hom. II. iv. 1 01, Ei^eo . . . pet-etv es dnropevoi (biXoo~o- Cpias XeXrjdevai tovs aXXovs otl ovdev ciXXo iitLT^bevovcnv t] aTroOvrj- s rots prjpaai Xeyerat, ovtco kcu to dXrjdes e\ew — where to . . . 2v KciKeov ipya£eo~6ai — i. e. d^XoV eanv on ol avra ra napovra ipyacrdpevoi, ol rroWoi, oioi r' elcrlv ov ra K.r.X. Phsedo 82 a, drj\a dfj kcu raXXa ol av eKdcrrrj 'lot — i. e. t)r)\6v icrn 8rj, of av eVt tcov ciXXojv iKaarr] 'loi. For the rest of the instances under this head see ' Binary Structure/ §§ 213, 218, below. § 188. /3. Comparative sentence introduced by fj, attracted, after omission of the Copula, into agreement with the principal con- struction. Meno 83 C, diro fieigovos rj rocravTrjs ypap.p.rjs. (See the remarks under ' Idioms of Comparison,' § 168, above.) § 1 89. B. Attractions involving the Relative. a. Attraction of Relative to Antecedent. a. From Accusative into Genitive. Apol. 29 b, KaKcov a>v olda on KaKa icrrtv. Phdr. 249 b, anions ov efilcocrav (3iov. Cf. Horn. II. V. 265, Trjs yap roi yeverjs, rjs Tpcot nep eipvona Zevs Aa>Ke. 13. From Accusative into various cases before /3ot/Xei 12 , which with the Relative forms almost one word, like Latin quivis. Crat. 432 a, ra beKa r) oarns /3ovXei aXXos api.6p.6s. Gorg. 517 a ? *Py a • • • °' ia tovtcovos (Sovkei elpyaarai. Phileb. 43 d, rpi&v ovtcov hvnva>v /3ot)Xei. y. From Dative into Genitive. Legg. 966 e, Trdvrcov a>v klvtjo-is . . . over Lav iiropicrev. 8. From Nominative into Genitive. Theset. 165 e, i-vveirobLo-drjs vn avrov, ov br] ere xeipeocrdpevos . . . av eXvrpov. Cf. Dem. de Cor. 130. p. 270, oibe yap fov erv^ev rjv — i. e. tovtcov a €TV\€V. 12 Compare (though these do not involve the .Relative) Rep. 414 c, iv\ hv ovros (pikoTipeiTaL tovs ix@P°vs alo-xvvea6ai, xxi. 21. p. 163, beopai pr) r)yr)o-ao~6ai rocravra xPW aTa etvcu d (' any Sum of money in consideration of which') iyeb ^ovXolprjv dv ti kclkov rfj TroXet yeviaOai. [So Bekker and the MSS. 81 a ed. Zurich.] § 191. b. Attraction of Antecedent to Relative. Meno 96 a, e^eis °^ v e ' 77e "' aXXov otovovv rrpdypaTos ov ol pev qbao-Kovres SibdcncaXoi eivai k.t.X. ; Politic. 271 C, TOV ftiov OV K.T.X. TTOTtpoV . . . TjV K.T.X. \ Meno 96 C, oopoXoyrjKCipev Se ye, rrpdypaTos ov prjTe SiddaKaXoL prjTe pa6rj-a\ elev, tovto pr}8e 8i8uktov eivac. Crito 45 b, TroXXaxov kcu aXXoae ottol av dv, Otprjs rrjs tot apa kXcos k.t.X., xxii. 6, o-kottov aXXov ov ov7rco tis |8aXev dvrjp Eio-o/zai at K€ Ti>x<0pi, xxiii. 35^, MrjXa §' a /moi K.r.X., IloXXa pev avTOS eya> Xrjio~o~opai, aXXa §' 'Amatol Aaxroua-' (where ju^Xa represents &vt\ prjXav). On Od. viii. 74 Nitzsch holds oi/i^y to be attracted from 01/177 not o'iprjv' because elsewhere the attracted word is the forerunner of a principal sentence to be completed, whereas here it is in sense but part of the exegetic Relative sentence. Thus the sentence would be one on the model of Od. i. 5°> N 770-0) iv dp^ipvTj] . . . N770-0S bevBprjecrcra, or II. vi. 396, 'HertWos* 'HeTiW, 6? i'vaie k.t.X. § 192. c. Construction changed after Relative clause by Attrac- tion to the Relative clause as the nearest construction. N. B. This principle, of Attraction to the nearest construction, extends also to other cases where there is no Relative clause. See §§ 201-203, below. Rep. 402 b, ov8i povcnicol rrpoTepov eaopeOa ovre avTol ovtc ovs cpapev rjplv naidevTeov eivai tovs (pvXaKas. Phsedo 66 e, rjplv eo~Tai ov (papev ipao~Tv ovopara peydXa XeycTai eVt cro eToipov ovtco icrriv ovde c'xei, to els top €7T€iTa yjpovov TavTa sivai avr<5 aoa^opeva to. vvv TrapovTa. Apol. 41a, evprjaei tovs dXrjOcos diKaarTas o'inep Kal XeyovTai ocet dim- £civ, Mlvcos K.T.X. Cf. Hom. H. ix. 131, peTa §' eVo-erat rjv tot aTrrjvpcov, Kovp-qv Bpiarjos. § 193. It is not to be supposed that the Nouns which follow the Relative clauses in the first three of these examples are Antecedents to the Relatives. As in the fourth example the Relative has an expressed Antecedent eWvou, so in the others it has one understood ; and the Nouns tovs cfrvXaKas, tovs crocpio-Tas, TavTa, are respectively exegetic of the understood Antecedent. (Tavra represents a Feminine Noun by another Attraction, which see below, § 201.) §§ i 9 4— 1 9 6 -] ATTRACTION. 193 Cf. Horn. Od. i. 69, KvkXcoitos nexoXtoTai ov 6(p6aXpov akdccxrev, 'Aj/ti- 6eov lloXvcprjpov. Also II. xii. 18-20. To this explanation must be also conformed that of Soph. Antig. 404, ov eKetvos ovdev aronov — where eKelvos is attracted from enelvov, since it is e^w and not Xeyoi which requires this Pronoun as its Subject. Symp. 199 C, kclXcos poi edogas Ka8r)yr}0~ao-6ai roO Xoyov, Xeycov on TTpatTov pev deoi avrbv eiri8ei£ai ottolos tU £o~tiv 6 "Epoos, varepov 8e ra epya avrov — where we should have had avrbv . . . rbv "Epcora but for the intervention of throws tls eo-nv, which prevented recurrence to the Accusative. The same bias shews itself abnormally in Lysias xxv. 18. p. 173, o'ieo~0G XP*) VCII > °vs £ ye epo\ TTavrdiraaiv airopov. Legg. 674 c j 0v0 * dpneXcov av ttoXX&v deoi ovS' grivi iroXei. Rep. 607 a, oo-ov povov vpvovs 7roir]0~eas TvapabeKTeov els rr\v iroXiv — for oo~ov noirjo-ecos io~Tiv vpvoi. Cf. Hom. Od. ix. 321, to pev . . . itaKopev . . /'Oo~arov 6' Icrrbv vrjos, X. 112, yvvcuKa Evpov oo-qv r opeos Kopvcprjv, 1 67, Tlelapa 6' oaov t opyviav. Ar. Eq. 977? 7rpeo-(3vTep(OP Tivav oteov dpyaXecurdTOiv. Soph. Aj. 488, 7rarpbs E'lirep tivqs crOevovros, 1416, dvdpl .... dyaOa . . . Kovbevi 7ro) Xcoovl dvrjrcov, O. C. 734> noXiv . . . vQevov- a-av ... e'l tlv 'EXXddos peya. Arist. Metaph. IX. iii. I, dvrl- Keirai 8e to iv kcu ra iroXXa koto. rrXeiovs rpolrovs, hv eVa to ev ks dbiaiperov kcu diaiperov. § 196. 0. More peculiar (because the Relative is made to agree with the Subject of the Relative clause — contrast ol>x ovirep rrjs rpidbos above) are 194 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 197—199. Soph. 246 C, virep rjs rlOevrai rrjs oxxrias — i. e. vnep [rov\ o rldevrat ttjv ovalav eivat. Gorg. 477 a, (A) wCpeXelrai apa; (B) Nat. (A) T Apa rjvirep eycb vnoXapfidvco rfjv cbcpeXciav ; — i. e. apa [coc^eXerrat toOto] onep eyco virokapftavG} rrjv atCptXeiav eivai ; § ] 97- y. In the following the Relative clause is represented by the Relative word only, the Subject being identical with that of the main sentence and being therefore, with the Copula, omitted. Cf. Horn. Od. ii. 209, Evpvpax* r)8e Ka\ aXXoi oaoi pvrja-rrjpes dyavol, — i. e. aXXoi pvrjO-Trjpes dyavol, oo~oi earre' and Hdt. iv. 28, d(po- Ptjtos olos Kpvpos — 'frost which was insufferable, — to such a degree was it;' and ib. 194, ol Se acpi a(p8ovoi oa-oi iv rols ovpeo-i ylvovrai' in all which instances there is no patent Attraction, but it is made possible by the Ellipse, after the Relative, of its Subject and the Copula. Euthyd. 275 c, o-ocpiav dpr)xavov otrrjv — 'inconceivable, so great was it.' Gorg. 477 d, V7rep9 cos oi> (pfjaopev. Cf. Hdt. vii. 145, ovdapav tg>v ov pefa. §§ 200—203.] ATTRACTION. 195 § 200. f. Attraction of the Relative into agreement with the Predicate of its own clause. Phdr. 255 c > V T °v pevparos iiceivov ttr^yr), bv ipepov Zevs oovopao-e' (where the Antecedent of bv is pevparos.) Cf. the Homeric *H Bepis eo-rlv. II. ix. 276, &c. § 201. C. a. Attraction of a Neuter Pronominal Subject into agreement with the Predicate. Apol. 18 a, beopai . . . tovto (TKOTrelv, k.t.X.' diKcuTTOv yap avrrj dperr) — where of course avrrj refers to tovto o-Konelv k.t.\. Soph. 240 b, ovk bv cipa eariv ovrios rjv Xeyop,ev elicova; Crat. 386 c, el . . . eo-rlv avrrj rj akrjdeia (referring to what had just been agreed upon). Minos 317 a, 7roXtrtKa apa ravra o-vyypdppard eo~riv, ovs oi av6pa>7roi vopovs Kokova-iv. Crito 48 C, as be o~v Xeyeis Tag CKeyj/eis . . . , pr) Oaveiv piv eariv ov TrenpcDpevov' Avrrj yap rjv av nrjpd- ra>v d7raX\ayrj. So Virg. iEn. x. 828, Si qua est ea cura. § 202. b. Attraction of the Copula into agreement with the Predicate. Meno 91 C, ovroi ye (pavepd eVrt Xafirj. Legg. 735 e > T0 ^ s peyio-ra rjpaprrjKoras dvidrovs be ovras, peyio-rrjv be ovaav (3Xdj3rjv. Parmen. 134 b, ndvra, a br) coy Ibe'as avrhs ovaas xmoXapfidvopev. Politic. 271 e, 6eos evepev . . . , £a>ov bv erepov Beiorepov. § 203. c. Attraction of the Article of an Infinitival clause into agreement with a word preceding, with which that clause is in Apposition. Charm. 173 c, eppevopev ra> Xoyco rco evbaipova eivai rbv e7rio~Trjp6va>s ££)VTa. Legg. 908 C, rfj bogy, rfj OeSiv eprjpa eivai ndvra. Cf. Hdt. vi. I30, rrjs dgia)o~ios, rrjs eg ipev yrjpai. Xen. Mem. I. Hi. 3, KaXrjv exoipi Ila- XaprjBet k.t.X., dvTLirapaftdXXovTi ra ipavrov ndBrj Trpbs ra eKelvoov, as eya> olpai, ovk av drjdes e\rj. Symp. 198 C, to tov 'Oprjpov eireTrovBrj, — etpofiovprjv k.t.X. Phsedo 67 e, el (fioftolvTO Koi ayavanrolev , ov noXXr) av dXoyta e'ir], — el prj acrp.evoi etcelcre 'loiev oi k.t.X. ' lb. 68 d, ov tovtov tovto nenovBaaiv, — duoXaatq tivl craxppoves elcriv', lb. 73 k> avT0 tovto deopat, iraBelv nep\ ov 6 Xoyos, — dvapvijaB^vai. So too 74 a, Gorg. 513 c, 519 b, Phileb. 46 c, Menex. 235 b, — in all of which the first-placed expression is formed with ndo-xeiv. lb. 7° a ? W^X 1 ?] * Ketv T) T U W*P a SiacpBeiprjTai re kcu aTroXXvrjTat, fj av avBp7ro$ dnoBdvy' — ebBvs dnaXXaTTopevq tov aatpaTos .... o'l^rai hiaiTTopevq ko\ oidev en ovSapov §. Here the sentence evBvs . . . . rj is the complete double of the sentence eKeivrj .... dnoBdvrj. lb. 86 b, tolovtov ri paXiara viroXapfidvopev . . . eivai, — Sarrep k.t.X. } Kpdaiv eivai tovtcdv k.t.X. Gorg. 505 e, iva pot to tov 'Eruxdppov yevrjTai, — a npo tov dvo avbpes eXeyov, eh &>v ikgvos ye'voopai, Phileb. 35 e, (A) tt S\ orav iv peo-a> tovt(ov ylyvrjTai \ (B) II cos ev peo-a>' } (A) Ata pev to irdBos dXyfj k.t.X.; 198 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 208, 209. '. 697 a, t6 Be rpixo BieXeiv .... ireipaOtopev, — BiaTepelv x a p^ to. re fieyio-ra Kai BevTepa Kai rplra. lb. 7°8 b, orav prj tov tcov eapayv [6 KaroiKia-pos] yiyvrjTai rpwirov, — ev yevos cltto pids Ibv ^a>pa? olici^TjTai. This Idiom begins with Homer : see Od. viii. 339, At yap tovto yevoiro, ava£ eKarrjfBoX' ' AiroXXov, — Aev evboipt irapa xP var *U 'AcppoBiTfl. Cf. Aristoph. Lys. 1 2 1 9, el Be irdvv Bel tovto Bpav, vplv xapi£eo~6ai. 9 TaXanrcoprjcropev. Virtually similar is Apol. 20 C, ov yap Brjirov crov ye ovBev tcov aXXcov irepiTTorepov irpay- parevopevov eneiTa roaavTrj (prjpr) .... yeyovev, — el pr\ tl eirparTes dXXoiov tj ol iroXXoi' (for o~ov .... irpaypaTevopevov is a virtual protasis, of which el ... . ttoXXoi is the double.) Cf. Thuc. V. 97, pT)0~eo~6ai, — Bepevov k.t.X., eiTa dve£e- o~6ai aov Xeyovros k.t.X. j Crito 45 e, pf) Bogy anav to it pay pa .... dvavBpia ire7TpdxBai . . .— KaKiq Kai dvavbpia Bianecpevyevai fjpds BokcIv. Apol. 26 e, ovtghfi aoi Bokg>, — ovBeva vopifa 6ebv etvai j [So Oxon. alone. See note at p. 61, above.] Legg. 859 d, eivat tovs dacaiovs dv0pv "Io-toto BaKpvx^v, acre Kprjvrj peXdvv- Bpos . . . , — *£2s 6 fiapv CTTevdx<>>v eive ' Apyeioiai p.eTrjvBa. Cf. also Soph. 13 [In the margin of the MS. is written — " Quaere. Are these really distinct from those given in § 207?"] §§ 210, an.] BINARY STRUCTURE. 199 Aj. 840, Kai (T aKOveiv, Scrnep oi Kopv[3avTia>VT€S tgov avXa>v 8okovo~iv aKoveiv, — Kai iv epoi avrt] r) rj^rj . . . /3o/x/3*t. Politic. 260 C, «at p.01 8oKel Tjj8e Try, KaOdirep k.t.X., — Kai to ftaaiktKov ylvos eotKev d(pa>pio-dai. Crat. 417 b, eotKev, ov^l KaOdirep ol Kairqkoi avra xp&vrai, — oi Tavrrj Xeyeiv poi 8oKe1 to Xvo~iTeXovv. lb. 433 a, tva p.r) ocpXoopev, coairep ol iv Alyivr/ vvKTcop irepuovres 6\jre 68ov, — Ka\ rjpels eiri to. irpdypaTa 86gajpev avTjj ttj dXrjdela. ovt8r)j ola pr) 8vvao-0ai tt)v Kes fj8rj Kai o~v aKrjKoas to>v dyaBtov larpcov, eirei8dv K.r.X, — Xeyovai irov otl k.t.X. § 211. d. Pairs of Interrogative sentences, the former of which is partly Pronominal, — a skeleton sentence, which is put forward to arrest attention, and to introduce the re-statement, of which it is 200 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§212,213. the double. The Pronominal part is the Interrogative ri, which represents the Predicate, or part of the Predicate, of the re-state- ment. These Binary Interrogative sentences therefore follow the general principle of Double Interrogatives in Greek ; which is, that the one introduces the other, — the first-placed being always the less precise and definite. Phdr. 234 C, tl croi (paiverai 6 Xoyos ; oi>x virepcpvas elprjo~0ai ; — where ri foreshadows vnepcpvas elprjo-Bai. (Cf. Symp. 204 d, 6 epa>v tS)v Kakcbv tl epa ; TeveaOaL atmS.) lb. 269 a, tl be top peXlyrjpvv "AbpacrTov olopeOa rj aril TlepiieXea, el aKovaeiav k.t.X. ; noTepov xaXencos av avTovs . . . elne^v k.t.X. ; Charm. 154 d, tl vol (paiveTai 6 veavio-Kos ; ovk ev7rp6o-a>7rus ; Phileb. 2 7 e, tl be 6 cros [/3tos] ; ev t'lvl yevei av XeyoiTO ; lb. 56 e, tl be XoyicrTiKr) k.t.X. ; iroTepov a>s pla XeKTeov ; Phdr. 2*7*7 d, tl 5' av 7repl tov KaXov r) alaxpov elvai to Xoyovs Xeyeiv k.t.X.', apa ov bebr)Xa>Ke to. Xex&evra . . . as k.t.X. ',—t'l foreshadows 0)S K.T.X. Protag. 309 b, tl ovv to. pvv ; t) nap' eKeivov (paivei ; Soph. 266 C, tl be TTju rjpeTepav Tex vr ) v > &P OVK avTrjv pev oluav oIko- bopLKjj (prjcopev noielv ; Phsedo 7 8 d, tl be tcov noXXcov koXcov . . . . ; apa Kara TavTct e^et, r) k.t.X.; (where the Genitive is suspended in a loose construc- tion, which the re-statement supersedes.) Gorg. 474 d, tl he Tobe ; to. KaXa navTa els ovbev aTroftXertGiV KaXels eKaa-TOTe KaXd ; Here the virtual Subject of the re-statement is foreshadowed by Tobe, which therefore is Nominative ; and the Predicate by tl, which (as in all the other instances) is Accu- sative. Cf. Soph. Aj. IOI, tl yap br) nals 6 tov AaepTiov ; TIov vol Tvxrjs eaTrjKev ; § 212. The passages also (quoted under 'Accusative Case,' §§ 15— 19, above), in which a Pronoun Accusative is in Apposition to a whole sentence following, are virtually of Binary Structure : for the Accusative is the shadow of a sentence. § 213. B. When the Binary Structure, not extending to the Verb, consists of two successive expressions describing the same thing. a. Where the first-placed expression is the less logically specific, or the less emphatic, and is introductory to the other. §§214,215.] BINARY STRUCTURE. 201 a. Where it is a Noun-phrase. Apol. 37 C, rfj del Kadio-ra/jLevr] dpxfj, rois epBeica. Phsedo 65 d, Xeyirivov yepos. lb. 113a, tcop TeTeXevrrjKOTcov, to>p ttoXXcop. Symp. 215 b, r<5 TZarvpcp, rw Mapavq. Euthyd. 274 e, to npaypa, rr)V dperfjv, paOrjTOP eipai. Crat. 415 a, to ovopa r) pr/xaprj. lb. 435 C, TC0 (popTLKG) TOVTCO TTpOCTXPWdai, Trj £vp6r)Krj. Protag. 317 b, evXdfteiap Tavrrjv olpat /3eXri'a> eKeiprjs eivai, to opoXo- yelv paXXop rj egapvov elvai. Charm. 173 e ? eppevopev rc5 Xoyco, tm evdaipova eivai tov emcrTrjpovcos £a>VTa. Legg. 908 C, ttj do£i], Tfj 6ecbv eprjpa elvai irdvTa. Gorg. 462 C, ovkovp koXop o~oi doKel r) prjTOpiKrj eivai, — x a P^C €(r ^ at °l^ v t eivai dvdp7rois \ § 214. 0. Where it is Pronominal. Euthyphro 8 e, tovto pep dXrjOes Xeyeis, to KecpdXaiop. Apol. 24 e, avTO tovto oi§e, tovs vopovs. Crat. 423 e, avTO tovto pipelaOai hvvaiTo eKacrTov, tt)v overlap. Gorg. 5 00 c > °^ Tl & v paXXop o~Tvovbdo-eie tis, rj tovto, ovTiva XPI Tponov {fjv ; (the two expressions are ov and rj tovto k.t.X.) lb. 518 a, TavTas pev 8ovXo7rpeTrels elvai, Tas aXXas Texvas. Phileb. 38 b, enerai TavTais . . . fjdoprj kcl\ Xvnr) iroXXaKis, dXrjOel /cat yjfevftel Bogy Xeyco. Tim. 2 2 d, ol pep ep toIs opecri Biao-co^opTai, (3ovk6Xoi popels re. Protag. 351 a, to pep na\ dnb eirio-T-qprjs yiypeoSai, Tr)p bvpapw. Rep. 396 C, 6 pep poi boKei, rjp S' eyoo, peTpios dvrjp, iQeXrja-eiP. Legg. 86 1 d, toIp BvoIp to pep ovk dpeKTOP epoi, to ye pr) Xeyeip k.t.X. Symp. 198 d, to Be apa ov tovto rjp, to koXcos enaipelp otiovp. lb. 207 d, dvvaTai Be Tavrrj popop, ttj yevecrei. lb. 2 22 a, evTOS uvtcop yiypopepos . . . povp exovras povovs evprjaei, tcov Xoycov. Add to these the frequently -recurring expression rj S' 6s 6 ScoKpaTrj?. § 215. Under this head come also the instances of avTO in its peculiar Platonic meaning. d d 202 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§316,217. Symp. 199 d, avro tovto narepa. Phsedo 93 b, civt6 tovto . . . \j/vxrjv. Protag. 360 e, t'i ttot eaAv avTo r) aperr). Crat. 4 1 1 d, avTo f) vorjo-cs. Rep. 363 a, ovk avTo diKaioavvrjv enaivovvTes. § 216. y. Where it is a Relative clause. Rep. 402 b, ovt€ avToX ovt€ ovs (papev r)p\v TraiBevTeov elvai, tovs cpvXaicas. Phsedo 74 d, oh vvv hr) ekeyopev, to7s 'laois. Similarly Hip. Ma. 291 c, Gorg. 469 a, Protag. 342 b, Crito 48 c, Legg. 653 e, &c. Crat. 422 b, a ipoaTas, to. ovopaTa. Similarly Phileb. 42 e. Tim. 33 a, a £vvto~Tq } to. aapaTa. Hip. Ma. 294 a, op navTa to, peyaXa eort peyaXa, rc3 vnepe'xovTi. Symp. 200 d, eKeivov epqv, b ovttco eroipov avTat eorlv ovbe e\ei t to els tov eirena ^povov TavTa eivai avTW o~a>£6peva to. vvv rrapovTa, Theset. 167 b, a 8r) Tives to. a . . . nav hvvarbv necpvKev. Phdr. 246 C, tj de . . . [^v^j)] . . . aw pa yr)'ivov Xafiovara, £ooov to £vp- Tvav iKkrjOrj. Phsedo 61 h, ols rrpoxelpovs el)(OV pvBovs . . . , tovtovs inoirja-ay ols TTpOiTOLS eP€TV\6V. lb. 69 b, x a> P L £°f JLeva $* cppovrjaecos, . . . . pr) o~Ktaypa a ttolco, .... noXXrj av Kal paKpa paOvpla e'lrj tov Xoyov. § 220. j8. Where the first-placed expression is collective, the other distributive. Symp. 178 a, tovtcov vplv epco eKaarTOv tov Xoyov. lb. 190 d, avTovs diarepS) Si'^a eKaarov. Tim. 32 b, npbs aXXr]Xa .... aTrepyao-dpevos, o t'l nep irvp npbs depa tovto depa npos vboop, Kal 6 tl drjp npos vdcop vdcop npbs yrjv. We may trace this back to Homer : e.g. Od. i. 348, oo-re SuWu> d d 2 204 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 221, 222. 'Avdpacnv dXqbrjo-TJjo-tv o7rcos eOeXyaiv endo-rcp, X. 1 7 2, aveyeipa S' iralpovs MeiXixlois eVeecrcrt, irapaarabov avdpa €Kao~Tov. § 221. y. Where the latter expression is restrictive of the former, being in fact only a re-enuntiation of part of it. Phsedo 64 b, olpai yap av 8rj tovs 7roXXovs . . . £vp(f)dvai av, tovs pev nap rjpiu dvdpoonovs Kal navv. GrOrg. 5*7 e ? $6£ai Ka\ avrco Kal to7s aXXois 6epa7revTr)v etvai awpaTos, ttovtI rca pfj elBoTL oti k.t.X. Cf. Hdt. viii. 83, Kal ot avXXoyov tcov iiriQaTeoav 7roirjo-dpevoi irporjyo- peve ev e^ovra i< ndvTcov QepicrTOKXerjs. Aristot. Eth. VI. xii, eVeira Kal noiovat pev, ov\ cos larpucrj 8e vyUiav, aXX' cos t) vyUia, ovtcos fj o~o *** v k.t.X., — tov Togorov belongs to the sentence aXXr) p.ev 17 dncoOovaa Xetp, k.t.X. § 226. C. Dependent sentence resolved into two parts, by disengaging from its construction and premising a portion of it consisting of a Noun or Noun-phrase, and bringing both parts co-ordinately under the government of the Principal sentence. 206 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§ 227. a. The premised expression maybe the Subject of the Dependent sentence. a. The Dependent sentence being one with a Finite Verb. Euthyd. 294 C, olada EvBvdrjpov, onoaovs odovras e'xei \ Hip. Ma. 283 a, TeKpr\piov aotyias tcov vvv dvOpconoov, oo~ov diacpepovai. Pheedo 75 b? elXi](p6ras e7riaTr)pr)v avrov tov i'crov, o tl eo~Tiv. Theset. 162 d— e, 6eovs . . . ovs eycb ... cos elo\v rj cos ovk elo~iv, egaipcb. Phsedo 86 d, Ke(3r)Tos aKovaai, ri av ode eyKaXel rep Xoyco. lb. 95 b, ravra dfj ovk av Bavpaaaipi Ka\ tov Kdbpov Xoyov el irdBoi. Laches 179 e, elcrrjyqaaTO ovv tis rjpiv Kai tovto to pdOrjpa, 6Vi KaXov e'lrj paOelv to ev ottXois pd\€a6ai. Gorg. 449 e, BrjXovo-i tovs Kapvovras, cos av hiaiToopevoi vyiatvoiev. Note, that a very loose government suffices for the premised expression, as in the three instances following. Soph. 260 a, Sei \6yov rjpds hiopo\oyr]o-ao~6ai y tl ttot eo~Tiv. Ibid, d, ttjv eld Tco *re P 'idois, el o)XKa forjveKea TrpoTapoiprjv. The looser governments are illustrated by Thuc. iii. 51, efiovXeTO 8e NiKias . . . tovs ILeXoTrovvrjaiovs, ottcos prj iroiSiVTat. cktcXovs, Aristoph. Av. 1 269, Aeivov ye tov KrjpvKa, tov Trapa tovs PpoTovs Olxopevov, el prjbeiroTe voo~Tr}0-ei iraXiv. § 227. /3. The Dependent sentence being an Infinitival one. Legg. 653 a, (pp6vr)0-iv de \Xeyco, etvai] evTvxes orco Ka\ npbs to yrjpas irapeyiveTo. Crat. 419 d, ovhev irpoabelTai tov diori pr)6r)vai. Phdr. 242 b, a'lrios yeyevrjo-dai Xoyoo nv\ pr)6rjvai. Symp. 207 a, tov dyadov eavTop etvai del epoos eo~TLV. §§ 228, 229.] BINARY STRUCTURE. 207 In the remaining instance the premised expression becomes the Subject of the Principal sentence. Charm. 153 b, fjyyeXTai . . . f] fxdxr] ndvv icr^upa yeyovevai. § 228. Note, that Attraction occurs, where possible, in the residuary Dependent sentence also ; as in the remaining instances. Phsedo 90 b, iiriibdv tls Tno~Tevvrj Xoycp nvi, dXrjOe'i elvai. Crat. 425 b, av -rncTTeveis aavra, olds r av eivai — attracted for olov t av elvai ere. Hip. Ma. 283 e, i(f)66vovv toIs iavT&v iraio-iv, cos (3eXTL0~T0is yeveadat. Rep. 459 b, del apoXoyr)Kapev tovto ye, oti ovk av aXXoos ^X° l - Phsedo 65 d, ttjs ovalas, o Tvyxdvei eKaaTov \ov. (Cf. §213, above.) Meno 7 2 fy peXiTTrjs TTepl ovo~ias, 6 ti ttot eaTi. 208 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§ 230. Cf. ThuC. V. 16, UXeicrTodvag . . . es ev6vp,lav rots AaKebaipoviois del 7Tpo^aXX6pevos, a>s did tyjv \eKeivov KaBodov TrapavoprjOela-av ravra gvpfiaivot. In the three remaining instances, the premised expression becomes the Subject of the Principal sentence. Phsedo 82 a, 8rjXa drj Ka\ TaXXa, oil av iicdo-Tr) tot, Kara rds avT&v 6p.oioTr}Tas rrjs peXeTrjs — which means dr/Xov 8r) oca /cat raXXa earat, Tovrecmv oi av eKaa-Tf] tot k.t.X. Crito 44 d, avrd drjXa Ta 7rap6vra } on oioi r elalv oi iroWol ov rd CfxiKpoTara t£>v icancov e£epyd£ecrdai — which means $77X01/ on 0101 r 1 elaiv . . . igepya£eo-6ai, tocovtov yap epyov iarlv avrd rd napovra. lb. 45 e, prj Sogr) cLTvav rd irpdypa to irep\ ere dvavhpia tcvc tJ} 77/x.erepa 7re7rpa^^ai, Kal f) e'eo-odos Tjjs dUrjs els to diKaarrrjpiov, 00s f etcnJX- 6es, k.t.X. § 230. ft. The Dependent sentence being Infinitival. Symp. 197 a, ttjv t&v £a \ Phsedo 102 b, opcoXoyeh to top 2cppiav virepeyew 2eoKpaTovs, ox>x cos Tols pr]p,ao~i Xe'yerat ovtco Ka\ to dXrjdes e\ew. Legg. 641 d, to dXrjdes &ucrxvpi£eo-6ai } Tavra ovtcos ^X €IV ' Rep. 489 e, hcfjpev ttjv (pi>o~cv, olov dvdyKrj cpvvac top koXov t€ KayaOov iaopevov. lb. 443 b, dpxopevoc Trjs TroXeas oIkL£civ. Gorg. 5 J 3 e » emxctprjTeov fjp.lv eort Tfj tvoXei mi toIs iroX'cTacs Bepairevew. Legg. 79° c > fjpyp>c0ci tcov irepl Ta crcopara p,v6a>v XexOevrtov dtanep- aiveiv. Politic. 285 e, toIs pev tcov ovtcov, padicos mTapaBelv, alcr6r]Tac Tives 6p,oioTrjTes 7re(pvKao~i. Hip. Ma. 294 e, o'tx^Tai ap fjpas 8ia7re(pevy6s to koXov, yva>vai o tl 7Tot eo-Tiv. Crito 5 2 b, oi>§' incOvpia ere aXXrjs 7roXecos eXaftev elbevai. Critias 1 1 5 d, eW els eKirXrj^iv p.eye6ea-'i t€ ndXXeo-i re epycav Ibelv ttjv o'iKr)0~iv dneipydo-avTO. Phsedo 84 C, cos Idelv e'cpalveTO. Apol. 33 b, 7rapexTav. Cf. Horn. II. vii. 409, Oif yap tis (peida> veKvcov KaTaTedvrjooTOiv TiyveT, enei Ke ddveoo-t, irvpos peiXiaarepev 2>m. §§33 i j*33-] ABBREVIATED CONSTRUCTION. 209 Virtually similar is Phileb. 26 b, vftpiv . . . KaTiBovcra f) 6eo$, irepas . . . ovBev . . . ivov. In the remaining instances the premised expression becomes the Subject of the Principal sentence. Apol. 37 d, Kakbs ovv dv pot 6 /3tos etr], e£e\66vTi . . . £j}v. Protag. 313 a, iv a ndvT icrri ra era, rj ev tj KaKG>s irpaTTeiv — (sc. v peyicrTwv peBegeiv iirl \\oyiaTiKrjv levai. Gorg. 449 b— C, elal pev eviai tcov a7roKpicrea>v dvaynalai Bid p,aKpa>v frovs \6yovs iroieia&ai. Euthyd. 281 d, KivBvvevet gvfmavra a k.t.\., ov irepl tovtov 6 \6yos avTols elvai o7Tojs k.t.A. Cf. ThuC. viii. 46, evTe\ecrTepa Be to. Beivd, f /3paxe7 popioa rrjs Bandvrjs, Kal dpa peTa rrjs eavTov dcrCpaXeias, avTOvs irepl iavrovs tovs "EXkijvas KaTaTphjrat. § 231. Idioms of Sentences : — Abbreviated Construction. A. Antecedent and Relative clauses supplying each other's Ellipses. Symp. 212 C, o n Kal oirrj palpus ovop-dfav, tovto 6v6p,a£e — where we must supplement the Antecedent sentence thus — tovto ml Tavrrj 6vopa£e. Phsedo 98 a, TavTa Kal noielv Kal 7rdo~xeiv a 7rdo~xei — where the Relative sentence intended is fully a navx* 1 Ka i noiel. Symp. 178 a, a Se /xaAiora Kal cov e'Boge jxoi afyop.vr\povevTov, tovtcov vp.lv epS> Udo-Tov tov \6yov — where the Antecedent sentence fully is tovtcov eKaaTov tov \6yov, Kal Tavra, vpuv epa>. § 232. B. Ellipses supplied from parallel constructions in co-ordi- nate clauses. Phseclo 62 a, Tvy^dvei . , . ecrTiv 6t€ koi oh (3s\tiov TeOvdvai fj (fjv. oh Be (3c\tiov Tedvdvai, 0avp,ao~T6v . . . el tovtois toIs dvdpa>7rois p.fj oaiov eo-TL k.t.X., — where after oh Be must be supposed to be repeated Kal ore, and after tovtois toIs dvtipawois similarly Kal Tore. lb. 69 b, tovtov pev ndvTa Kal perd tovtov oovovpevd Te Kal Trnrpao-KO- peva .... peTa (ppovfjtreas — where must be supplied (ppovr)(rea>s Kal before perd s, parallel to tovtov Kal perd tovtov. e e 210 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 233, 234. Politic. 258 a, Qeairrjrcp . . . avvepi^a x^es Bid XoyaiV Kai vvv aict)Koa f SeoKparovs 8e ovberepa — where the clauses supply each other crosswise ; aKrjKoa requires the Genitive Qeairrjrov, and ovberepa implies a ScoKparei parallel to QeaiTrjrco, as well as a 2a>Kpdrovs. § 233. C. Dependent Noun silently supplied from one of two co-ordinate clauses to the other, in a new and different government. Apol. 19 d, agio) vfxas dXXrjXovs dibaaiceiv re Kai fypd^ew — where dWrjXois is to be supplied to . . Kai dvaKoivovaOai — SC. (rot. Phdr. 238 e, r&> vno emOvpias dpxopeva, SovXevovri re — SC. eniOvpia. lb. 278 e, npos dXXrjXa koXXcov re Kai dcfraipatv—SC. an dXXrjXcov. Symp. 195 b, perd be vecov del ^vvearri re Kai ecrriv. i. e. Kai eVri ra>v vecov. Cf. Xen. Hell. I. iii. 9, opKovs eXaftov Kai ebocrav napa $apvaf$d£ov. § 234. D. 14 New Subject in the second of two clauses silently supplied from the former. Rep. 333 c, orav prjbev bey avrco ^p^o-^at, dXXd Keladai — SC. avro. Symp. 212 C, Bvpav y^ocpov napaax^v, . . . v toiovtcov, pr]8e /xere^et avT&v. Gorg. 482 b, a crv vvv 6avp,d£eis, "napr)aBa be Kai avTos \eyoptvois. Menex. 243 C, 5>v XP*} " ei fiefivrjadai re Kai irraive'iv. § 236. In the following passages, the force of the Relative is still to be supplied, although a Demonstrative Pronoun fills its place in the construction. Rep. 357 b, fjftovai oaac a/3Xa/3eT? Kai pt]bev did ravras ylyverai. lb. 395 d, (ov (papev KrjdeadaL Kai 8elv avrovs avdpas dyadovs yevecrdai. Phfiedo IOO b, a el fioi 8L8(os re /cat ^vyx^pds elvai ravra. Virtually similar is Rep. 337 e, ttp&tov p.ev \ir\ dbcos, . . . erreiTa . . . d7r€ipr)fievov avrat e'it], where /mj) el8a>s is the equivalent of os pr} eldeirj. § 237. F. Common part supplied from a preceding to a subse- quent clause. a. Definite Article. The brackets indicate where Articles have to be supplied. The complete irregularity with which they are expressed and omitted shews that the object is, next to conciseness, to produce variety of expression and sound. Rep. 344 C, to fiev tov Kpelrrovos gvp ot* fiev tq) ovti yvacris, dyva)o~ia §' eVi [ ] ^77 ovti. lb. 544 C, 17 re ... enaivovpevT], 17 KprjTiKtj' . . . Kai [ ] bevTepa . . . Ka\ovp.€VT] S' oXiyapxla. lb. 545 a > T0V tpd^dveiKov . . . Kai [ ] dXiyapxt-Kov av Ka\ [ ] drjpoKpa- tikov Kai tov TvpavviKov. Phsedo 67 d, x a> P L(T l 10S T V S tyvxv 5 f * 7r ° [ ] ^apaTos. [So Oxon.] Gorg. 469 e, Kai Ta ye 'Adrjvaiav vea>pia Ka\ [ ] Tpiypeis Kai to. irKola. [So most MSS.] Symp. 186 e, rj re laTpiKr) . . . , ooaavTcos de Kai [ ] yvpvao~TiKr) Kai [ yecopyia. E e 2 212 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 238—241. Phdr. 2 53 d, dpcTT] be rls tov ayaOov, rj [ ] kcikov Kaicia, ov bieliropev. Phileb. 45 a, pei£ovs yiyvovrai ire pi tovs KapvovTas . . . , rj nepl [ vyialvovras ; Legg. 789 C, tovs pev iXdrrovas els ras ^ttpas-, [ ] pei^ovs §' vno rfjv dyKakrjv. lb. 960 C, [ ] Adxeviv pev rr)v 7rpa>TrjV, [ ] KXw^co be rr)v bevTepav, Tr)v*kTponov be [ ] rpiTrjv. § 238. b. Preposition. Syttip. 209 d, Kai els "Oprjpov ^\e\j/as ml 'Haiobov. Apol. 25 b, Kai rrepl Inrrciv Kai to>v ciXkav. So Phsedo III d, &C. § 239. c. Some larger part of the clause. Politic. 308 e, roils pr) bvvapevovs KOivavelv . . . ocra e'ort reivovra npos dpeTTjv, aXX' els ddeoTrjra. § 240. G. Anastrophe ; that is, the supplying of a word from a subsequent to a former clause. The object is, as Dissen (Pind. Nem. x. 38) remarks, to give liveliness to the sentence by strength- ening the later clauses of it. The use of this figure is more extensive in poetry than in prose ; the following species of it, however, occur in Plato. a. Anastrophe of Definite Article. (This is the converse of the usage considered under the last head.) Hep. 491 d, e'lre eyyeiav e'Lre to>v £a>coi/. Phileb. 35 e, ocra nepl awTrjplav t ean t£>v ^axov Kai ty)v (pOopdv. Jj&gg. 795 h, biacpepei paOav pr) paOovros, Kai 6 yvpvacrdp,evos tov pr) yeyv pvacrpevov. Cf. Horn. Od. xviii. 228, 'Eo-#Xa re ml to. x^PW- ^Eschyl. S. a T. 314, dvbpo\ereipav Kai tclv pi^onXov arav, Suppl. 1 94, Albota Kai yoebva Kai to. XP € ? ^V* Cho. 7 2 7> X@° V10V °* < &PW V Kat T °v vi>x iov * § 241. b. Anastrophe of Pronouns in Correlative clauses. Rep. 455 e ? Kai y vv h tmpucfi, r) 8' ov. So 45 1 e. Symp. 207 d, veos del yiyvopevos, to. be drroXkvs — where we must supply to. pev to veos yiyvopevos. Phsedo 105 d— e, (A) to be bimiov pr) bexdpevov Kai 6 av povcriKov pr) bexv Tai [ ri ' ovopd£opev\ j (B) "hpovcrov, to be abiKov — where before fipovo-ov must be supplied to pev. So Soph. 221 e, 248 a, Phileb. 36 e, &c. §§242—244-] ABBREVIATED CONSTRUCTION. 213 Theset. 191c, Krjpivov eKpayelov, . . . r<3 pev Kadapcorepov Krjpov, t<5 de K07rpa8ecrTepov, Kal aKXrjporepov, eviois de iyporepov — where before a-KXrjporepov must be supplied eviois pev. Apol. 18 d, ocrot de a(f> 'nnreicov onXecov paOdpiyyes eftaWov, Al 8' air eVicr cra>rpa)i>, xxil. I57> 7rapadpapeTrjv, (pevycov, 6 8' oiricrBe duoKcov, IX. 5 11 ) -^i P"* v "Y^P f"i ^®P a it-aipeoprjv pevoeiKea, 7roXXa 8' omo~cra> Adyxavov (i. e. 7roXXa /uei/ pevoeiKea). § 242. c. Anastrophe of Correlative Adverbs. Theset. 192 d, aKovco } . . . Tore de a'io'Brjo'iv ovdepiav e](&. Phsedo Il6 a, diaXeyopevoi irepl ra>v elprjpevcov Kai avao-KoirovvTes, Tore 8' av irepl ttjs gvpcpopas Siegiavres — where totc must be supplied before diaXeyopevoi. So also Critias 119 d, Phileb. 35 e, Tim. 22 e. The leaving pev to be supplied from an expressed de in the Cor- relative clause is common : e. g. Rep. 357 c, 358 a, 572 a, Symp. 199 b, 201 e. Cf. Hom. II. xxii. 171, [oAXore pev] "idrjs ev Kopv(pr)o~i. tto\vtttvx ov i aXkore 8' avre k.t.X., xvi. 689, "OcTTe [ore pev] Kal aXKipov avdpa s r) ovk. opdws ibva-x^ po.lv opev. So l6l d. lb. 173 d, ev de rj KaKcog . . . paXXov avrov XeXr/Oev. Cf. Hom. Od. ii. 132, Ztoei oy 77 Te6vrjKe. § 244. e. Anastrophe of Prepositions. Phileb. 2 2C, tcov pev ovv viKrjTrjpicov Trpos rbv Koivbv fiiov ovk dpcpio-ftr)- tS) ira> inrep vov, tcov de dr) deVTepeiav Spav Kal CKOTrelv XP*I ?repi Ti dpdaopev. This kind of Anastrophe is as common in Homer as it is in later poets. The converse usage is noticeable in peculiar instances : cf. Hom. II. xi. 374? T Hroi 6 pev 6a>pr)Ka 'Ayao~Tp6(pov l(pdipoio A'Ivvt otto 214 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 245, 246. a-rr}de(r(f)i navaioXov do-nida r a>pa>v. And Theocr. i. 83, JJaaas dva Kpavas, Travr aXcrea, ib. Il7> Ovtc eV dva. 8pvpa>$, ovk aXaea. § 245. H. Verb supplied from a co-ordinate clause either preceding or subsequent. , Symp. 213 a, KeXevetv elcrUvai, Ka\ tov 'AydOcova KaXelv avrov — in the second clause is to be supplied Xeyeiv out of KeXcveiv. Apol. 38 b, nikzvovai pe rpiaKOvra pvcov Tipr)o~acrdai, avroX 5' iyyv- daOcu. In the following instance the Verb is supplied after an intervening complete clause. Symp. 183 a, J7 xPVI JLaTa fiovXopevos napd tov Xafielv rj dp^rjV ap^ai rj tlv aXkrjv bvvafxiv — where to the last clause must be supplied Xaftelv from the next but one preceding. In all the following it is the Substantive Verb that has to be supplied. Symp. 1 8 6 a, cos peyas Kai Oavpaarbs Ka\ eVi nav 6 6eos relvei — where ia-rl is to be supplied to peyas Ka\ Oavpacrros. Soph. 256 e, gvpiravra . . . ipovpev . . . elvai re Ka\ [supply ' are'] ovra. Phdr. 234 e, o-as Kad* ev emcTTOv pev . . . ovbev opcopevov, £vva6poi- (rdevrcov be . . . opaaOai. Legg. 872 a, idv be avToxup psv pr), ftovXevo-y be BdvaTov tis aXXos irepco. § 246. I. Verb or Participle supplied from subordinate construc- tion to main construction, or vice versa. Phdr. 330 d, &o-7rep ol to. Gpeppara 6aXX6v . . . trpoaelovTes ciyovai — where to ol to. OpeppaTa must be supplied ayovres. Phsedo 114 b, 01 av bogcocri biairovs y g>s ol tovs nXei- o-tovs Xeyovres, nepl 7revTi]KOVTa — where to ol . . . XeyovTes must be supplied Xeyovcri. (Cf. Epist. ad Hebr. x. 10.) Hdt. ii. 86, §§ 247—349-] ABBREVIATED CONSTRUCTION. 215 ovtco pev tovs ra rroXvTeXeaTara KpiTofiovXe, on iroXXaKis . . . Spas k.t.X. Isocr. iv. 176. p. 77> ° ^ irdvrav KaTayeXaaTO- rarov, oti k.t.X. Lysias XXX. 29. p. 186, 6 be ndvTcov beivoTaTov, oti k.t.X. [So Bekker : Zurich edd. omit oti.'] We have also the following variations: — Isocr. vi. 56. p. 127, 6 be ndvTcov cr^er- Xid>TciTov, el k.t.X. (and similarly xviii. 18. p. 375)5 xv. 23. p. 314, o be TtdvTOdv beivoTaTov, otov k.t.X., Lysias xix. 25. p. *54j o be [LeyiGTOV TeKprjpiov' Arjpos yap k.t.X. § 248. K. Of two Nouns in regimen, the governing Noun left to be supplied by the context, while its place in the construction is taken by the governed Noun. Symp. 214 c, peBvovTa avbpa irapa vtj^ovtohv Xoyovs TrapafidXXeiv — where peBvovTa avbpa stands for pedvovTos dvbpos Xoyovs. lb. 217 d, Tjj exopevt) ipov kXlvtj — where epov stands for kXlvtjs ttjs epr)s. Protag. 310 e, ovt av tcov ipwv emXinoipi oubev ovTe to>v . This natural idiom begins with Homer : cf. II. xvii. 51, Kopai Xapi- Teo-o-w opolai. § 249. L. Complementary aXXos omitted. Theset. 159 b, /cm KaOevbovTa br) /cat navra a vvv bir)X6opev — where ivdvTa stands for ' all besides.' lb. 145 a, acrTpovopiKos kol noXtTiKos . . . ml oaa naibeias e'xeTai. Phsedo 69 b, tovtov TrdvTa .... mirpao-Kopeva — ' all other things being parted with for this.' So tl prjv ; i what, if not what you say V 216 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 250—253. § 250. M. Contrasted clause to be mentally supplied. Rep. 475 e ? ovbap&s [i\o pev olpai — SC. ' but another might not.' (olpai pev ey&> would have been ' I think, but am not sure.' § 250 *. MM. Disjunctive clause to be mentally supplied. Crat. 389 e, eats av ttjv avrrjp Ibeav dnobibop, idv T€ iv aXks e\ei to opyavov. § 251. N. Protasis of a hypothetical reason left to be mentally supplied. Symp. 236 b, (A) e%eis elnelv] (B) Ov pevr av . . . ecpoirav napa ae — i. e. ' No : for else I should certainly not have/ &c. Phdr. 227 d, e'iOe ypdy^eiev k.t.X.' ^ yap av aoreiot Kai brjpaXpeXeis etev ol Xoyoi. Euthyd. 280 a, ov yap brjirov dpaprdvoi y av 7ror£ tls tro(pia .... fj yap av ovkcti aocpla etrj. § 252. 0. Hypothetical sentence; — e'lirep representing the Pro- tasis. Euthyd. 296 b, ovkovv rjpds ye [o~cpa\eT\, dXX\ eiirep, ere. Rep. 497 e, ov to prj fiovXeo~$ai } dXX', e'lirep, to prj bvvaaBai biaica)- Xvo~ei. Legg. 667 a, ovk, 00 *ya6e, irpoo-ex<*>v tovtco top vovv bpa tovto, e'lirep. lb. 900 e, kol tcov pev rrpoo-f]Keiv fjp.lv, e'lirep, oirocra (p\avpa. Cf. Arist. Eth. VIII. iii, dXX* e'lirep, o-a>£eo~6at /3ovXerai ovtov, iva avTos exn' also ib. IX. vii, X. iii. And Aristoph. Nub. 227, "TLireiT diro Tappov tovs 6eovs virep ovkovv eav p.ev enovres vneiKcocriv — * eav be k.t.X. Gorg. 520 e, el ev noirjcras ravrr]v ttjv evepyecriav dvr ev Tteiverai — * el he prj, ov. More commonly the form is eav p.ev . ... el be, as also in Thucy- dides. Symp. 185 d, eav [lev col edeXjj naveadai f) Xvyg — * et de prj, k.t.X. Jjegg. 854 C, /cat eav pev trot Xcocpa tl to voarjpa — * el de prj, k.t.X. Protag. 325 d, eav pev eKcov TreWr/Tai — " el be prj, k.t.X. lb. 3II d, av pev e£-iKvr]Tai . . . — * el de pr), k.t.X. Hip. Ma. 287 a, eav . . . dvTtXappdvoopai — ' suppose I' &C. Symp. 199 e, diroKpivaL oXlyxo irXeico, "iva pdXXov KaTapddrjs b (3ovXo- pac el yap epoiprjv k.t.X, — ' suppose I were to ask, now,' &C Rep. 440 d, dXX* el irpbs tovtco Kal Tobe evBvpel . . . , otl k.t.X. — Symp. 177 b, el de (3ovXei av crKe-ty-acrOai k.t.X. — With et fiovXei, or et ftovXecrOe, the Protasis also is often curtailed. Symp. 2 20 d, et de ftovXeade ev Tals pdxais k.t.X. — where et j3ovXecr6e represents el (3ovXea6e o-Keyjracrdai tov 2coKpaTr) onolos ecTTiv. Crat. 392 a, el de fiovXei irep\ Trjs opviBos. Theset. 196 e, el de fiovXei, . . . KexprjP^Sa. Cf. Horn. II. i. 580, EiVep yap K edeXrjcrLV k.t.X., xvi. 559, dXX' e'l piv deiKicrcralpe8\ k.t.X., XXI. 48 7> Et d efleXeis noXep-oio darjpevai k.t.X., Od. xv. 80, Et 5' eOeXeis. Suppression of the Apodosis is also common in Homer after en-el, — as II. iii. 59, Od.iii. io3,viii. 236. § 255. R. Form of Apodosis of a Hypothetical represented by av, the Verb or Participle being understood. Phsedo 98 C, edogev opoioTaTov TreirovOevaL coenrep av e'l tls . . . . Xeyoi. Ff 218 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 256, 257. In this common phrase the av represents not so much a par- ticular sentence, such as e. g. here neirovOcos av e'irj ns, but rather a vague sentence such as to rrpdyfia av e'irj. Apol. 29 b, rovrco m\ evravBa 'icrcos biacpepco . . . , nai el Sr) no - repos rov (pairjv eivai, rovrco av — SC. aocpcorepos av (pairjv elvai' — but this suppression is a graceful escape from the appearance of self-assertion. Politic. 308 C, e'i ris npayua onovv, . . . kov el to (pavXorarov, . . . £wi- o-T7)o-iv. Here the kclv . . . (pavXorarov is exegetic of Snovv — ' any whatever, so that even if you understood it of the vilest it would mean that.' The ku\ is hyperbatically placed, and be- longs to the el clause. Symp. 221 e, 6vop.ara Ka\ pr)p.ara e£co6ev 7repiap.7rex OVTai > Sarvpov av nva vfipio-rov 8opdv — ' something [like] what a satyr's hide would be.' In this instance, as also in the last, it is a Participle, not a Verb, which is to be understood. Rep. 468 a, rl be dfj ra nepl rov ir6Xep.ov ; 7rS>$ enreov k.t.X. \ Aey, ecpTj, irol av ] § 256. S. Condition or Reason referring to an implicit Propo- sition. Phaedo 6 1 b, Evrjvcp pa£e . . . av crcocppovfj ep.e bicoKeiv — ' tell him to follow me, — which he vjill do if he is wise.' Symp. 173 d, onoOev . . . rr)v eircDVvpiav eXafies . . . , ovk olba eycoye' ev p.ev yap rols Xoyois del roiovros el — ' I do not know how you came by it, but at all events it fits you; for' &c. Theset. 158 a, okvco eiTreiv on ovk e\co o n Xeyco* enel k.t.X. Protag. 333 C, alaxyvoiprjv av eycoye rovro opoXoyelv' enel iroXXoi ye (pacxi K.r.X. lb. 335 C, elfii' enel Kal ravr av 'icrcos ovk drjbcos (rov tJkovov. § 257. T. Direct conjunction of one or more particulars with a clause covering the rest. a. In summarily breaking off enumeration of particulars. Phsedo IOO d, r) eKeivov rov KaXov e'ire irapovcrla e'lre KOivcovla clre ottt) br) koI onus Trpocrayopevopevrj. Legg. 834 e, e'ire rpierrjpibes e'ire av Sia neurrrcov ercov eiff birrj koi ottcos av . . . biaveprjOcocri. Tim. 48 C, rrjv fiev 7T€p\ dndvTcov eXre dpyrp> e'ire dp\as e'ire oirrj boKel. Crito 50 a, e'ir dnobibpacrKeiv, eW o7rcos del ovopdcrai rovro. Apol. 41b, 'Obvcraea r) 2icrv(pov r) ciXXovs pvpiovs av ns e'inoi. §§ *5 8 , 259.] ABBREVIATED CONSTRUCTION. 219 Phasdo 7° e > °* ov TO KaXov r<5 alcrxpw iuavriov [rvyxdvet 6VJ, kcu aXXa 8rj fivpia ovrcos e'x«. Similarly Phsedo 73 d, 94 b, Gorg. 483 d, ^egg- 944 b. Protag. 325 a, diKaiocrvvT), kcu o-GXppoo-vvT], kcu to ocriov elvai, kcu avX- Xrjftdrjv ev avro 7rpocrayopeva> eivai dvbpos dperrjv. The peculiarity of these contracted forms of expression may be appreciated by comparing the following regularly composed sen- tence : — Protag. 358 a, eire yap rjbv e'vre Tepirvbv Xeyeis e'vre xaprdV, etre onodev koi ottcos x al P* ls Ta Totavra ovopdfav, a> /3eXricrre IlpoBiKe, tovto poi rrpbs b fiovXopai divoKpivai. The contracted forms give us always the feeling of abbreviation, as if the speaker was himself impatient of prolixity. Gorg. 494 d, (A) (prjpi top Kvapevov rjdecos av fii&vai. (B) HoTepov el rfjv KeqbaXrjv povov KvrjcriS, rj ere tl ere epcorco ; Apol. 20 d, ovtoi be rax av . . . . pet£a> riva rj Kar avflpoonov crocpiav cro °^H- al • • • ovbepa av . . . eniTpeyjrai . . . , aXXcos T€ Ka\ 'EpyoxX^s eXeyev. St. Mark vi. 5> kcu ovk qbvvaTO e * e * ovbep'iav bvvapiv 7roirjo-ai, el pr) . . . edepdnevae. Hip. Ma. 28 1 C, (A) tl iroTe to o'ltlov otl ol naXaiol .... (paivovrat diT€xdp.evot . . . ', (B) Ti 5' o'Ul aXXo ye 77 dbvvaToi rjcrav \ Phsedo 63 d, (A) aKeyf/aypeda tl earlv (3ovXeo~6ai poi boKel rrdXai elnelv. (B) Tt be aXXo ye rj ndXat poi Xeyet 6 peXXtov k.t.X. j § 259. U. Use of noXXov del instead of ov. In the regular or full construction noXXov del is either interjected parenthetically, or subjoined, to strengthen a negation. But, in the instances which follow, a Negative is dropped out, and the noXXov Bel is made to fill the same place in the construction which the Negative filled. Rep. 378 C, noXXov del pvdoXoyrjTeov . . . , dXXa. k.t.X. Symp. 203 C, 7roXXov Set cwraXos . . . . , dXXa aKXrjpos. Fully and regularly this would have been oi>x d7raX6$, — noXXov ye Ka\ del, — dXXa aKXrjpos. F f 2 %2Q DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 260—262. Gorg. 517 a > no^Xov ye del piyiroTe tis Toiavra ipydarjrai. Fully ov fxrj7rore tis (ttoXXov ye Set) Toiavra epydo~r]Tat. § 260. V. Extension of the government of a Verb, irrationally, so as to admit of the addition of an afterthought to a Participial clause without a new construction. Politic. 276 e, els ravrbv j3aaiXea Kairvpavvov, f-vveBepev, dvopoiOTaTovs ovTas avrovs re Kai tov ttjs dpxv s eKarepov rpoTrov — where there is no justification in the sense for bringing tov rponov under the government of t-vv£6epev. § 261. W. Two Participles, representing the reciprocal action of two parties, made to agree each of them with both conjointly, — to avoid specification in set terms. Crito 48 d, e£dyovTe's re Kai e^ayopevoi — i. e. crv re e^dyoov, eya> re igayopevus. Cf. Isocr. vi. 47. p. 125, aTreiivoipev S' av aKovovTes re Kai XeyovTes — i. e. vpels re aKovovres, ey t5>v Spoyevav pei&va ehai — where however pe'i£ova, still more brachy- logically, stands for ttjv pev peifa, to be eXarrov. § 262. Idioms of Sentences : — Pleonasm oe Construction. From instances of Pleonasm must be excluded 1. Cases in which the force of a word has been attenuated by its frequent use in that particular connection ; e. g. ehai subjoined to eKcov and the like : 2. All cases in which redundancy has resulted from Change of Construction, or from Binary Structure : 3. Cases of fullness of Construction : e. g. Phsedo 62 a, tovto povov r&>v aXXcov dnavrcov — which is simply the full form of which povov anavrcov would have been an abbrevia- tion ; as ' distinct from all the rest' is more accurate than ' distinct from all :' Or the use of &are with the Infinitive, following bvvapai 8lc. Or the use of a deliberate form of speaking, as in Apol. 19 b, ti brj Xeyovres biefiaXXov ol diafidXXovres ; lb. 34 d, eivieiKr) av poi doKG) . . . Xeyeiv Xeyoav k.t.X, lb. 36 a, ovk dveXmaTov poi yeyove to yeyovbs tcvto. § 263.] PLEONASM OF CONSTRUCTION. 221 Legg. 858 a, Tiva TpoTrov av yiyvopevov ylyvovro. Phsedo 75 d> Kai €V Tals ep^Trjo-eo-Lv epcoT&vTes koL ev rals drroKpiaecnv dlTOKpLVOpeVOl. Cf. Isseus ii. 2 2, ovk av 7rou]crdpevos ahXov ol ipCOVTL ECIVTOV 6pU>V. Rep. 553 ^j TTraicravTa axrirep npos eppari npos rfj noXei. Phsedo 67 d, cbaTrep etc beapatv i< tov aaparos. (Compare these with the real Pleonasm of Prepositions below — § 265.) § 263. A. Pleonasm of particular words, a. Of the Negative. a. In the same clause. Rep. 339 b, ovnco 8ijXov ovb y el peydXrj. lb. 389 a, ovkovv 'Oprjpov ovde to TOtavra dirobe^opeda. Crito 43 b, ov pa top Ai" ovf? av avros rjdeXov. Euthyd. 279 a, ovde aepvov dvdpbs Ttavv ti ovhe tovto eoucev eivai evnopelv. So Phsedo 115 C. Politic. 300 e, prjbev TrXrjdos prjff tjvtlvovv bvvarbv Xafielv Teyyr\v. Phsedo I OO a, ov pa tov Ala ov crcpodpa. Hip. Ma. 292 b, ov pot. 8oKel, & 'innta, ovx, el ravrd ye dnoKpi- vaiprjv. Lysis 221 C, ovk civ, e'i ye to kukov k.t.X., ovk av rjv k.t.X. Crat. 398 e, old* e'i ti olos T av e'lrjv evpelv, ov awTeivw. Euthyphro 4 d, ovt el 6 ti pdXio~T dixeKTeivev, . . . ov delv. Cf. Horn. II. i. 86, &c. The usage is common, of course, where the Negative is distri- buted to subdivisions of the sentence, as in Theeet. 163 a, aXA' cv bUatov ovtc o~v ovt av fjpels cpalpev. The object of the Pleonasm is, after premising the Negative as an announcement of the general form of the sentence, to place it also in close contact with the word which it immediately concerns. 222 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 264—268. § 264. /3. Not in the same clause. In this case the repetition seems almost 15 irrational. Apol. 27 e, 07TQ3S be (TV Tiva neiOois av as oh, K.r.X., ovbep.la p.r)xavf) ecrn. Legg. 747 d, pujbe rov6 y rjfxas Xav6averco nep\ roiraiv, as ovk elo~\v aXXoi rives biaCpepovres aXXcov npos to yevvav dvOpwirovs dpelvovs Kai xeipovs' ois ovk evavria vopoBerryreov. ol p,ev ye ttov bid rrvev- fxara k.t.X. Cf. Antipho vi. 10. p. 142, ovre Sans ovk aXXa Karrjyopel rj a bid>Kei ev 7Tpa.yp.ari rotourw, marevaai brjnov avrS d£ia>repov eo~nv rj dnio-rrjcrai — where ovk is irrational. § 265. b. Of Prepositions. Phdr. 278 a, ev be rols bibao~Kopevois . . . ev povois to evapyes elvai. Cf. Thuc. iii. 53? * v biKaorrals ovk ev aXXois begdp.evoi yeveo~6ai rj vp.lv. § 266. c. Of Conjunctions. Symp. 210 b, Kal eav eTTieiKTjs &v rrjv tyvyr\v ris Kai eav apiKpov avBos *XV> d. Of&. Phdr. 276 b, rfi yeapyiKJj xpa>p.evos re\vvf av (nreipas els r6 7rpoo-i]Kov dyaTTcpT) av K.r.X. Apol. 31 a, Kpcvaavres av p.e, 7reiB6p.evoi 'Awro), pa.bia>s av diroKre'i- vaire. e. Of e 'AydBcw. lb. I90 C, Xeyet on AoKco p.01, efpr), K.r.X. § 267. B. Resumption of a Noun, where no Change of Construc- tion has intervened, by Oblique Cases of avros. See under 'Binary Structure,' § 222, above. § 268. C. Pleonasm in sentences of Contrast. Politic. 262 a, ro £qrovp.evov ev binXaaioio-i ra vvv ev rols rjplaea-iv els Tore Troir)crei £t)relo~6ai. Legg. 805 a, fjpiareia noXis dvri bnrXaorias. Tim. 39 C, dXiyoL rcbv noXXav. Phsedo 58 a, rrdXai yevopevrjs avrrjs noXXa varepov (palverai diroBavav. lb. 7° e > € ' K p-ei^ovos ovros nporepov vvrepov eXarrov yevr)o~erai. 15 Cf., perhaps, Thucyd. iii. 36, ir6\iv oKtjv 8ia9e?pai fiaWov $ ob robs airiovs. §§269-271-] CHANGED CONSTRUCTION. 223 Soph. 219 b, onep av prj irpdrcpov tis ov varepov eh ovalav ayrj. So 265 b. Cf. Lysias xxxi. 24. p. 189, TOcydpToi nporepov (SeXrlcov yevopevos irepX ttjv ttoXlv, vcrrepop (3ov\eveiv dgiovTco. Phaedo 64 C, eav apa kcu o~o\ gvvdoKrj anep Ka\ epoi. lb. 76 e, avaynaiov, ovtcos uxmep Kai ravra ecrriv, ovtcos Kai tt)v fjpe- repav yfrvxrjv elvai. Cf. Xen. Anab. II. i. 2 2, Kai rjplv TavTa doKel airep Ka\ (3av earl rot KaXd. Rep. 565 d— e, as apa 6 yevadpevos tov dvdpconivov aiikdyxvov .... avdyKT) 8r) tovtco \vkco yeveadai. Euthyd. 28 1 d, Kivbvvevei avprravTa . . . ov irepi tovtov 6 \6yos aiirols elvai, Critias 107 e, e\ 8tj tov 7rapaxprjpa vvv \eyopeva, rb irpeirov hv pr) dvvoopeda rravTcos d7rodi§oVat, o~vyyiyva>o~Keiv xpea>i>. § 272. c. Different governments, either of them regular, brought together into one sentence. Rep. 378 d, roiavra XeKTea pdXXov irpbs rd Traibia ev6vs Ka\ yepovai. lb. 566 e, otclv npbs tovs ega) i^Qpovs toIs pev KaraXXayfj tovs be kcu biacpQeipj). Symp. 203 a, Bid tovtov Trdad i&riv rj opik'ia . . . Oeols npbs dv8pd>- 7rovs, kcu eyprjyopoa-i kcu KaOevbovci — the words Kai iyp-qyopoai kcu Kadev&ovo-i referring to dv6pd>ivovs. Phsedo 88 C, els dirurTLav KarafSaKeiv ov povov toXs Trpoeiprjpevois Xoyois, dXka Kai els tu varepov peXKovTa prjO^ceo-dai. § 273. d. Change to a previous construction. Rep. 413 e, tov aKrjpaTov eK$alvovTa KaTao-Tareov apxpvTa . . . , Kai Tipas boTeov Ka\ £cdvti Ka\ Te\evTr)0~avTi } . . . yepa Xay^dvovTa, § 274. e. Change to a Genitive Absolute. Rep. 59° d, apeivov navTi .... apxeo~6ai, pd\io~Ta pev oIksiov e%ovTos K.r.X. Legg. 755 d, tovtovs elvai o~TpaTT)yovs . . . , boKipaaOe'vToov mOdirep oi vopo(pv\aKes. § 275. f. The following are simple Anacolutha, reducible to no principle whatever. Legg. 823 d, e'i& vpds prjTe tls emOvpia .... 7rore Xa/3oi . . . , pfjTe eyp-qyopoai prjTe Kadevbovcri KvpTois dpybv 6rjpav bcanovovpevois. Critias 1 1 6 d, ve avBpcoTTca . . . ctrnv otc Kai ols /3eXrioi\ §§276,277'] CHANGED CONSTRUCTION. 225 Phsedo 82 a, oi av eKacTTr) 'Lot Kara ray avT&v Sfxoiorqras ttjs peXeTrjs. Sjmp. 207 b, ipcoriKcbs BiaTiOepeva nepl Tr)v rpocptjv rov yevopevov, Kal eroipd eariv vnep tovtcov Biapdyeo-Qai, — where tovtcov = tov yevo- pevov. Protag. 345 e, oi>x bs av pi) Kcrna Trovfj eKcov, tovtcov cprjalv enaiveTrjs elvai. Rep. 426 C, cos anoBavovpevovs , bs av tovto Bpa. Conversely to the last two instances Synip. 187 e, 7vpoa(pepeiv ols av 7rpoo~(pepr], O7rcos av Tr)v r)Bovr)v mp- ncoarjTai. b. Rep. 554 a j Orjo-avpoTTOtos dvr)p, ovs Br) Kal e-rraivei to 7r\r)6os. § 276. B. As to Verbs. a. Original construction abandoned, after interposed clause, in favour of that of the interposed clause. (For other applications of the same principle, see Attraction,' §§ 192-194, above.) Phsedo 107 b, ray vnodeaeis ras npooras, Kal el 7uotgu vplv elaiv, opens €7narKe7TTeai aafPeo-repov. This change is commonest after such interposed clauses as express saying, seeming, or thinking. Crat. 384 C, otl Be ov (prjarl K.T.X., axnrep vrroTTTevo), avrbv o-KooiTTeiv. Phdr. 2 7 2 d, TravTaTvaai yap, b Kal Kar ap^as einopev, . . . otl ovBev . . . Beoi K.r.A. GrOrg. 493 b, to Be koctkivov apa Xeyei, a>s ecprj 6 npos pe Xeycov, Tr)v -v/nr^v elvai. Legg. 7 2 8 d, to Be Tp'nov, tras av tovto vor)o~eie, ttjv tov acoparos elvai KaTa (pvo~iv Tiprjv. § 277« b. Construction changing from Infinitive to Finite Verb. Symp. 177 c ? to . . . /'EpcoTa prjBeva 7rco dvOpamoov TeToXprjKevai v eavTcov ttoXitoov npoiKa t-vvelvai 00 av /3ou- XoiVTai, tovtgvs TreiOov&i K.T.X. Theset. 190 d, al palai Bvvavrai Tas ooBlvas paXOaKcorepas Troielv, Kal TtKTeiv Te Brj tcis Bvo~TOKovo*as, Kal eav veov ov B6£r) dp(3\io~Keiv, ap- (2\l0-K0V0~l. Gg 226 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 278—281. § 278. c. Construction begun afresh with Conjunction or Rela- tive, after intervention of a Participial or Adverbial clause. Legg. 8lO d, KeXeveis yap dr) p,e, rrjs avTrjs 68ov e^dobonov yeyovvias 7roA\ois, tacos S' ovk iXcLTrocriv irepois 7rpoa(piXov±' . . , p.ed* hv 8ia- KeXevei pe k.t.X. Crito 44 b, xcopts p.ev tov io-TeprjaBai tolovtov eTTiTrjbelov, olov eyco ovbeva prjnore evpfjcno, en de ko\ rroXXols 86£a> k.t.X. Gorg. 457 b, edv be, oipai, prjTopiKos yevopevos ris Kara Tavrrj Trj rk^yt) dducr}. Rep. 53° hj aronov . . . fjyfjaeTai, tov vopl^ovra . . . ko\ tjiTelv k.t.X. Critias 114 e, f) vrjcros avTrj rrapeixcTO . ... to vvv dvop.a(ppevov povov f tot€ be ivXeov ovoparos rjv to yevos eK yrjs opvTTopevov opeixdXKOV. § 2/9. d. Construction begun with on, after Verbs of knowing or saying, and finished without regard to it. Gorg. 481 d, alo-Qdvopal crov eKaaroTe . . . , on 07700-' av (pfj gov to. TratStKa Kai otvcos av (pfj '£\ziv ov bvvapevuv avriXeyeiv. Legg. 892 d, elnov otl jrpcoTov epe XPV val ireipaB^vai kot ipavTov. Crito 50 b, epovpev 7Tp6s avTOVS otl 'HbiKeL ydp rjpas r) noXis \ Protag. 356 a, el yap tis Xeyot oti 'AXXa noXv diacfcepei. § 280. Often, from the frequency of this use with otba, and with Xeyco or etnov, otl becomes in such contexts a mere expletive. Rep. 501 a, olcrd' otl tovtco av bieveyKelv. Apol. 37 b, S)V ev 016° OTL KaKCOV OVTCOV. Symp. 175 d, Ka\ eLTVelv otl Ev av e^oi k.t.X. lb. 189 a, elnelv tov ' Apio~TO(pdvr) otl Kai /xaX' enavo-aTO. § 281. C. As to Oratio Obliqua. a. Change from Indicative to Infinitive Oratio Obliqua. Gorg. 5 I 7 c— d> o*e . . . olpai . . . eyvccKevai cos ... rj pev eTepa bLUKOVLKr) iaTLV, # bvvarbv elvai eKnopigeip K.T.X. Rep. 391 C-d, p/8' eccpev Xeyeiv, cos Orjirevs . . . . coppijaev ovtcos «ri beivcts dpnayds, prjbe tlv aXXov . . . ijpa ToXprjaaL av k.t.X. Charm. 164 d, boKel to ypdppa dvaK€LO-6aL . . . dvTi tov X a ^P e i «> s tovtov p,ev ovk 6p6ov ovtos tov 7rpoaprjpaTOS, tov x a ^P eiv > ov $* $ e w tovto 7rapaKeXevea0aL dXXrjXovs. Laches 198 b, rjyovpeda . . . deivci pev eivai k.t.X.' Se'os be irape^ei k.t.X.' deos yap etvai k.t.X. §§ 282—284.] CHANGED CONSTRUCTION. 227 - § 282. b. Change from Indicative to Optative Oratio Obliqua. Protag. 327 C— d, el beoi avrbv Kpiveo~6ai npos dvOpaarovs, ois prj nai- beia icrriv, aXX' elev aypioi. Phsedo 95 C— d, ovbev KtoXveiu (pfjs ndvTa ravra prjvveiv .... on 7roXv- Xpoviov re io~Ti yj/vxr) k.t.X.' dXXd yap ovbev rt paXXov rjv dQdvarov k.t.X.' Kai raXanroopovpevr] . . . £cor) k.t.X. lb. 96 b, ep.avTOV avco Kara) p,erel3aXXov o-Koncov .... noTepov to alpd eo~nv k.t.X., €K tovtcdv be yiyvoLTO pvrjprj. Pbdr. 241 b, 6 be dvayKa&Tai k.t.X., rjyvorjKas .... otl ovk apa edet Trore epa>vri . . . x a P l C et€OV co~tI Kai tovtov ovrjcreiev. Phileb. 41 d, [eip^rat] a>s to pdXXov re ko\ tJttov apfpa) dexeaOov, Kai oti Toav dne'ipav e'lTrjv. Charm. 156 d—e, ZdpoXgis, e(pr), XeyeL oti . . . ov bet k.t.X., aXXa tovto Kai a'lTiov e'lrj k.t.X. It should be observed, however, that the Optative in these pas- sages is not simply the effect of Oratio Obliqua : for some of the passages are in Present time. The emergence of the Optative marks the transition from fact to inference ; it indicates that we are not called upon to accept an additional assertion, but only to follow one step further in the direction already supposed. This is the principal account to be given of this change of construction : it may be, however, that a subsidiary cause is the increasing need, as the sentence unwinds, of marking the dependence upon the main construction of the later and therefore more remote clauses. § 283. c. The contrary change, from the Optative Oratio Obliqua to the Indicative, is in Plato very uncommon ; such as is found in Tim. 1 8 C, eTidepeVj prjxavwpevoL ojrcos prjbels . . . yvma-oiTO, vopiovai be TTavTes K.T.X. § 284. d. Change from Optative Oratio Obliqua to Infinitive Oratio Obliqua. Phsedo 96 b, epavrbv avco Karat p-eTeftaXXov o-kott&v .... ap*, e7reibdv k.t.X., a>s Tives eXeyov, rore brj to. £coa gvvTpeqbeTai' Kai irorepov k.t.X. , eK tovtgjv be ylyvoiTO p^vrjprj Ka\ boga, eK be pvrjprjs Kai bo^rjs yiyveo-Qai eiriar^firjv. This passage exemplifies b. also (where it Gg 2 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 285—287. is quoted). The justification of this further change to the Infinitive lies in the parenthetical &s rives eXeyov, which usurps here the influence properly due to norepov. § 285. e. Participial clause, in a sentence of Infinitive Oratio Obliqua, changing into Infinitive. Phaado 1 1 1 C, roirovs d y iv avrrj eivai, rovs pev fiaOvrepovs Ka\ ava- ireirrapevovs paXXov rj iv cp rjpels oli6v exovcra veovrarov, aXXov aovrov,"AXXov reOveiSira Kara. p66ov e'Xice nodouv, Od. vii. I 2 5, op-Cpaices elo~\v " KvOos dcptelaai, erepai 8' v7ro7repKa.£ovaiv. § 286. D. Inversion of the Antecedent clause, so that the Pronoun in it does not refer to the Relative foregoing, but to some other word in the Relative clause. Theset. 20I b, ols prj irapeyevovro rives . . . , rovrovs dvvaaOai k.t.A., where rovrovs refers to nves. Phsedo 70 e, apa avaynalov, ocrois icrri ri ivavriov, prjhapoBev aXXoOev avro yiyveadai k.t.A.; — avro refers to ri. Lysis 219 d, 6 av ris ri nep\ iroXXov noirjrai . . . , apa koi SXXo ri av irep\ iroXXov iroiolro j Phsedo 105 b, at av ri iv r<5 acspari iyyevqrai, Oeppbv ecrrai \ — SC. rb a apa. Symp. 204 b, ov de av (prjOr)s"Epcora eivai, Oavpaarbv ovhev eiraOes. § 287. Idioms of Sentences : — Arrangement oe Words and Clauses. A. Hyperbaton. The displacement of the natural order of words, which is called Hyperbaton, is not of capricious adoption. Its use is 1. to increase the facility of regulating the emphasis ; and 2. to enable language to represent, in a degree, the rapidity of thought, by making one expression literally catch up another. The Hyperbaton which results from the close adherence of Pre- positions to their cases (see below, § 298) is to be excepted from the account just given. It is the result simply of a grammatical exigency. §§288,289.] ORDER OF WORDS AND CLAUSES. 229 The name Hyperbaton had been given, and the fact recognised, in Plato's own time. Socrates in the Protagoras (343 e), in rectify- ing the explanation of the passage of Simonides, says vnepfiarbv SeT Qfivai iv t 0-01, e(j)r), epeo, 6 Scofcpar^s-. Symp. 214 C, dXAa, (pdvai, u> 'Ept^t/xa^e, tov s A\/a/3iaS?7f. Apol. 25 c, due a> npos Aibs MeXrjre. Similarly 26 e, Meno 71 d. Symp. 212 e, tva . . . tt)v tov o~o(p(OTaTov ko\ KaXXiaTov Ke(paXr]V — iav e'nrco ovTaal — dvabr)crco — apa KaTayeXdaeaOe pov a>s peOvovTOs ) Two sentences are here counterchanged. As Alcibiades rehearses the form of words with which he intends to accompany the crowning of Socrates, he interrupts himself to justify them, and does his best to carry on the two sentences together. These, if one had been postponed to the other, would have run — " That from my own head to the head of the wisest and handsomest of men I may transfer this garland — Well ! and if I shall say that, — what then 1 will you make fun of me 1 " In trying to carry on both together, he breaks and counter- changes them, distinguishing them doubtless by difference of tone. Even so violent a trajection as this has its parallels in Homer. § 289. b. Grammatical governments intermingled by Hyperbaton. Laches 195 a, 7rp6s tL tovt elnss (3Xe\p-as ; Symp. 191 d, ecrriv ... 6 epcos epcpvTos dXXrjXcov toIs dvQpcoiroLS. Phdr. 249 d, eort dr) ovv devpo 6 ivds rJKoov Xoyos rrepl Trjs TeTapTrjs pavias. Politic. 309 a, vTvb KaKr)s /3/a (pvaecos drraidovpeva. Phileb. 1 9 e, navaai tov Tponov fjplv dnavTcov tovtov. 230 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 290—293. Cf. Andoc. i. 30. p. 5> tovtchv ovv ifiol t£>v \6ya>v fj tv tcov ras 7rvpap,iBas ravras rjv Xiwopsvcov 'Pobeoms. § 290. c. Pronouns (uneniphatic) postponed by Hyperbaton. Politic. 261 b, to pev eVi rals tcov d^rvx^v yevecrev belongs to nva. Phsedo 60 b, cos cltottov . . . eoiKe n 60*04 tovto — where ti would normally have found its place beside cltottov. A common type is the postponement of an Antecedent tis. Theaet. l88 a, dvdyKi] tov doi-d£ovTa Bogd£eiv rj hv ti olBev rj pr) olBev. Crito 53 b, edv els tcov iyyvTard Tiva noXeoov eX$jjs. § 290*. cc. Correlative Conjunctions, — the former postponed by Hyperbaton. Apol. 1 8 d, G>o-7re/) aKiapax^lv dnoXoyovpevov re v ol 7roXXo\ eveKa (pavi. Cf. Andoc. i. II7* P« 1 5) ^ v ^ 7r ' avT °v tweica iTrefiovXevOrjv. § 298. f. Prepositions intrusive; that is, retaining their place next to the Adjeetive prefixed to their Substantive, to the exclusion of Adverbs and the like which qualify that Adjective. Rep. 391 d, ovtcos eVi deivas apnayds. lb. 395 b) * Tl tovtchv els apiKpoTepa. lb. 397 b, oXiyov npos ttjv avrrjv. Symp. 195 e, e^rjs iv rrdaais rats yj/vxais — for iv egqs 7rdcrais. Theset. 205 c, oXLyov iv tS npoo-Qev. Phsedo 70 C, ov irepl 7rpoarjKovT(ov. lb. HOC, noXv ere iK Xapirporepcov. Apol. 40 a, irdvv eVi apiKpols. Phdr. 245 d, p.r)d' ig evos. So Politic. 310 c Gorg. 449 c, cos did fipaxyrdTGiv. Legg. 876 b, on 7rep\ 0-p.LKporaTa. Cf. Thuc. i. 63, Q)9 is iXdxio-Tov x a> p' L0V * iii- 46, on iv ftpaxvraTa, ibid, otl eV iXdxio~TOV, i. 23, eon 7rap' ois, 35? 7roXv iv TrXelovi alria, vii. 36, ovk iv noXXw, *jg, ovk iir* oXlyoav danldcov, 42, ov8e . . . Ka6* ere pa, and so 59, prjde Ka$" ere pa, and on the same principle vii. 72, ert ras Xonrds for ras en Xoinds. § 299. Note, that Plato not unfrequently admits Tmesis : e. g. Phdr. 230 C, iv rjpepa irpoaavTei. Hip. Ma. 297 b, iv iraTpos twos Iheq. §§3 C °,3° T ORDER OF WORDS AND CLAUSES. 233 Legg. 797 d, iv, (£>s eiros elTrelv, ov rots p.ev T019 §' ov. Apol. 19 a, and 24 a, eV ourco? 6Xi'ya> xpo*'? (cf. Isseus vi. 33. p. 59, «> 9rdvv oAryci) ^poj/©). Pliileb. 20 b, 7rp6s 8e av to"ls. Legg. 666 C, eis peV -ye to npodyeiv. lb. 7 2 9 d, ets /U71/ 7rdXiv. lb. 832 C, avv del tlvl (3iq. Phsedo 59 a, 81a drj ravra. Phileb. 35 e, did. p.ev to nddos. Rep. 371 d, dvr\ av dpyvplov. Phdr. 238 c, V7TO av tg>v . . . inidvp-LOiV. § 300. B. Primary intention of a sentence suspended by inter- position of clause of (a) Contrast or (b) Explanation. a. Clause of Contrast interposed. Rep. 401 e, Ka\ dpOas brj 8vo~xepalva>v, rd p,ev KaXd eVatz/01 k.t.A., rd S' alcrxpd yj/eyoi t av 6p6S)S /cat pnao't — where 6p6S>s 8r) oW^epaiVcoi/ is Continued in rd alcrxpd \p-eyoi, Symp. 173 e, oirep ide6p.e6d o~ov, /J.77 aXXcos ttoltjo-tjs d\kd bi-qyqcrai. lb. 179 C, epyov ovtco koXov . . . ©are . . . ev ap 16 p.T]T 019 drj tictiv e8oo~av tovto yepas 01 Beol, i{~ Ai8ov aviivai irakiv ttjv ^vxtjv, dXkd ttjv i<€LVT]i dvelcrav — the oxtts being Continued at ttjv iKeivrjs dvelcrav, Theset. 145 d, dXX' op.(os, rd p.ev aXka ex® 7repi avrd p.erpicos, crp,LKpdv be tl diropS) — where op.a>s appertains to o-fUKpov tl a7ropu>. Phsedo 69 d, ol irecpikocrocprjKOTes 6p6eos. hv dr} Ka\ iyoa Kara ye rb dvvarov ov8ev aTreknrov iv ra /3ig>, dXXd navrl rponcp Trpov6vp.rj8rjv yevea-6ai — where the construction of &v is continued at navrl TpOTTCO. lb. 87 d, dXXd yap av cpalrj, eKacrTrjv .... dvvcfiaivoL, dvayKalov p.evT av eir), k.t.X. The objection started by dXkd yap dv (pair) is sus- pended, while allowance is made for opposite truth, until dvayKalov p.evT av k.t.X. lb. 106 b, tl Kcohvei, apTLOv pev to TrepiTTov p.rj ylyveadai . . . , diroho- p,evov he ai/Tov dvT eKelvov dpTiov yeyovivai j Legg. 822 C, dp ovk ol6p.e6a yeXolov re Kal ovk 6p06v, eKel yiyvop.evov rjv av TOTe } vvv ivTavOol Ka\ iv tovtolctl yiyvecrQai j § 301. b. Clause of Explanation interposed. Symp. 206 b, ov p.evT av (re idavp,a£ov eVi crofyiq Ka\ icpoiTav irapd o~e — where, in meaning, ov p.ivT dv goes with ifoirav, the idav- p.a£ov in\ aocpiq being explanatory. Hh 234 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§§ 302, 303. Protag. 335 e, ra>p boXixohpopcap t dia6e1p re Kal eneo~0ai. Phdr. 244 d, fj pau'ia eyyepopeprj kcu Trpocprjrevcrao-a ols edet. Legg. 648 e, irpbs be rfjv eo-xdnjp noaip diraXXdrroiro Trpiv dcpiKvelcrBat. Gorg. 512 a, Xoyifcrai on ovk k.t.\. — an elaborate instance. § 392. In other writers we have as illustrations Of a. Thuc. vi. 68, e| rjs Kparelp bet rj prj pabicos dnoxopelp. Xen. Hell. VII. iii. 7> vpels tovs rrepl 'Apxiav . . . . ov \j/rj(pop dpepelpare aXX' €Tipcopr)o-a(r6e. Isocr. viii. 85. p. 1 7 6, roarovrop be birjpeyKap dvoia 7ravra>v avdpa>ir ttjs alrias, 1279, to. b* iv bopois "EoiKas fJKeiP Kal rax o\jrea6ai KaKa, El. 1 1 54, V s °~ v iroWaKts ^rjfxas \d6pa irpovnepires a>$ (papovpepos Tipcopos, O. T. 7 J 7> HatSos de fiXdoras ov hieo~x ov rjpepat Tpels Kai pip apdpa Kelpos ep£ev£as rrobolv. Theocr. Id. XXV. 7 2 > T0V &* yepopra . . . KXdfrp re ne plcro-aivop r [Alii KXd£opre], Epigr. xix. I, 'ApxiXoxop Kal ordBi Kal e'laibe. § 303. C. Primary Intention of a sentence expressed apart from the Verb — (i. e. the virtual Primary Predicate to be sought in some other word, or in a Participial clause.) Rep. 495 d, ov brj ecptepepoi 7roXXul dreXels .... rvyxdpovaip — where ipep. The § 304.] ORDER OF WORDS AND CLAUSES. 235 Primary Intention, with which fj connects itself, is in the 6pS>pev clause. lb. 6g C, dX\a ra ovrt ndXat alvirreo-Bai on . . . Keicrerai. The dXXa, t& ovtl connects itself with the Keia-erai clause. lb. 88 b, oidevl npoo-rjicei Bdvarov Bappovvn prj ovk dvoTjrcos Bappelv. Of the Infinitival sentence Bdvarov . . . Bappelv the virtual Pri- mary Predicate is Qavarov Bappovvn- — in other words, it would normally be Qavarov Bappelv, but is changed into a Participial clause for the sake of linking a further sentence to it. Symp. 207 d, ovros pivroi ovhenore to. avra e^cap iv avra opens 6 avros Kakdrai. The Primary Intention of the sentence is satis- fied at exv, aXXos dcfraipr}0~erai. Hdt. ii. 1 34, ovbe &V ovbe eidores pot (paivovrai Xeyeiv, ix. 105, rovrov 8e KareXafie varrepov rovrav diroBavovra KelaBai. Horn. Od. iv. 739? Et 8rj nov riva Kelvos ev\ ($>peo\ prjrtv v(prj va s '~E£eXBa>v Xaolaiv odvperai. ./Esch. Ag. 479? rls a>8e naidvos . . . , irapayyeXpao-iv veois nvpeoBevra KapbLav, dXXaya \6yov Kapelv ; (the virtual Predicate in the Infinitival sentence being nvpcoBevra), 74°> ^P* avTa 8' eXBelv is 'lXiov ttoXlv Xeyoip b\v (ppovTjpa vrjvepov yaXdvas (' there came what I should call a spirit' &c. — virtual Predicate not iXBetv but ovtcos kXivtjs 7roir)Triv av tis drjxdeLT], ti)v Kapbiav f) "fyv)(r}V yap drjxBels vno tcov iv . lb. 69 b, tovtov Ka\ fiera tovtov uvovptvd re Kai Tnirpao-KSpcva. § 305. So in Dialogue. Gorg. 453 d, (A) 7TOTepov . . . TTeLOei, rf ov • (B) Ov drJTa [sc. ov TreiBei], aXXa. navTav pdXio-Ta Treidei. lb. 496 d, (A) noTepov ovv ert irXdai ipa>Ta>, fj opoXoyets k.t.X. ; (B) c OpoXoya> p aXXa. prj ipa>Ta. In Dialogue, however, the Parallelism is often Direct, instead of Inverse. Hep. 337 C, (A) aXXo ti . . . 7roir)0-eis ; fav iyoa . . . diroKptvei \ (B) Ovk av Bavpaaaipi' et poi CTKetyapivob ovtco So£ete. lb. 428 d, (A) tis, Ka\ iv Tiaivj (B) Avtij, f] (pvXaKtKr], Ka\ iv tovtois rois apxovaiv. Soph. 267 a, (A) MiprjTiKov dr) . . . diroveLpoapeBa' to 8' ciXXo ndv d(pv Ka\ Beos Trep Ipipio TrerrXijypivos j 'A/3pu- verai yap ncis rty ev Trpdaacdv nXiov. § 306. Often, also, of two points put by A, the former only is taken up by B. §§3°7>3° s >'] ORDER OF WORDS AND CLAUSES. 237 Rep. 341 b, (A) ovre yap av pe Xddois KaKOvpycov, ovre k.t.X. (B) Ovde y av emxeiprjaaipi. Phsedo 79 b, (A) ri be r) tyvxr) ; opardv, r) deibe's ; (B) Ovx vtt dvOpw- 7rcav ye. Hip. Ma. 293 e, (A) to irpenov apa tovto Xeyopev 6 7rapayevop.evov 7roi6t eKaara SaKpares. § 307. E. Comparative emphasis in co-ordinate expressions marked by the order (which is often the reverse in Greek of what it would be in English). Symp. 173 e, Ka\ brjXov ye brj on ovtcd biavoovpevos Ka\ irepl epavTov Ka\ irep\ vpS>v paivofiai. The emphasis is on ipavrov, and the ifiav is quite faint. lb. 175 k> v ^ v °^ v vopl^ovres Ka\ epe v(ft vpav KeKXrjaOat eVt belnvov Ka\ rovo-be tovs aXXovs, Oepanevere — 'I your master, as well as the others.' lb. 185 C, rvxelv be avTtp riva rj vtto nXrjapovrjs rj V7V0 twos aXXov \vyya e7rnre7rrcoKv7ap — 'from some cause, most probably reple- tion.' lb. 189 e, Ka\ etbos Ka\ ovop.a — ' the class as well as the mere name.' Euthyphro 3 d, eiT ovv jh v *vpap,e0a ras aXXas rjbopas voui&iv .... Trjs f]8ovTJs ov irdvv noppco k.t.X. j lb. 587 a > wXetcrrov 5e Xoyov a(plo~TaTai ov\ oirep vop.ov Ka\ Ta£-ea>s j lb. 590 a, fj b* avddbeia kcu bvcrKoXia yjreyeTat oi>x orav to XeoPTcobes . . . avgrjTcu j Legg. 830 d, kcu ravra brj yap Xeyco, Ka6* o rjbea eoriV, apa Kara tovto ovk ayaOd \ Ibid, d, fjbea be KaXeis ol> to. rjbopTJs uerexovra j Meno 78 C, dya6d be KaXeis ov^l olov vy'ieiap k.t.X. \ lb. 88 d, Ka\ p.ev bfj ml raXXa, a vvv brj eXeyopep . . . elvai, ap ovx (ocnrep k.t.X. \ Symp. 2 1 6 d, Ka\ av dypoel itdvra kcu ovbep olbep, wy to crx^pa avTOv tovto ov crci\r)va>des ; [The Zurich editors give tovto. ov a. ;] § 310. b. Without Negative. Soph. 233 C, bpa>a-i be ye tovto irpos uiravra, (pap,ep j Hip. Ma. 3OI C, eiveX eiribel£s el ftovXTjOelfiev otovovp e'lbovs tt)V (pvaiv Ibeip, TroTepop k.t.X. j §§3 II ;3 I 2«] RHETORICAL FIGURES. 239 Politic. 265 e, 6 ttoXitikos ap empeXeiav ex^iv 4 M " f€TfU ^ TC p a k.t.'K. , Legg. 683 e, ^acrikeia 8e KaraXverai, a Trpos Aids, 17 /cat k.t.X., /xaii/ V7TO rti/cov aXXcoi/ 77 aKpares ', Ibid, e, vnepxopevos §r) 0ia>crei iravras dvBp&Trovs Kai SovXcvwz/, — rt noicov ; [The Zurich editors give SovXeCw] Cf. Lysias xiii. 64. p. 135, 'Ayoparos tovs pev dneKreive, rovs Be (pvyddas evrevOev enoirjo-e, — tls cov avros j § 31 1. H. Enclitic recommencing, or even commencing, a clause. Phileb. 16 C, 6ecov pev els dvOp&rvovs 86o~is, los ye Karafyaiverai ipoi, TtoBev i< detov epplcpTj. lb. 25 b, Kai poi BoKel ris, S Uparapxe, avrav (pikos Tjplv vvv 677 yeyovevai. lb. 46 c, ottotov . . . tis rdvavTia apa nadr) 7rdcrx!J, irore piyav Beprjra* Ka\ 6epp.aivop.evos eviore tyvxqrai. Phsedo 65 d, re 8r) ovv ; nanoTe rt . . . el8es ; [So Oxon. But the edd. give fjbrj ovv nanoTe tl elbes j] Cf. Dem. de Cor. 44. p. 240, irepuv opoXoyelv — ' I should be ashamed at our being compelled' &c. Apol. 33 C, x at P 0V(TLV e^era^opevois rots olopevois etvai ao(f)ois. Phsedo 88 d, 6 \6yos .... cocnrep vTTepvrjae pe prjBds — ' the recital of the argument as it were reminded me.' lb. 68 a, tovtov a7rr)X\dx6ai gwovros avrols — ' be rid of the company of this.' Charm. 173 b, e< tovtcov ovras ixovTwv. So Legg. 959 c. Legg. 959 e, KaXov €(TTa> Kakas Kcii perpioos ra irepl tov TereXevTrjKOTa yiyvofieva — ' let it be a credit to have the obsequies handsomely or decently performed.' § 313. B. Catachresis. 'YiT07rTeveiv for ' to expect.' Theset. 164 a, Kai £ya>, vr) rbv Ala, i)7T07TTeva>, ov pqv iKavcos ye avvvoS). 'Apfjxavos of number. Phdr. 229 d, Ka\ aWoov dp.rjxd.vaiv 7r\r)Brj repaTokoyeov rivcov cpvo-ecov. Aaipovios. Critias Il^b, KaXkos vyjsos re daipoviov exovra. § 314. Qavpaaros, Bavpdo-ios, has many gradations of Catachrestic meaning. a. ' Strange,' ' eccentric.' Symp. 182 e, Bavpaard epya. So 213 d, BavpaaTa ipyd^erac. /3. ' Incomparable,' ' capital ;' — only the intention of super- lativeness being retained. Apol. 41b, Bavpadrr) dv e'lrj r) hiarpt^r) avroBi. y. Of a recommendation or a feeling or an assertion, — 'de- cided,' ' emphatic,' ' positive/ Symp. 182 d, r) napaiceXevoris r<5 epcovTi napd Tvavrcov Bavpaarr)— 1 most positive is the encouragement given by all.' Tim. 29 d, to pev ovv irpooipiov Bavpaalcos a7rebe£dpeBd (tov — ' most decidedly approved.' Euthyd. 283 c, Bavpaa-ras o-rrovdd£oipev — ' were particularly anxious.' Phsedo 74 h, (A) (pcopev n eivai r) prjhev j (B) <&£>pev pivroi vr) Ala, Bavpaaras ye. BavpacrTcos qualifies (papep not eivai — ' say Yes most positively.' lb. 92 a, Bavpaorras ©s IneiaBrjv — 'was most decidedly convinced.' §§ 3 1 5—3 lS -] RHETORICAL FIGURES. 241 § 315. 'Ynepfocos, koXcos, crcfiodpa, are also in the same way used to express decided assertion or assent to an assertion. Gorg. 496 C, (A) SpoXoyovpev ravra j . . . . (B) 'AXX' vireptpvas a>s SfioXoyco — £ I agree most decidedly.' Pnsedo )6 e, virepcpvas boKel poi f) avrrj dvdyKX] etvai. Phlleb. 26 a, (A) ap ov ravra eyyiyvopeva ravra. . . povaiKrjv ^vp-na- v (piXoaocpovvrcov Trpoxeipa ravra Xeyovaiv. Cf. Ar. Nub. 296, 01 rpvyobaipoves ovroi, 969, rds Kara $pvviv ravras ras dvo-KoXompirrovs [Kcrfi7ras]. I i 242 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. §§ 319—333. § 319. b. nolo?; Gorg. 490 d, (A) aXX' larais iparlaiv \tov (3(\ti<0 nXeov belv e^fty 4>]]s] .... (B) Uoicov ifxarioiv ; — ' Clothes, forsooth ! ' Charm. 174 b, (A) apd ye y [°?be] to ireTTevriKov j (B) lioiop TTCTTeVTlKOV \ § 320. c. Plural of Singular Terms. Menex. 245 d, ov yap TLekoTves ovbe Kdbpot k.t.X. Pllgedo 98 C, depas Kai aWepas nai vbara aWimpevov. Symp. 2l8 a, $aibpovs, *Ayd6(ovas, 'Epvt-ipdxovs. Rep. 38*7 b, Kwkvtovs re Kai "Srvyas ku\ ivepovs Ka\ dXifiavTas. Cf. iEsch. Ag. 1439, XpvcTT/t'Scoi/ pelXiypa ra>u In 'iXtw. It is fre- quent in Aristophanes : cf. Ecclez. 1069, & nave?, cS Kopvfiavres, Ach. 270, Ka\ Aapdxw dnaXkayels, Ran. 963, Kvkvovs noicov ko\ Mefivovas. It is equally used with a sense of dignity, — as in the dithyrambic fragment of Pindar [p. 224 ed. Dissen], yovov VTrdroiv pev nareptov peXnepev yvvaiKav re Kabpeiav epoXov y SC. Bacchus the son of Zeus and Semele. § 321. d. Periphrasis. Legg. 953 e, dpeppara Ne/Xou — for Egyptians. § 322. E. Simile introduced as a Metaphor, — i. e. with the Particle of Comparison omitted. (See this noticed by Aristotle, Rhet. III. x-xi, where he charac- terises it as 7rp6 oppdroav note'iv.) Euthyphro 1 1 C, ovk eyvoi, iEsch. P. V. 856, ol §' iirTorj- pevoi (ppevas KipKoi izeXei(ov ov paKpav XeXeippevoi "Hi-ovcri, Ag. 394, ene\ 8id>Kei nals iroravbv opviv, Euiip. Bacch. III4, ILpaTt] be prjTrjp rjp^ev lepia (fiovov. § 323. F. Play upon Words. Rep. 621 b, pv6os iaadr] Kai ovk aTrcoXeTo, Kai qpas av o~d>o~eicv. Symp. 185 C, Havoraviov be 7ravo~ape'vov, — bibdaKOvai yap pe 'lea Xeyeiv ovtcoo~1 ol aocpoi. lb. 198 C, Yopyiov KeqbaXrjv beivov Xeyeiv. lb. 174 b, ojs apa Kai dyaOatv ml bunas 'iao-iv avToparoi ayaOoi — in allusion to Agathon. §§ 324, 3*5-] RHETORICAL FIGURES. 243 Apol. 25 C, dXXa yap, a> MeXrjTe, .... o~a(pa>s aTrocpalveis ttjp aavrov dpeXeiav. Theset. 194 C, Keap, 6 e(prj "Op-qpos alvtrropevos rrjv tov Krjpov opoio- TY]Ta. Phsedo 80 d, els . . . tottov . , . deibrj, els Albov as dXr]6a>s. lb. 89 b, iavrrep fjplv 6 Xoyos TeXevTrjo-y Kal prj bvvd>pe6a avTOV dva@ia>- o-avOai. The play upon the words lies in their reference to the subject of the discussion. lb. 92 C, Trpenei ye e'lrrep tg> aXXco Xoyco £wco§<5 elvai Kal tS nepl tyjs dppovias. Legg. 802 e, beivbv yap oXy ye dppovia dnqbeiv rj pv6pu> dppvOpelv. lb. 803 d, rjv ev iroXepat pev apa ovt ovv iraibid necpvKv'ia ovt ovv iraibeia. Cf. Horn. II. xiii. 7 73> v ^ v Tot °"^ ff alnvs oXeOpos. § 324. G. Hendiadys. The Hendiadys which occurs in Plato (belonging to the last of Lobeck's four kinds, — cf. note on Soph. Ajax, 145) is that where Synonyms are set side by side with the view of expressing the idea more forcibly. This might be called Rhetorical Hendiadys. With Demosthenes it is a favourite instrument of bebcoo-is. Phaedo 98 b, r<5 pev vco ovbev xpd>pevov ovbe rivets alrias enaiTKapevov. lb. 1 1 1 d, avvrerprjo-OaL re iroXXaxfj Kal biegobovs ^X elv - Crito 47 b, yvpva^opevos dvqp koi tovto Trpdrrcov. Gorg. 472 b, eKftdXXeiv pe eK rrjs ovor'ias Kal tov dXr]8ovs. Tim. 87 d, fav ovbev o-KOTTOvpev, ovef evvoovpev oti k.t.X. Phileb. 23 a, ttjv aKpifieaTaTyv avTJ} npoacpepovTa fidcravov ml e£e- Xeyxovra. JjQgg. 953 a 5 eTTLpeXelcrdai Kal rrjpeXelv. § 325. H. Interrogation answered by the speaker himself. This may be called Rhetorical Interrogation. Its object is to awaken the attention. Phsedo 73 c > ^y w $* riva Tportov) Tovbe. edv t'is ti k.t.X. Rep. 360 e, tls ovv f] bidcTTacris ', fjbe. prjbev d(paipa>pev k.t.X. Apol. 34 d, rt by ovv ovbev tovtcov ttoltjo'co • ovk avQabi^opevos, a> * AQyvaloi, k.t.X. lb. 40 b, tl ovv a'lriov elvai v7roXap(3dvco ] iya> vpiv epco. Protag. 343 b, tov by evem Tavra Xeya> ', "On k.t.X. So Gorg. 457 e. i i 2 244 DIGEST OF IDIOMS. [§ 325. Gorg. 453 C, rov ovv eveita brj avrbs V7T07rTeva>v o~e eprjaofiai, dXX' ovk avros Xeyco j ov cov evena, ah\a rov \6yov, lb. 458 a, eyoo be twcov elpi \ to>v fjbeoos fxev av eXeyx^vrcav k.t.X. lb. 487 b, Kai efiol el evvovs. rivi reKfirjpia xp^H- 01 j eya> aoi epa>. oiba K.T.X. Meno 97 e, irpbs ri ovv bf} Xeyeo ravra j 7rpos ras bogas ras akr}8eis. Legg. 7 01 c > twos br) Kai ravS* rjpiv av X^P lv ^X^V ') ^ e " / < £ a « /frat k.t.X. lb. 780 a, twos brj X"*P lv Tavra e'lprjrai \ rovbe, on k.t.X. Tim. 31 a, ndrepov ovv 6p6S>s eva ovpavbv 7rpoo'eipr)Kap.ev, rj 7ro\Xovs Ka\ aTTeipovs \eyew rjv opdorepov ', eva, e'lirep k.t.X. Critias 1 1 1 a, iras ovv brj rovro mo-rov, nal Kara ri Xefyavov ttjs rare yrjs opOws av Xeyotro j nao-a k.t.X. Symp. 206 e, irdw p.ev ovv, ecprj. rt brj ovv ttjs yevvr)o~ea>s \ on k.t.X. [So Hermann punctuates. The Zurich editors give the answer to another speaker.] January, 1871. BOOKS PRINTED AT THE CLARENDON PRESS, OXFORD, And Published for the University BY MACMILLAN AND CO., 16, BEDFORD STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON. LEXICONS, GRAMMARS, &c. A Greek-English Lexicon, by Henry George Liddell, D.D., and Robert Scott, D.D. Sixth Edition, Revised and Augmented. 1870. 4to. cloth, il. 16s. A Greek-English Lexicon, abridged from the above, chiefly for the use of Schools. Thirteenth Edition. 1869. square i2mo. cloth, Js.6d. A copious Greek-English Vocabulary, compiled from the best authorities. 1850. 241110. bound, 3s. Graecae Grammaticae Rudimenta in usum Scholarum. Auctore Carolo Wordsworth, D.C.L. Seventeenth Edition. 1870. i2mo. bound, 45. A Greek Primer, in English, by the Right Rev. Charles Wordsworth, D.C.L., Bishop of St. Andrews, etc. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, is. 6d. A Practical Introduction to Greek Accentuation, by H. W. Chandler, MA. 1862. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d. Scheller's Lexicon of the Latin Tongue, with the German explanations translated into English by J. E. Riddle, MA. 1835. fol. cloth, il. is. A Practical Grammar of the Sanskrit Language, arranged with reference to the Classical Languages of Europe, for the use of English Students, by Monier Williams, MA. Third Edition. 1864. 8vo. cloth, 15s. An Icelandic-English Dictionary. By the' late R. Cleasby. En- larged and completed by G. Vigfiisson. Part I. 1869. 4to. 21s. GREEK AND LATIN CLASSICS. Aeschylus : Tragoediae et Fragmenta, ex recensione Guil. Dindorfii. Second Edition. 185 1. 8vo. cloth, 5s. 6 J. Sophocles : Tragoediae et Fragmenta, ex recensione et cum commen- tariis Guil. Dindorfii. Third Edition. 2 vols. i860, fcap. 8vo. cloth, il. is. Each Play separately, limp, 2s. 6d. The Text alone, square i6mo. cloth, 33-. 6d. Each Play separately, limp, 6d. Sophocles: Tragoediae et Fragmenta, ex recensione Guil. Dindorfii. Second Edition. 1849. 8vo. cloth, 5s. 6d. 2 Books printed at the Clarendon Press. Euripides : Tragoediae et Fragmenta, ex recensione Guil. Dindorfii. Tomi II. 1834. 8vo. cloth, 10s. Aristophanes : Comoediae et Fragmenta, ex recensione Guil. Din- dorfii. Tomi II. 1835. 8vo. cloth, lis. Aristoteles: ex recensione Immanuelis Bekkeri. Accedunt Indices Sylburgiani. Tomi XI. 1837. 8vo. cloth, il. 10s. Each volume separately, 5s. 6c?. CatulliVeronensis Liber: recognovit, apparatum criticum prolegomena appendices addidit, Robinson Ellis, A.M. 1867. 8vo. cloth, 16s. Demosthenes : ex recensione Guil. Dindorfii. Tomi IV. 1846. 8vo. cloth. Price reduced from il. 2s. to il. is. Homerus: Ilias, ex rec. Guil. Dindorfii. 1856. 8vo. cloth, %s. 6d. Homerus: Odyssea, ex rec. Guil. Dindorfii. 1855. 8vo. cloth, $s. 6d. Plato : The Apology, with a revised Text and English Notes, and a Digest of Platonic Idioms, by James Riddell, M.A. 1867. 8vo. cloth, 8s. 6d. Plato : Philebus, with a revised Text and English Notes, by Edward Poste, M.A. i860. 8vo. cloth, 7s. 6d. Plato : Sophistes and Politicus, with a revised Text and English Notes, by L. Campbell, M.A. 1866. 8vo. cloth, 18s. Plato : Theaetetus, with a revised Text and English Notes, by L. Campbell, M.A. 1861. 8vo. cloth, gs. Xenophon: Historia Graeca, ex recensione et cum annotationibus L. Dindorfii. Second Edition. 1852. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d. Xenophon : Expeditio Cyri, ex rec. et cum annotatt. L. Dindorfii. Second Edition. 1855. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d. Xenophon: Institutio Cyri, ex rec. et cum annotatt. L. Dindorfii. 1857. 8vo. cloth, I os. 6d. Xenophon : Memorabilia Socratis, ex rec. et cum annotatt. L. Dindorfii. 1862. 8vo. cloth, 7s. 6d. Xenophon : Opuscula Politica Equestria et Venatica cum Arriani Libello de Venatione, ex rec. et cum annotatt. L. Dindorfii. 1866. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d. THE HOLY SCRIPTURES, &c. The Holy Bible in the earliest English Versions, made from the Latin Vulgate by John Wycliffe and his followers: edited by the Rev. J. Forshall and Sir F. Madden. 4 vols. 1850. royal 4to. cloth. Price reduced from 5/. 15s. 6d. to 2,1. 3 s - The Holy Bible: an exact reprint, page for page, of the Authorized Version published in the year 161 1. Demy 4to. half bound, il. is. Vetus Testamentnm Graeee secundum exemplar Vaticanum Romae editum. Accedit potior varietas Codicis Alexandrini. Tomi III. 1848. i2mo. cloth, 14s. Novum Testamentum Graeee. Accedunt parallela S. Scripturae loca, necnon vetus capitulorum notatio et canones Eusebii. Edidit Carolus Lloyd, S.T.P.R., necnon Episcopus Oxoniensis. 1869. i8mo. cloth, 3s. The same on writing paper, with large margin, small 4 to. cloth, 10s. 6d. Books printed at the Clare7tdon Press. 3 Hovum Testamentum Graece juxta exemplar Millianum. 1868. i 2mo. clo'h, 2s. bd. The same on writing paper, with large margin, small 4to. cloth, 6s. 6d. Evaxigelia Sacra Graece. 1870. fcap. 8vo. limp, is. 6d. The New Testament in Greek and English, on opposite pages, arranged and edited by E Cardwell, D.D. 2 vols. 1837. crown 8vo. cloth, 6s. Horae Hebraicae et Talmudicae, a J. Lightfoot. A new Edition, by R Gandell. M.A. 4 vols. 1859. 8vo. cloth. Price reduced from 2/. 2s. to ll. is. Eaedae Historia Ecclesiastiea. Edited, with English Notes, by G. H. Moberly, M.A., Fellow of C.C.C., Oxford. 1869. crown 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d. Bingham's Antiquities of the Christian Church, and other Works. 10 vols. 1855. 8vo. cloth. Price reduced from 5/. 5s. to 3/. 3s. Burnet's History of the Reformation of the Church of England. A new Edition. Carefully revised, and the Records collated with the originals, by N. Pocock, MA. With a Preface by the Editor. 7 vols. 1865. 8vo. cloth, 4. 4*. Records of the Reformation. The Divorce, 1 527-1 533. Mostly now for the first time printed from MSS. in the British Museum, and other Libraries. Collected and arranged by N. Pocock, M A. 2 vols. 8vo. cloth, ll. l6s. Just published. Councils and Ecclesiastical Documents relating to Great Britain and Ireland. Edited, after Spelman and Wilkins, by A. W. Haddan, B.D., and William Stubbs, M.A., Regius Professor of Modern History, Oxford. Vol. I. 1869. medium 8vo. cloth, ll. is. Vols. II. and III. in the Press. Eusebii Pamphili Historia Ecclesiastiea. Edidit E. Burton, S.T.P.R. 1856. 8vo. cloth, 8s. 6J. Patrum Apostolicorum, S. Clementis Romani, S. Ignatii, S. Polycarpi, quae supersunt. Edidit Guil. Jacobson, S.T.P.R. Tomi II. Fourth Edition. 1863. 8vo cloth, ll. Js. Reliquiae Sacrae secundi tertiique saeculi. Recensuit M. J. Routh, S.T.P. Tomi V. Second Edition. 1846-1848. 8vo. cloth. Price reduced from 2/. us. to ll. 5s. Scriptorum Ecclesiasticorum Opuseula. Recensuit M. J. Routh, S.T.P. Tomi II. Third Edition. 1858. 8vo. cloth. Price reduced from ll. to 10s. Shirley's (W. W.) Some Account of the Church in the Apostolic Age. 1867. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d. ENGLISH THEOLOGY. Butler's Works, with an Index to the Analogy. 2 vols. 1849. Svo. cloth, lis. Greswell's Harmonia Evangelica. Fifth Edition. 1856. 8vo. cloth, 9s. 6d. Homilies appointed to be read in Churches. Edited by J. Griffiths, INI. A. 1859. 8vo. cloth. Price reduced from ics. 6d. to "js.6d. Hooker's Works, with his Life by Walton, arranged by John Keble, M.A. Fifth Edition. 1865. 3 vols. 8vo. cloth, il. us. 6d. Hooker's Works ; the text as arranged by John Keble, M.A. 2 vols. 1865. Svo. cloth, us. 4 Books printed at the Clarendon Press. Pearson's Exposition of the Creed. Revised and corrected by E. Burton, D.D. Fifth Edition. 1864. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d. Water land's Review of the Doctrine of the Eucharist, with a Preface by the present Bishop of London. 1868. crown 8vo. cloth, 6s. 6d. ENGLISH HISTORY. Clarendon's (Edw. Earl of) History of the Rebellion and Civil Wars in England. To which are subjoined the Notes of Bishop Warburton. 7 vols. 1849. medium 8vo. cloth, 2I. ics. Clarendon's (Edw. Earl of) History of the Rebellion and Civil Wars in England. 7 vols. 1839. it'mo. cloth, il. is. Freeman's (E. A.) History of the Norman Conquest of England : its Causes and Results. Vols. I. and II. A new Edition, with Index. 8vo. cloth, \l. 16s. Vol. III. The Reign of Harold and the Interregnum. 1869. 8vo. cloth, il. is. Rogers's History of Agriculture and Prices in England, a.d. 1 259-1400. 2 vols. 1866. 8vo. cloth, 2l. 2S. PHILOSOPHICAL WORKS, AND GENERAL LITERATURE. A Course of Lectures on Art, delivered before the University of Oxford in Hilary Term, 1870. By John Ruskin, M.A., Slade Professor of Fine Art. Demy 8vo. cloth, 6s. A Critical Account of the Drawings by Michel Angelo and Eaffaello in the University Galleries, Oxford. By J. C. Robinson, F. S.A. Crown 8vo. cloth, 4*. Bacon's Novum Organum, edited, with English notes, by G.W. Kitchin, M.A. 1855. 8vo. cloth, gs. 6d. Bacon's Novum Organum, translated by G. W. Kitchin, M.A. 1855. 8vo. cloth, gs. 6d. The Works of G-eorge Berkeley, D.D., formerly Bishop of Cloyne. Collected and edited, from published and unpublished sources, with Prefaces, Notes, Dissertations, and an Account of his Life and Philosophy, by Alexander Campbell Fraser, M.A., Professor of Logic and Metaphysics in the University of Edinburgh. Nearly ready. Smith's Wealth of Nations. A new Edition, with Notes, by J. E. Thorold Rogers, M.A. 2 vols. 8vo. cloth, il. is. MATHEMATICS, PHYSICAL SCIENCE, &c. Treatise on Infinitesimal Calculus. By Bartholomew Price, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Natural Philosophy, Oxford. Vol.1. Differential Calculus. Second Edition. 1858. 8vo. cloth, 14s. 6d. Vol. II. Integral Calculus, Calculus of Variations, and Differential Equations. Second Edition. 1865. 8vo, cloth, 18s. Vol. III. Statics, including Attractions ; Dynamics of a Material Particle. Second Edition. 1868. 8vo. cloth, 1 6s. Vol. IV. Dynamics of Material Systems ; together with a Chapter on Theo- retical Dynamics, by W. F. Donkin, M.A., F.R.S. 1862. 8vo. cloth, 16s. Vesuvius. By John Phillips, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Geology, Oxford. 1869. crown 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d. Clarnitom W>xm Sam. The Delegates of the Clarendon Press having under- taken the publication of a series of works, chiefly edu- cational, and entitled the (llarcntion |h'CSS Series, have published, or have in preparation, the following. Those to which prices are attached are already published ; the others are in preparation. I. GREEK AND LATIN CLASSICS, fee. A Greek Primer in English, for the use of beginners. By the Right Rev. Charles Wordsworth, D.C.L.. Bishop of St. Andrews. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, is. td. Just published. Greek Verbs, Irregular and Defective ; their forms, meaning, and quantity : embracing all the Tenses used by Greek writers, with reference to the passages in which they are found. By W. Veitch. New and revised Edition. Ext. fcap. Svo. cloth, 8s. 6J. The Elements of Greek Accentuation (for Schools') : abridged from his larger work by H. W. Chandler. M.A., Waynflete Professor of Moral and Metaphysical Philosophy, Oxford. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Aesc n in es in Ctesiphontem and Demosthenes de Corona. With Introduction and Xotes. By G. A. Simcox, M.A., and W. H. Simcox, MA., Fellows of Queen's College, Oxford. Aristotle's Politics. By W. L. Newman, Ml A., Fellow and Lecturer of Balliol College, and Reader in Ancient History, Oxford. The Golden Treasury of Ancient Greek Poetry ; being a Collection of the finest passages in the Greek Classic Poets, with Introductory Xotices ano Notes. By R. S.Wright, M.A., Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford. Ext. fcap. Svo. cloth, 8s. 6J. A Golden Treasury of Greek Prose, being a Collection of the finest passages in the principal Greek Prose Writers, with Introductory Notices and Notes. By R. S. Wright, M.A., Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford;' and J. E. L. ■Shadwell, M.A., Senior Student of Christ Church. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 4s. 6d. Homer. Iliad. By D. B. Monro. M.A., Fellow and Tutor of Oriel College, Oxford. Homer. Odyssey, Books I-XII (for Schools). By W. W. Merry, M.A.. Fellow and Lecturer of Lincoln College, Oxford. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 4s. 6d. J-2iSt published. Homer. Odyssey, Books I-XII. By W.W. Merry, M.A., Fellow and Lecturer of Lincoln College, Oxford : and the late lames Riddell. M.A.. Fellow of Balliol College, Oxford. 6 Clarendon Press Series. Homer. Odyssey, Books XIII-XXIV. By Robinson Ellis, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Oxford. Plato. Selections (for Schools). With Notes, by B. Jowett, M.A., Regius Professor of Greek ; and J. Purves, M.A., Fellow and Lecturer of Balliol College, Oxford. Sophocles. Oedipus Rex : Dindorf s Text, with Notes by the Ven, Archdeacon Basil Jones, M.A., formerly Fellow of University College, Oxford. Second Edition. Ext. fcap. 8vo. limp cloth, is. 6d. Sophocles. By Lewis Campbell, M.A., Professor of Greek, St, Andrews, formerly Fellow of Queen's College, Oxford. In the Press. Theocritus (for Schools). With Notes, by H. Snow, M.A., Assistant Master at Eton College, formerly Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. Xenophon. Selections (for Schools). With Notes and Maps, by J. S. Phillpotts, B.C.L., Assistant Master in Rugby School, formerly Fellow of New College, Oxford. Just ready. Caesar. The Commentaries (for Schools). Part I. The Gallic War, with Notes, &c, by Charles E. Moberly, M.A., Assistant Master in Rugby School ; formerly Scholar of Balliol College, Oxford. Just ready. Also, to follow : Part II. The Civil War : by the same Editor. Cicero's Philippic Orations. With Notes, by J. R. King, M.A., formerly Fellow and Tutor of Merton College, Oxford. Demy 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d. Cicero pro Cluentio. With Introduction and Notes. By W. Ramsay, M.A. Edited by G. G. Ramsay, M.A., Professor of Humanity, Glasgow. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d. Cicero. Selection of interesting and descriptive passages. With Notes. By Henry Walford, M.A., Wadham College, Oxford, Assistant Master at Hailey- bury College. In three Parts. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. Each Part separately, limp, is. 6d. Part I. Anecdotes from Grecian and Roman History. Part II. Omens and Dreams : Beauties of Nature. Part III. Rome's Rule of her Provinces. Cicero. Select Letters. With English Introductions, Notes, and Appendices. By Albert Watson, M.A.. Fellow and Tutor of Brasenose College, Oxford. 8vo. cloth, 18$. Just published. Cicero de Oratore. With Introduction and Notes. By A. S. Wilkins, M.A., Professor of Latin, Owens College, Manchester. Cornelius Nepos. With Notes, by Oscar Browning, M.A., Fellow of King's College, Cambridge, and Assistant Master at Eton College. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Cicero and Pliny. Select Epistles (for Schools). With Notes by E. R. Bernard, M.A., Fellow of Magdalen College, Oxford; and the late C. E. Prichard, M.A., formerly Fellow of Balliol College, Oxford. Horace. With Introduction and Notes. By Edward C. Wickham, M.A., Fellow and Tutor of New College, Oxford. Also a small edition for Schools. Clarendon Press Series. 7 Livy, Books I-X. By J. R. Seeley, M.A., Fellow of Christ's College, and Regius Professor of Modern History, Cambridge, In the Press. Also a small edition for Schools. Ovid. Selections for the use of Schools. With Introductions and Notes, and an Appendix on the Roman Calendar. By Vv. Ramsay, M.A. Edited by G. G. Ramsay, M.A., Professor of Humanity, Glasgow. Ext. fcap. Svo. cloth, 5s. 6d. Fragments and Specimens of Early Latin. With Introduction, Notes, and Illustrations. By John Wordsworth, M.A., Fellow of Brasenose College, Oxford. Selections from the less known Latin Poets. By North Finder, MA., formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Oxford. Demy 8vo. cloth, 155. Passages for Translation into Latin. For the use of Passmen and others. Selected by J. Y. Sargent, M.A., Tutor, formerly Fellow, of Magdalen College, Oxford. Secotid Edition. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. II. MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY. The Elements of Deductive Logic, designed mainly for the use of Junior Students in the Universities. By T. Fowler, M.A., Fellow and Tutor of Lincoln College, Oxford. Third Edition, with a Collection of Examples. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d. The Elements of Inductive Logic, designed mainly for the use of Students in the Universities. By the same Author. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 6s. A Manual of Political Economy, for the use of Schools. By J. E. Thorold Rogers, M.A., formerly Professor of Political Economy, Oxford. Second Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 4s. 6d. III. MATHEMATICS, &c. Acoustics. By W. F. Donkin, M.A., F.R.S., Savilian Professor of Astro- nomy, Oxford. Crown 8vo. cloth, 7s. 6d. An Elementary Treatise on Quaternions. By P.G. Tait, M.A., Pro- fessor of Natural Philosophy in the University of Edinburgh ; formerly Fellow of St. Peter's College, Cambridge. Demy Svo. cloth, 1 2s. 6d. Book-keeping. By R. G. C. Hamilton, Accountant to the Board of Trade, and John Ball (of the Firm of Messrs. Quilter, Ball, and Co.), Ex- aminers in Book-keeping for the Society of Arts' Examination. Third Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. limp cloth, is. 6d. A Course of Lectures on Pure Geometry. By Henry J. Stephen Smith, M.A., F.R.S., Fellow of Balliol College, and Savilian Professor of Geometry in the University of Oxford. A Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism. By J. Clerk Maxwell, M.A., F.R.S., formerly Professor of Natural Philosophy, King's College, London, A Series of Elementary Works is being arranged, and will shortly be announced. Clarendon Press Series. IV. HISTORY. A Manual of Ancient History. By George Rawlinson, M.A., Camden Professor of Ancient History, formerly Fellow of Exeter College, Oxford. Demy 8vo. cloth, 14s Select Charters and other Illustrations of English Constitutional History ; from the Earliest Times to the Reign of Edward I. Arranged and edited by W. Stubbs, MA., Regius Professor of Modern History in the University of Oxford. Crown 8vo. cloth, 8s. 6c?. Just published. A Constitutional History of England. By the same Author. A History of Germany and of the Empire, down to the close of the Middle Ages. By J. Bryce, B.C.L., Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford. A History of Germany, from the Reformation. By Adolphus W. Ward, M.A., Fellow of St. Peter's College, Cambridge, Professor of History, Owens College, Manchester. A History of British India. By S. W. Owen, M.A., Lee's Reader in Law and History, Christ Church, and Reader in Indian Law in the University of Oxford. A History of Greece. By E. A. Freeman, M.A., formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Oxford. A History of France. By G. W. Kitchin, M.A., formerly Censor of Christ Church. V. LAW. Commentaries on Roman Law ; from the original and the best modern sources. By H. J. Roby, MA., formerly Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge ; Professor of Law at University College, London. 2 vols, demy 8vo. VI. PHYSICAL SCIENCE. Natural Philosophy. In four Volumes. By Sir W. Thomson, LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S., Professor of Natural Philosophy, Glasgow ; and P. G. Tait, M.A., Professor of Natural Philosophy, Edinburgh ; formerly Fellows of St. Peter's College, Cambridge. Vol. I. 8vo. cloth, il. 5s. By the same Authors, a smaller Work on the same subject, forming a complete Introduction to it, so far as it can be carried out with Elementary Geometry and Algebra. In the Press. Descriptive Astronomy. A Handbook for the General Reader, and also for Practical Observatory work. With 224 illustrations and numerous tables. By G. F. Chambers, F.R.A.S., Barrister-at-Law. Demy 8vo. 856 pp., cloth, il. is. Chemistry for Students. By A. W. Williamson, Phil. Doc., F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry, University College, London. A new Edition, with Solutions. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 8s. 6d. A Treatise on Heat, with numerous Woodcuts and Diagrams. By Balfour Stewart, LL.D., F.R.S., Director of the Observatory at Kew. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 7s. 6d. Forms of Animal Life. By G. Rolleston, M.D., F.R.S., Linacre Professor of Physiology, Oxford. Illustrated by Descriptions and Drawings of Dissections. Demy 8vo. cloth, 16s. Clarendon Press Series. 9 Exercises in Practical Chemistry. By A. G. Vernon Harcourt, M.A., F.R.S., Senior Student of Christ Church, and Lee's Reader in Chemistry ; and H. G. Madan, M.A., Fellow of Queen's College, Oxford Series I. Qualitative Exercises. Crown 8vo. cloth, Js. 6d. Series II. Quantitative Exercises. The Valley of the Thames ; its Physical Geography and Geology. By John Phillips, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Geology, Oxford. In the Press. Geology. By J. Phillips, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Geology, Oxford. Mechanics. By Bartholomew Price, M.A., F.R.S., Sedleian Professor of Natural Philosophy, Oxford. Optics. By R. B. Clifton, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Experimental Philosophy, Oxford ; formerly Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. Electricity. By W. Esson, M.A., F.R.S., Fellow and Mathematical Lecturer of Merton College, Oxford. Crystallography. By M. H. N. Story-Maskelyne, M.A., Professor of Mineralogy, Oxford ; and Deputy Keeper in the Department of Minerals, British Museum. Mineralogy. By the same Author. Physiological Physics. By G. Griffith, M.A., Jesus College, Oxford, Assistant Secretary to the British Association, and Natural Science Master at Harrow School. Magnetism. VII. ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. A First Reading Book. By Marie Eichens of Berlin ; and edited by Anne J. Clough. Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers, \d. Oxford Reading Book, Part I. For Little Children. Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers, 6d. Oxford Reading Book, Part II. For Junior Classes. Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers, 6d. On the Principles of Grammar. By E. Thring, M.A., Head Master of Uppingham School. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. Grammatical Analysis, designed to serve as an Exercise and Com- position Book in the English Language. By E. Thring, M.A., Head Master of Uppingham School. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d. Specimens of Early English ; being a Series of Extracts from the most important English Authors, Chronologically arranged, illustrative of the progress of the English Language and its Dialectic varieties, from a. d. 1250 to a. d. 1400. With Grammatical Introduction. Notes, and Glossary. By R. Morris, Editor of ' The Story of Genesis and Exodus,' &c. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, ~s. 6d. Specimens of English from a.d. 1394 to a.d. 1579 (from the Crede to Spenser^: selected by W. W. Skeat, M.A., formerly Fellow of Christ's College, Cambridge. io Clarendon Press Series. The Vision of William concerning Piers the Plowman, by William Langland. Edited, with Notes, by W. W. Skeat, M.A., formerly Fellow of Christ's College, Cambridge. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6rf. The Philology of the English Tongue. By J. Earle, M.A., formerly Fellow of Oriel College, and Professor of Anglo-Saxon, Oxford. In the Press. Typical Selections from the best English Authors from the Sixteenth to the Nineteenth Century, (to serve as a higher Reading Book,) with Intro- ductory Notices and Notes, being a contribution towards a History of English Literature. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6c?. Specimens of the Scottish Language ; being a Series of Annotated Extracts illustrative of the Literature and Philology of the Lowland Tongue from the Fourteenth to the Nineteenth Century. With Introduction and Glossary. By A. H. Burgess, M.A. See also XII. below for other English Classics. VIII. FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. An Etymological Dictionary of the French Language, with a Preface on the Principles of French Etymology. By A. Brachet Translated by G. W. Kitchin, M.A., formerly Censor of Christ Church. In the Press. Brachet' s Historical Grammar of the French Language. Trans- lated into English by G. W. Kitchin, M.A., formerly Censor of Christ Church. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d. Corneille's Cinna, and Moliere's Les Femmes Savantes. Edited, with Introduction and Notes, by Gustave Masson. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Racine's Andromaque, and Corneille's Le Menteur. With Louis Racine's Life of his Father. By the same Editor. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Moliere's Les Fourberies de Scapin, and Racine's Athalie. With Voltaire's Life of Moliere. By the same Editor. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, is. 6d. Selections from the Correspondence of Madame de Sevigne and her chief Contemporaries. Intended more especially for Girls' Schools. By the same Editor. Extra fcap. 8vo. clo'h, 3*.. Voyage autour de ma Chambre, by Xavier de Maistre ; Ourika, by Madame de Duras ; La Dot de Suzette, by Fievee ; Les Jumeaux de l'Hotel Corneille, by Edmond About ; Mesaventures d'un Ecolier, by Rodolphe Topffer. By the same Editor. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. A French Grammar. A complete Theory of the French Language, with the Rules in French and English, and numerous Examples to serve as first Exercises in the Language. By Jules Bue, Honorary M.A. of Oxford; Taylorian Teacher of French, Oxford ; Examiner in the Oxford Local Exami- nations from 1858. A French Grammar Test. A Book of Exercises on French Grammar; each Exercise being preceded by Grammatical Questions. By the same Author. Exercises in Translation No. 1, from French into English, with general rules on Translation ; and containing Notes, Hints, and Cautions, founded on a comparison of the Grammar and Genius of the two Languages. By the same Author. Exercises in Translation No. 2, from English into French, on the same plan as the preceding book. By the same Author. Clarendon Press Series. 1 1 IX. GERMAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. Goethe's Egmont. With a Life of Goethe, &c. By Dr. Buchheim, Professor of the German Language and Literature in King's College, London ; and Examiner in German to the University of London. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. With a Life of Schiller; an historical and critical Introduction, Arguments, and a complete Commentary. By the same Editor. In the Press. Lessing's Minna von Barnhelm. A Comedy. With a' Life of Lessing, Critical Commentary, &c. By the same Editor. X. ART, &e. A Handbook of Pictorial Art. By R. St. J. Tyrwhitt, M.A., for- merly Student and Tutor of Christ Church, Oxford With coloured Illustra- tions, Photographs, and a chapter on Perspective by A. Macdonald. 8vo. half morocco, iSs. A Treatise on Harmony. By Sir F. A. Gore Ouseley, Bart., M.A., Mus. Doc, Professor of Music in the University of Oxford. 4to. cloth, 10s. A Treatise on Counterpoint, Canon, and Fugue, based upon that of Cherubini. By the same Author. 4to. cloth, 16s. The Cultivation of the Speaking Voice. By John Hullah. Crown 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d. XI. MISCELLANEOUS. A System of Physical Education: Theoretical and Practical. By Archibald Maclaren, The Gymnasium, Oxford. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 7s. 6d. The Modern Greek Language in its relation to Ancient Greek. By E. M. Geldart, B.A., formerly Scholar of Balliol College, Oxford. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. XII. A SERIES OP ENGLISH CLASSICS. to meet the wants of Students in English Literature : under the superintendence of the Rev. J. S. Bkewer, M.A., of Queens College, Oxford, and Professor of English Literature at Kings College, London. It is also especially hoped that this Series may prove useful to Ladies' Schools and Middle Class Schools ; in which English Literature must always be a leading subject of instruction. A General Introduction to the Series. By Professor Brewer, M.A. 1. Chaucer. The Prologue to the Canterbury Tales ; The Knightes Tale ; The Nonne Prestes Tale. Edited by R. Morris, Editor of ' Specimens of Early English,' &c, &c. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. 2. Spenser's Faery Queene. Books I and II. Designed chiefly for the use of Schools, With Introduction, Notes, and Glossary. By G. W. Kitchin, M.A., formerly Censor of Christ Church. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. each. 12 Clarendon Press Series. 3. Hooker. Ecclesiastical Polity, Book I. Edited by R. W. Church, M.A., Rector of Whatley; formerly Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 4. Shakespeare. Select Plays. Edited by W. G. Clark, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge; and W. Aldis Wright, M.A., Trinity College, Cambridge. I. The Merchant of Venice. Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers, is. II. Richard the Second. Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers, is. 6d. III. Macbeth. Extra fcap, 8vo. stiff covers, is. 6d. 5. Bacon. Advancement of Learning. Edited by W. Aldis Wright, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. 6. Milton. Poems. Edited by R. C. Browne, M.A., and Associate of King's College, London. 2 vols, extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 6s. 6d. Also separately, Vol. I. 4s., Vol. II. 3s. 7. Dryden. Stanzas on the Death of Oliver Cromwell ; Astraea Redux ; Annus Mirabilis ; Absalom and Achitophel ; Religio Laici ; The Hind and Panther. Edited by W. D. Christie, M.A., Trinity College, Cambridge. Nearly ready. 8. Bunyan. Grace Abounding; The Pilgrim's Progress. Edited by E. Venables, M.A., Canon of Lincoln. 9. Pope. With Introduction and Notes. By Mark Pattison, B.D., Rector of Lincoln College, Oxford. I. Essay on Man. Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers, is. 6d. II. Epistles and Satires. 1 o. Johnson. Rasselas ; Lives of Pope and Dryden. Edited by C. H. O. Daniel, M.A., Fellow and Tutor of Worcester College, Oxford. 11. Burke. Thoughts on the Present Discontents; the two Speeches on America ; Reflections on the French Revolution. By Mark Pattison, B.D. , Rector of Lincoln College, Oxford. 12. Cowper. The Task, and some of his minor poems. Edited by J. C. Shairp, M.A., Principal of the United College, St. Andrews. Published for the University by M ACM ILL AN AND CO., LONDON The DELEGATES OF THE PRESS invite suggestions and adince from all persons interested in education; and (will be thankful for hints, fyc. addressed to either the Rev. G. W. KlTCHlN, St. Giles's Road East, Oxford, or the Secretary to the Delegates, Clarendon Press, Oxford. ^m^^^m i\V tP ^ '% <-> *£> A 0> ''W •^ y r h<. »o o^ ^